Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual
<Complete Guide>
Digital Camera
Model No.
DC-G9M2
Please read these instructions carefully before using this product.
Register online at
http://shop.panasonic.com/support/register
(U.S. customers only)
DVQP3010ZF
F0923KN5095
Dear European Customers
Please refer to the pages for “About an AC Adaptor and a USB Connection Cable
for European models” first.
The firmware has been updated to improve camera capabilities, add functionality,
and enhance security.
•
For details, refer to the “Firmware Update” pages.
until
2023/11/1
2
About Operating Instructions
This document, “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Complete
Guide>”, includes detailed explanations of all the functions and operations
of the camera.
Symbols Used in This Document
Black icons show conditions in which functions can be used, and gray icons show
conditions in which functions cannot be used.
Example:
Pictures/Videos
Recording mode
Operating symbols
In this document, camera operation is explained using the following symbols:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
About Operating Instructions
3
(A) :
Front dial
(B) :
Rear dial
(C) 3421:
Cursor button up/down/left/right
or
Joystick up/down/left/right
(D) :
Press the center of the joystick
(E) :
[MENU/SET] button
(F) :
Control dial
•
Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in
explanations.
•
This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows:
Example) Set [Picture Quality] of the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu to [STD.].
[] [] [Picture Quality] Select [STD.]
About Operating Instructions
4
Notification classification symbols
In this document, notifications are classified and described using the following
symbols:
: To confirm prior to using the function
: Hints for better use of the camera and tips for recording
: Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications
: Related functions and information
•
Images and illustrations used in this document are for explaining the functions.
•
Description in this document is based on the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060).
5
Contents
About Operating Instructions 2
Introduction 17
Before Use.................................................................................18
Standard Accessories................................................................21
Lenses That Can Be Used.........................................................23
Memory Cards That Can Be Used.............................................24
Names of Parts ..........................................................................27
Camera.............................................................................................. 27
Supplied Lens.................................................................................... 35
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays .............................................................. 37
Getting Started 39
Attaching a Shoulder Strap........................................................40
Charging the Battery..................................................................42
Battery Insertion ................................................................................ 43
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging .............................. 45
Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/
Charging)........................................................................................... 49
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply............................... 51
[Power Save Mode] ........................................................................... 53
Inserting Cards (Optional)..........................................................56
Attaching a Lens........................................................................60
Attaching a Lens Hood ...................................................................... 63
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle.................................66
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)............68
Contents
6
Basic Operations 72
How to Hold the Camera ...........................................................73
Selecting the Recording Mode...................................................75
Camera Setting Operations .......................................................76
Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings ..........................................82
Setting the Viewfinder ....................................................................... 82
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder ................................ 83
Switching the Display Information ..................................................... 86
Quick Menu................................................................................89
Control Panel .............................................................................91
Menu Operation Methods ..........................................................94
[Reset] ............................................................................................... 99
Entering Characters.................................................................100
Intelligent Auto Mode...............................................................101
Recording Using Touch Functions...........................................107
Touch AF/Touch Shutter ................................................................. 107
Touch AE......................................................................................... 110
Taking Pictures 112
Basic Picture Operations .........................................................113
[Aspect Ratio] ..........................................................................116
[Picture Size]............................................................................117
[Picture Quality] .......................................................................119
Recording Videos 121
Basic Video Operations ...........................................................122
[System Frequency].................................................................129
[Rec. File Format] ....................................................................131
Contents
7
[Rec Quality] ............................................................................133
[Image Area of Video] ..............................................................148
Focus / Zoom 150
Selecting the Focus Mode .......................................................151
Using AF ..................................................................................153
[AF-Point Scope] ............................................................................. 158
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ............................................................ 160
[Focus Limiter]................................................................................. 163
[AF Assist Light] .............................................................................. 165
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] ......................................................... 166
[AF Micro Adjustment] ..................................................................... 167
Selecting the AF Mode ............................................................171
Automatic Detection ........................................................................ 174
[Tracking]......................................................................................... 178
[Full Area AF] .................................................................................. 179
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone].................................................... 182
[1-Area+]/[1-Area]............................................................................ 184
[Pinpoint] ......................................................................................... 186
AF Area Operations .................................................................188
Move the Position of the AF Area.................................................... 188
Changing the Size of the AF Area ................................................... 191
Resetting the AF Area ..................................................................... 192
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position
([AF+AE])......................................................................................... 193
Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad ........................... 194
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]....................................................... 196
Record Using MF.....................................................................197
[Focus Peaking]............................................................................... 202
Recording with Zoom...............................................................204
Extended Tele Conversion .............................................................. 206
Contents
8
[Power Zoom Lens] ......................................................................... 208
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer 209
Selecting the Drive Mode.........................................................210
Taking Burst Pictures...............................................................212
High Resolution mode .............................................................223
Recording with Time Lapse Shot.............................................228
Recording with Stop Motion Animation....................................235
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ....................239
Recording Using the Self-timer................................................241
Bracket Recording ...................................................................245
[Live View Composite] .............................................................253
[Silent Mode]............................................................................257
[Shutter Type] ..........................................................................259
[Long Exposure NR] ........................................................................ 263
[Min. Shutter Speed]........................................................................ 264
[Shutter Delay]................................................................................. 265
Image Stabilizer.......................................................................266
Image Stabilizer Settings................................................................. 269
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity 276
[Metering Mode].......................................................................277
Program AE Mode ...................................................................279
Program Shift .................................................................................. 281
Aperture-Priority AE Mode.......................................................283
Shutter-Priority AE Mode .........................................................286
Manual Exposure Mode...........................................................289
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.) ..................................................... 292
[B] (Bulb) ......................................................................................... 293
Contents
9
Preview Mode ..........................................................................294
Exposure Compensation .........................................................296
[i.Dynamic Range] ........................................................................... 299
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) ............................300
ISO Sensitivity .........................................................................302
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]................................................................... 306
White Balance / Image Quality 307
White Balance (WB) ................................................................308
Adjusting the White Balance ........................................................... 314
[Photo Style] ............................................................................316
[Filter Settings].........................................................................329
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]..................................................... 334
[LUT Library] ............................................................................335
Lens Compensation.................................................................338
[Vignetting Comp.]........................................................................... 338
[Diffraction Compensation] .............................................................. 339
Flash 340
Using an External Flash (Optional)..........................................341
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover........................................................ 342
Setting Flash............................................................................344
[Flash Mode].................................................................................... 345
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.] ............................................... 348
[Flash Adjust.].................................................................................. 350
[Flash Synchro] ............................................................................... 351
[Auto Exposure Comp.] ................................................................... 352
Recording Using a Wireless Flash...........................................353
Contents
10
Video Settings 360
Recording Modes Specifically for Video
(Creative Video/S&Q) ..............................................................361
Displays Suited to Video Recording ................................................ 362
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos..................................... 363
Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures ................... 367
Using AF (Video) .....................................................................369
[Continuous AF]............................................................................... 369
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]............................................................. 371
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ........................................................ 372
Video Brightness and Coloring ................................................374
[Luminance Level] ........................................................................... 374
[Master Pedestal Level]................................................................... 375
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)......................... 376
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] ................................................................... 378
Audio Settings..........................................................................379
[Sound Rec Level Disp.].................................................................. 380
[Mute Sound Input] .......................................................................... 381
[Sound Rec Gain Level] .................................................................. 382
[Sound Rec Level Adj.].................................................................... 383
[Sound Rec Quality] ........................................................................ 384
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ............................................................... 385
[Wind Noise Canceller].................................................................... 386
[Lens Noise Cut].............................................................................. 387
[Audio Information] .......................................................................... 388
External Microphones (Optional) .............................................389
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional) ................ 392
Reduction of Wind Noise................................................................. 393
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)........................................394
[4ch Mic Input] ................................................................................. 396
Contents
11
Headphones ............................................................................397
[Sound Monitoring Channel] ............................................................ 399
Time Code ...............................................................................401
Setting the Time Code..................................................................... 402
Main Assist Functions..............................................................405
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]............................................................... 406
[SS/Gain Operation] ........................................................................ 407
[WFM/Vector Scope] ....................................................................... 409
[Luminance Spot Meter] .................................................................. 413
[Zebra Pattern] ................................................................................ 415
[Frame Marker]................................................................................ 417
Color Bars/Test Tone ...................................................................... 419
Special Video Recording 421
Slow & Quick Video .................................................................422
High Frame Rate Video ...........................................................429
[Focus Transition] ....................................................................432
Log Recording .........................................................................437
[V-Log View Assist] ......................................................................... 441
HLG Videos .............................................................................442
[HLG View Assist]............................................................................ 445
Anamorphic Recording ............................................................446
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ................................................... 448
[Synchro Scan] ........................................................................450
[Segmented File Recording] ....................................................452
List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be
Recorded .................................................................................453
Contents
12
HDMI Output (Video) 461
Connecting HDMI Devices.......................................................462
HDMI Output Image Quality.....................................................463
Images Output via HDMI ................................................................. 463
HDMI Output Settings..............................................................468
Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI..................... 469
Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder ................. 470
Outputting Audio via HDMI.............................................................. 471
Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI.................. 471
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) 472
Compatible External SSDs ......................................................473
Connecting the External SSD ..................................................474
Formatting the External SSD ...................................................477
Notes About External SSDs.....................................................478
Playing Back and Editing of Images 480
Playing Back Pictures ..............................................................481
Playing Back Videos................................................................483
Video Repeat Playback ................................................................... 487
Extracting a Picture ......................................................................... 489
[Video Divide] .................................................................................. 490
Switching the Display Mode.....................................................492
Enlarged Display ............................................................................. 493
Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 495
Calendar Playback .......................................................................... 497
Group Images ..........................................................................498
Deleting Images.......................................................................500
[RAW Processing]....................................................................502
Contents
13
[Video Repair] ..........................................................................511
[Playback] Menu ......................................................................514
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu......................... 514
[Playback] ([Playback Mode]) .......................................................... 516
[Playback] ([Process Image])........................................................... 519
[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.])......................................................... 520
[Playback] ([Edit Image]) ................................................................. 521
[Playback] ([Others])........................................................................ 525
Camera Customization 526
Fn Buttons ...............................................................................527
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons .............................................. 530
Use the Fn Buttons.......................................................................... 541
[Dial Operation Switch] ............................................................542
Register Functions to the Dials........................................................ 542
Temporarily Change Dial Operation ................................................ 544
Quick Menu Customization......................................................545
Register to the Quick Menu ............................................................. 545
Custom Mode ..........................................................................552
Register in Custom Mode................................................................ 553
Using Custom Mode........................................................................ 555
Calling Up Settings.......................................................................... 556
[Custom] Menu ........................................................................557
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])..................................................... 558
[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]) .................................................... 564
[Custom] menu ([Operation]) ........................................................... 570
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) ................................... 576
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) ................................... 587
[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])............................................................... 591
[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]) ..................................................... 592
Contents
14
[Setup] Menu ...........................................................................596
[Setup] menu ([Card/File]) ............................................................... 597
[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]) ................................................... 602
[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]) ................................................................. 607
[Setup] menu ([Setting]) .................................................................. 612
[Setup] menu ([Others])................................................................... 614
My Menu ..................................................................................618
Registration in My Menu.................................................................. 618
Edit My Menu .................................................................................. 619
List of Menu 620
[Photo] menu ...........................................................................621
[Video] menu............................................................................623
[Custom] menu ........................................................................626
[Setup] menu ...........................................................................630
[My Menu] ................................................................................632
[Playback] menu ......................................................................633
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth 634
Connecting to a Smartphone ...................................................636
Installing “LUMIX Sync” .................................................................. 637
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection) ..................... 638
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])........................... 644
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations....................................................................................... 650
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone ..............................652
[Remote shooting] ........................................................................... 654
[Shutter Remote Control]................................................................. 656
[Import images]................................................................................ 659
[Auto Transfer]................................................................................. 661
Contents
15
[Location Logging] ........................................................................... 663
[Remote Wakeup]............................................................................ 665
[Auto Clock Set]............................................................................... 667
[Camera settings copy].................................................................... 668
Sending Images from the Camera to a PC..............................669
Wi-Fi Connections ...................................................................673
[Via Network] ................................................................................... 674
[Direct] ............................................................................................. 678
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings......................... 680
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi] ...................................................... 682
Send Settings and Selecting Images.......................................683
Image Send Settings ....................................................................... 683
Selecting Images............................................................................. 684
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ..................................................................685
Connecting to Other Devices 687
Connecting...............................................................................688
Viewing on a TV.......................................................................690
Importing Images to a PC ........................................................694
Copying Images to a PC ................................................................. 695
Installing Software ........................................................................... 698
Storing on a Recorder..............................................................699
Tethered Recording .................................................................700
Installing Software ........................................................................... 701
Operating the Camera from a PC.................................................... 702
Materials 703
Digital Camera Accessory System ..........................................704
Using Optional Accessories.....................................................706
Battery Grip (Optional) .................................................................... 707
Contents
16
Shutter Remote Control (Optional) .................................................. 709
Tripod Grip (Optional)...................................................................... 711
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)................................. 712
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays ....................................................713
Recording Screen............................................................................ 713
Playback Screen ............................................................................. 729
Message Displays....................................................................734
Troubleshooting .......................................................................738
Power, Battery................................................................................. 739
Recording ........................................................................................ 740
Video ............................................................................................... 745
Playback.......................................................................................... 746
Monitor/Viewfinder........................................................................... 747
Flash................................................................................................ 748
Wi-Fi Function ................................................................................. 749
TV, PC............................................................................................. 752
Others.............................................................................................. 753
Cautions for Use ......................................................................754
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Available Recording Time with the Battery ..............................765
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Video Recording Time According to Recording Media ............770
Continuous Recording Time for Video.....................................779
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for
Copying....................................................................................781
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode...805
Specifications...........................................................................812
Trademarks and Licenses .......................................................828
Introduction – Before Use
18
Before Use
Firmware of Your Camera/Lens
Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add
functionality.
Make sure that the firmware of the camera/lens you purchased is the latest version.
We recommend using the latest firmware version.
•
To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera and
select [Firmware Version] in the [Setup] ([Others]) menu. You can also update the
firmware in [Firmware Version]. ([Firmware Version]: 617)
•
For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware,
visit the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index.html
(English only)
Handling of the Camera
When using the camera, take care not to drop it, bump it, or apply undue force.
These may cause malfunction or damage to the camera and lens.
If sand, dust, or liquid gets on the monitor, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.
When using in low temperatures (−10 oC to 0 oC (14 oF to 32 oF))
– Before use, attach a Panasonic lens with a minimum recommended operating
temperature of −10 oC (14 oF).
Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.
This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a precision device.
If you shake the camera while turning the camera off, a sensor may operate or a
rattling sound may be heard. This is caused by the image stabilizer mechanism
in the body. It is not a malfunction.
Introduction – Before Use
19
Splash Resistant
Splash Resistant is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this
camera offers against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust.
Splash Resistant does not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is
subjected to direct contact with water.
In order to minimize the possibility of damage please be sure the following
precautions are taken:
– Splash Resistant works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically
designed to support this feature.
– Securely close the doors, contact points cover, etc.
– When the lens or cap is removed or a door is open, do not allow sand, dust, and
moisture to enter inside.
– If liquid gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor
is Fogged Up)
•
Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Take care
as this may lead to soiling, mold, and malfunctions in the lens, viewfinder, and
monitor.
•
If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The fog
will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the
ambient temperature.
Introduction – Before Use
20
Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance
Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that
recording can be performed normally.
No Compensation Regarding Recording
Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could
not be performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.
Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights
Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for
other than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.
Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the
purpose of personal enjoyment.
Also Read “Cautions for Use” (Cautions for Use: 754)
Introduction – Standard Accessories
21
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
•
The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where
the camera was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual
<Quick Start Guide>” (supplied).
*1 This is attached to the camera at the time of purchase.
≥Digital camera body
(This is referred to as camera in this document.)
≥Battery pack
(This is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.)
•
Charge the battery before use.
≥AC adaptor
•
This is used for charging and power supply.
≥USB connection cable
≥Shoulder strap
≥Body cap
*1
≥Hot shoe cover
*1
≥Cover for the battery grip connector
*1
Introduction – Standard Accessories
22
*2 This is attached to the lens at the time of purchase.
•
The memory card is optional.
•
Consult the dealer or Panasonic if you lose the supplied accessories. (You can
purchase the accessories separately.)
Items Supplied with DC-G9M2L (Lens Kit Product)
≥Interchangeable lens:
H-ES12060 “LEICA DG VARIO-ELMARIT 12-60mm/F2.8-4.0
ASPH./POWER O.I.S.”
•
Dust and splash resistant
•
The recommended operating temperature is from −10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to
104 oF)
≥Lens hood
≥Lens cap
*2
≥Lens rear cap
*2
Items Supplied with DC-G9M2M (Lens Kit Product)
≥Interchangeable lens:
H-FS12060 “LUMIX G VARIO 12-60mm/F3.5-5.6 ASPH./POWER
O.I.S.”
•
Dust and splash resistant
•
The recommended operating temperature is from 0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to
104 oF)
≥Lens hood
≥Lens cap
*2
≥Lens rear cap
*2
Introduction – Lenses That Can Be Used
23
Lenses That Can Be Used
The camera can use the dedicated lenses that comply with the Micro Four
Thirds™ system lens mount specification (Micro Four Thirds mount).
About the Lens and Functions
Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as focus, image
stabilizer, and zoom functions, may be disabled or operate differently.
•
Refer to catalogs/websites for information regarding supported lenses.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
•
The focal lengths marked on a Micro Four Thirds lens are equivalent to twice
those of a 35 mm film camera.
(The focal lengths will be equivalent to those of a 100 mm lens in 35 mm terms
when a 50 mm lens is used.)
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
24
Memory Cards That Can Be Used
This section describes the memory cards that can be used with this
camera. (As of September 2023)
Card slot 1/Card slot 2: SD memory card
•
The camera supports UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3 standard and UHS-II Video
Speed Class 90 standard SD cards.
•
SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards are referred to
by the generic name of SD cards or cards in this document.
•
For information on memory cards with confirmed operation, check the
following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
SD memory card/SDHC memory card/SDXC memory card (Maximum 512 GB)
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
25
SD Cards That Can Be Used with This Camera
When using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD
Speed Class, UHS Speed Class, and Video Speed Class.
•
Speed classes are standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for
continuous writing.
[Video Record]
•
The following types of video cannot be recorded to SD cards. You will need a
commercially available external SSD for recording. (Using an External SSD
(Commercially Available): 472)
– [MOV] video with bit rate of 800 Mbps or more
– [Apple ProRes] video with resolution other than FHD
– Slow & Quick video with a recording quality with image compression system
ALL-Intra
Bit rate of the
recording quality
Speed Class
Example of
indication
72 Mbps or less
Class 10
UHS Speed Class 1 or higher
Video Speed Class 10 or higher
200 Mbps or less
UHS Speed Class 3
Video Speed Class 30 or higher
400 Mbps or less Video Speed Class 60 or higher
600 Mbps or less Video Speed Class 90
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
26
•
You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by setting the write-protect
switch (A) on the SD card to “LOCK”.
•
The data stored on a card may be damaged due to electromagnetic waves, static
electricity or a failure of the camera or card. We recommend backing up
important data.
•
Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
(A)
Introduction – Names of Parts
28
(1) Drive mode dial (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
(2) Hot shoe (hot shoe cover) (Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 342)
•
Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
(3) Stereo microphone (Audio Settings: 379)
•
Do not block the microphone with a finger. Audio will be difficult to record.
(4) Front dial (Front Dial/Rear Dial: 77)
(5) Shutter button (Basic Picture Operations: 113)
(6) [WB] (White balance) button (White Balance (WB): 308)
(7) [ISO] (ISO sensitivity) button (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
(8) [ ] (Exposure compensation) button (Exposure Compensation: 296)
(9) Charging light (Charging Light Indications: 46)/
Network connection light (Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
functions: 634)
(10) Video rec. button (Basic Video Operations: 122)
(11) [ ] (Recording distance reference mark) (Operations on the MF Assist
Screen: 199)
(12) Rear dial (Front Dial/Rear Dial: 77)
(13) Camera on/off switch (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time):
68)
(14) Mode dial (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
Introduction – Names of Parts
29
(15) [LVF] button (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83)
(16) [ ] (Playback) button (Playing Back and Editing of Images: 480)
(17) Monitor (Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 37, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 713)/
Touch screen (Touch Screen: 80)
(18) [ ] (AF mode) button (Selecting the AF Mode: 171)
(19) Focus mode lever (Selecting the Focus Mode: 151, Using AF: 153, Record
Using MF: 197)
(20) [AF ON] button ([AF ON] button: 155)
(21) Joystick (Joystick: 79)/
Fn buttons (Fn Buttons: 527)
1: Fn13, 3: Fn14, 2: Fn15, Center: Fn16, 4: Fn17
(27)
(26)
(25)
(24)
(23)
(22)
(21)
(20)
(19)
(18)
(17)
(16)
(15)
Introduction – Names of Parts
30
(22) [Q] (Quick menu) button (Quick Menu: 89)
(23) Cursor buttons (Cursor Buttons: 78)/
Fn buttons (Fn Buttons: 527)
3: Fn9, 1: Fn10, 4: Fn11, 2: Fn12
(24) Control dial (Control Dial: 77)
(25) [MENU/SET] button ([MENU/SET] Button: 78, Menu Operation Methods: 94)
(26) [DISP.] button (Switching the Display Information: 86)
(27) [ ] (Cancel) button (Menu Operation Methods: 94)/
[ ] (Delete) button (Deleting Images: 500)/
Fn button (Fn1) (Fn Buttons: 527)
Introduction – Names of Parts
31
(28) Eye sensor (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83)
(29) Viewfinder (Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 37, Switching Between the Monitor
and Viewfinder: 83, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 713)
(30) Eye cup (Cleaning the Viewfinder: 757)
(31) Speaker ([Beep]: 607)
(32) Tripod mount (Tripod: 763)
•
If you attempt to attach a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm (0.22 inch) or
more, you may not be able to securely fix it in place or it may damage the
camera.
(33) Battery grip connector (cover for the battery grip connector) (Battery Grip
(Optional): 707)
•
Keep the cover for the battery grip connector out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
(36)
(34)
(37)
(29)
(33)
(28)
(30)
(32)
(40)
(42)
(39)
(41)
(35)
(38)
(31)
Introduction – Names of Parts
32
(34) [REMOTE] socket (Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 709)
(35) Card slot 1 (Inserting Cards (Optional): 56)
(36) Card access light 1 (Card Access Indications: 58)
(37) Card slot 2 (Inserting Cards (Optional): 56)
(38) Card access light 2 (Card Access Indications: 58)
(39) Card door (Inserting Cards (Optional): 56)
(40) DC Coupler cover (AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 712)
•
When using an AC adaptor, ensure that the Panasonic DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional) and AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) are used.
•
Always use a genuine Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional).
•
When using an AC Adaptor (optional), use the AC cable/AC mains lead
supplied with the AC Adaptor (optional).
(41) Battery door (Battery Insertion: 43)
(42) Battery door release lever (Battery Insertion: 43)
Introduction – Names of Parts
33
(43) Shoulder strap eyelet (Attaching a Shoulder Strap: 40)
(44) AF-Point Scope button ([AF-Point Scope]: 158)/
Fn button (Fn2) (Fn Buttons: 527)
(45) Grip
(46) Preview button (Preview Mode: 294)/
Fn button (Fn3) (Fn Buttons: 527)
(47) Self-timer light (Recording Using the Self-timer: 241)/
AF assist light ([AF Assist Light]: 165)
(45)
(46)
(57)
(58)(56)
(44)
(52)
(50)
(49)
(48)
(47)
(54)(53) (43)
(51)
(43)
(55)
Introduction – Names of Parts
34
(48) Diopter adjustment dial (Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter: 82)
(49) [MIC] socket (External Microphones (Optional): 389)
(50) Headphone socket (Headphones: 397)
•
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause
hearing loss.
(51) HDMI socket (Connecting HDMI Devices: 462, HDMI socket: 688)
(52) USB port (Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 45, Connecting
the External SSD: 474, USB port: 689)
(53) Lens fitting mark (Attaching a Lens: 60)
(54) Sensor
(55) Contact points
(56) Mount
(57) Lens lock pin
(58) Lens release button (Removing a Lens: 62)
Introduction – Names of Parts
35
Supplied Lens
H-ES12060
H-FS12060
(4)
(6) (7)(1) (2) (3) (5) (8)
(6) (7)(1) (2) (3) (8)
Introduction – Names of Parts
36
(1) Lens surface
(2) Focus ring (Record Using MF: 197)
(3) Zoom ring (Recording with Zoom: 204)
(4) O.I.S. switch (Image Stabilizer: 266)
(5) [AF/MF] switch (Using AF: 153, Record Using MF: 197)
•
You can switch between AF and MF.
If [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.
(6) Contact points
(7) Lens mount rubber
(8) Lens fitting mark (Attaching a Lens: 60)
Introduction – Names of Parts
37
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays
At the time of purchase, the viewfinder/monitor displays the following
icons.
•
For information about the icons other than those described here (Monitor/
Viewfinder Displays: 713)
Viewfinder
Monitor
999
ISO100
F
2.860
L
FINE
AFSAFS
(8) (9)(10)(11)(12) (13) (14) (15) (16)(17)
(1) (2) (4)(3) (5) (6) (7)
999
ISO
100F2.860
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
Introduction – Names of Parts
38
(1) Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 316)
(2) Level gauge ([Level Gauge]: 585)
(3) Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 119)/
Picture size ([Picture Size]: 117)
(4) AF area (AF Area Operations: 188)
(5) Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 151, Using AF: 153, Record Using
MF: 197)
(6) AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 171)
(7) Image stabilizer (Image Stabilizer: 266)
(8) Focus (green) (Basic Picture Operations: 113, Using AF: 153)/
Recording state (red) (Basic Video Operations: 122, High Resolution mode:
223)
(9) Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
(10) Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 277)
(11) Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 113, Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 286)
(12) Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 113, Aperture-Priority AE Mode:
283)
(13) Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation: 296)/
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 291)
(14) ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
(15) Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 56)/
Double card slot function ([Double Card Slot Function]: 598)
(16) Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
and Video Recording Time According to Recording Media: 770)/
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of Pictures That
Can Be Taken Continuously: 218)
(17) Battery indication (Power Indications: 51)
•
Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap
40
Attaching a Shoulder Strap
Attach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to
prevent it from dropping.
1
2
3
Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap
41
•
Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out.
•
Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure.
•
Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
•
Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
4
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
42
Charging the Battery
≥ Battery Insertion: 43
≥ Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 45
≥ Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/
Charging): 49
≥ Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply: 51
≥ [Power Save Mode]: 53
You can charge the battery in the camera body.
You can also turn on the camera and supply power from an electrical
outlet.
You can also use the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional).
• The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLK22. (As of
September 2023)
•
The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery before
use.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
43
Battery Insertion
•
Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLK22).
•
If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
•
Check that the lever (A) is holding the battery in place.
•
Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].
1
2
(A)
3
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
44
Removing the Battery
1 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2 Open the battery door.
3 Push the lever (A) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the battery.
•
Check that the card access lights are off before removing the battery. (Card
Access Indications: 58)
•
Ensure that no foreign objects are adhering to the inner side (cushion) of the
battery door.
•
Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will drain if left inserted in the camera for a long period of time.)
•
The battery becomes warm after use, during charging, and immediately after
charging.
The camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
•
Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
(A)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
45
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging
Charging time: Approx. 220 min
•
Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor.
•
The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
•
Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
46
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2
Insert the battery into the camera.
3
Connect the camera USB port and the AC adaptor using
the USB connection cable.
•
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction.)
4
Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
•
The charging light (B) turns red and charging begins.
Charging Light Indications
Charging light (red)
On: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
Blinking: Charging error.
3
4
1
2
(B)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
47
•
You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and the
camera with the USB connection cable.
In that case, charging may take a while.
•
The battery in the Battery Grip (DMW-BG1/DMW-BGS5: optional) cannot be
charged.
•
Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
•
Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
•
After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.
•
While the charging light is blinking red, charging is not possible.
– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too low.
Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 oF and
86 oF).
– The terminals of the battery are dirty.
Remove the battery and wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth.
•
Even when the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF] thus turning the camera off, it
consumes power.
When the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the power plug from
the electrical outlet in order to save power.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
48
Power Supply
When the battery is inserted into the camera for charging and the camera
is turned on, you can record while the camera is being supplied with power.
•
[ ] is displayed in the screen while power is being supplied.
•
You can also supply power by using a USB connection cable to connect the
camera and a USB device (PC, etc.).
•
The battery cannot be charged while power is being supplied.
•
Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.
•
Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions.
When the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.
•
To reduce battery consumption, we recommend using USB PD supported
devices with output of 9 V/3 A (27 W or more).
•
Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not
be possible to supply power.
•
For information about the high temperature display (For information
about the high temperature display: 127)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
49
Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power
(Supplying Power/Charging)
Since this camera and the items supplied with the Battery Charger
(DMW-BTC15: optional) are compatible with USB PD (USB Power
Delivery), you can charge while the camera is being supplied with power.
Connect the USB connection cable, AC adaptor and AC cable/AC mains
lead of the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional) to the camera.
Charging time: Approx. 170 min
•
Use the camera body and the AC adaptor supplied with the Battery Charger
(DMW-BTC15: optional). The camera is turned off.
•
The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
(C) USB connection cable
(D) AC adaptor
(E) AC cable/AC mains lead
(C)
(D) (E)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
50
•
Insert the battery into the camera.
•
Connect using the USB connection cable of the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15:
optional).
•
When the camera is on, charging will take longer than when the camera is off.
•
Even when connecting with devices that support USB PD, you may not be able
to charge while using the camera.
•
If connecting with devices (PC, etc.) that do not support USB PD and turning the
camera on, then this will supply power only.
•
Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the power plug.
•
Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions.
When the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.
•
Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not
be possible to supply power.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
51
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply
Power Indications
Indication on monitor
(F) USB connection cable supplying power
(G) Battery indication
(H) Using the battery in the Battery Grip
•
The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate.
The exact level varies depending on the environment and the operating conditions.
80 % or higher
60 % to 79 %
40 % to 59 %
20 % to 39 %
19 % or below
Blinking in red
Low battery
•
Charge or replace the battery.
(F) (G) (H)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
52
•
We recommend that genuine Panasonic batteries are used.
There is a possibility that the use of non-genuine batteries can cause
accidents or malfunctions that may lead to fire or explosion.
Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure resulting
from the use of non-genuine batteries.
•
Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power
plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
•
Do not use the AC adaptor or USB connection cable on other devices.
This may cause a malfunction.
•
Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.
•
The battery can be charged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery
is fully charged.
(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)
•
If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then
charging may not complete successfully.
Reconnect the power plug.
•
Do not connect to keyboard or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.
•
If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging/power supply may stop.
•
If the battery indication does not go to [ ] even when charging is complete,
the battery may be deteriorating.
Try not to use that battery.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
53
[Power Save Mode]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save)
status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a
set time. Reduces battery consumption.
[] [] Select [Power Save Mode]
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
54
•
To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting],
perform one of the following operations:
– Press the shutter button halfway.
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.
•
To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press any button.
[Sleep Mode]
Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep.
•
The power consumption of the camera may increase when
[Sleep Mode] is set to [OFF].
[Sleep
Mode(Wi-Fi)]
Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected
from Wi-Fi.
•
The power consumption of the camera may increase when
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] is set to [OFF].
[Auto LVF/
Monitor Off]
Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor to turn
off.
(The camera is not turned off.)
[Power Save
LVF Shooting]
Puts the camera to sleep when the recording screen is being
displayed on the monitor when automatic viewfinder/monitor
switching is active.
[Time to Sleep]
Sets the amount of time until the camera is
put to sleep.
[Method of
Activation]
Sets the screen where the camera is put to
sleep.
[Only Control Panel]: Puts the camera to
sleep only when the control panel (Control
Panel: 91) is displayed.
[While Recording Standby]: Puts the
camera to sleep from any screen during
recording standby.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
55
•
[Power Save Mode] is not available in the following cases:
– While connected to a PC
– During video recording/video playback
– During a [Time Lapse Shot]
– When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When recording with [Live View Composite]
– When recording with [Focus Transition]
– During a [Slide Show]
– During HDMI output for recording
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
57
(A) Card slot 1
(B) Card slot 2
•
Match the orientation of the cards as shown in the figure and then insert them firmly
until they click.
•
You can set the way to record to card slots 1 and 2:
([Double Card Slot Function]: 598)
•
You can set the folder and file name where to save the images:
([Folder / File Settings]: 599)
2
(A)
(B)
3
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
58
Card Access Indications
The card access light turns on while the card is being accessed.
(C) Card access light for card slot 1
(D) Card access light for card slot 2
•
The card may be warm just after the camera has been used.
•
Do not perform the following operations during access.
The camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images may
be damaged.
– Turn off the camera.
– Remove the battery or card or disconnect the power plug.
– Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
(C)
(D)
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
59
Removing a Card
1 Open the card door.
2 Push the card until it clicks and then pull the card out straight.
•
Check that the card access lights are off before removing the card.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
60
Attaching a Lens
≥ Attaching a Lens Hood: 63
The camera can use the dedicated lenses that comply with the Micro Four
Thirds™ system lens mount specification (Micro Four Thirds mount).
For information about the lens that can be used (Lenses That Can Be
Used: 23)
•
Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].
•
Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust.
If dirt or dust gets on the lens (Dirt on the Image Sensor: 756)
•
Change the lens while the lens cap is attached.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
61
(A) Lens fitting marks
1
2
(A)
3
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
62
Removing a Lens
•
While pressing the lens release button (B), rotate the lens in the direction of the
arrow until it stops and then remove it.
•
When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function
with this camera, after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation
of the lens information is displayed. You can register the focal length for the lens
when you select [Yes]. You can also select from amongst already registered lens
information. ([Lens Information]: 274)
•
You can change the settings so that the confirmation message is not displayed:
([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 595)
•
Insert the lens straight in.
Inserting this at an angle to attach it may damage the camera lens mount.
•
After removing the lens, be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.
(B)
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
63
Attaching a Lens Hood
For recording against strong backlight, a lens hood can reduce the
inclusion of unwanted light in images and drop in contrast resulting from
the irregular reflection of light that occurs within the lens.
It allows you take more beautiful pictures by cutting out excess light.
When attaching the lens hood (flower shape) supplied with the
interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/H-FS12060)
• Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in the figure.
• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will become bent.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
64
1
Align mark (C) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on
the tip of the lens.
2
Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to
align mark (D) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on
the tip of the lens.
≥Attach the lens hood by rotating it until it clicks.
(C)
(D)
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
65
Removing the Lens Hood (H-ES12060)
While pressing the lens hood button (E), rotate the lens hood in the
direction of the arrow and then remove it.
•
The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction when carrying the
camera.
Example) H-ES12060
1 Align mark (D) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
2 Attach the lens hood by rotating it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
(E)
(D)
Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
66
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
At the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
180°
1
90°
180°
2
3
Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
67
•
The angles of adjustment are guides only.
•
Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or
malfunction.
•
When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface facing in.
•
You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of
the monitor during recording:
([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 580)
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
68
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the
First Time)
When you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the time
zone and clock appears.
Be sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded
with the correct date and time information.
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON].
≥If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to Step
4
.
2
When [Please set the language] appears, press or
.
3
Set the language.
≥Press 34 to select the language and then press or .
4
When [Please set the time zone] appears, press or
.
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
69
5
Set the time zone.
≥Press 21 to select the time zone and then press or .
•
If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move
forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
(A) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
6
When [Please set the clock] appears, press or .
(A)
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
70
7
Set the clock.
21: Select an item (year, month, day, hour, minute, or second).
34: Select a value.
To set the display order and time display format
≥To display the screen for setting the display order (B) and time
display format (C), select [Style] by pressing 21 and then press
or .
(B) (C)
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
71
8
Confirm your selection.
≥Press or .
9
When [The clock setting has been completed.] appears,
press or .
•
If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to “0:00:00 1/1/2023”.
•
Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock
battery even without the battery.
(Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to charge the
built-in battery.)
•
[Time Zone] and [Clock Set] can be changed from the menu:
([Time Zone]: 614, [Clock Set]: 614)
72
Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic camera operations and the Intelligent Auto
mode which helps you start recording immediately.
≥ How to Hold the Camera: 73
≥ Selecting the Recording Mode: 75
≥ Camera Setting Operations: 76
≥ Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings: 82
≥ Quick Menu: 89
≥ Control Panel: 91
≥ Menu Operation Methods: 94
≥ Entering Characters: 100
≥ Intelligent Auto Mode: 101
≥ Recording Using Touch Functions: 107
Basic Operations – How to Hold the Camera
73
How to Hold the Camera
To minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during
recording.
Hold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your
side, and stand with your feet shoulder width apart.
≥ Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera
grip.
≥ Support the lens from below with your left hand.
•
Do not cover the AF assist light (A) or microphone (B) with your fingers or other
objects.
(A)
(B)
Basic Operations – How to Hold the Camera
74
Vertical Orientation Detection Function
This function detects when pictures were recorded with the camera held
vertically orientated.
With the default settings, pictures are automatically played back vertically
oriented.
•
If you set [Rotate Disp.] to [OFF], pictures will be played back without being rotated.
([Rotate Disp.]: 517)
•
When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation
detection function may not work correctly.
•
You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information
during video recording:
([Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 595)
Basic Operations – Selecting the Recording Mode
75
Selecting the Recording Mode
Rotate the mode dial to select the recording mode.
[iA]
Intelligent Auto mode (Intelligent Auto Mode: 101)
[P]
Program AE mode (Program AE Mode: 279)
[A]
Aperture-Priority AE mode (Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 283)
[S]
Shutter-Priority AE mode (Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 286)
[M]
Manual Exposure mode (Manual Exposure Mode: 289)
[]
Creative Video mode (Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/
S&Q): 361)
[S&Q]
Slow & Quick mode (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
[C1]/[C2]/[C3]
Custom mode (Custom Mode: 552)
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
76
Camera Setting Operations
When changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the
following operation parts.
(A) Front dial ( ) (Front Dial/Rear Dial: 77)
(B) Rear dial ( ) (Front Dial/Rear Dial: 77)
(C) Control dial ( ) (Control Dial: 77)
(D) Cursor buttons (3421) (Cursor Buttons: 78)
(E) [MENU/SET] button ( ) ([MENU/SET] Button: 78)
(F) Joystick (3421/) (Joystick: 79)
(G) Touch screen (Touch Screen: 80)
(G) (F) (E) (D) (C) (B)
(A)
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
77
Front Dial/Rear Dial
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
Control Dial
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
78
Cursor Buttons
Press:
Selects an item or numeric value.
[MENU/SET] Button
Press:
Confirms a setting.
•
Displays the menu during recording and playback.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
79
Joystick
The joystick can be operated in 8 directions by tilting it up, down, left, right
and diagonally and by pressing the center part.
(H) Tilt: Selects an item or numeric value, or moves a position.
•
Operation is easier if you place your finger on the center of the joystick before tilting.
The joystick may not work as expected when the sides are pressed.
(I) Press: Confirms a setting.
•
You can disable the operations of operating parts.
([Operation Lock Setup]: 571)
(H)
(I)
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
80
Touch Screen
Operations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus,
and other items displayed on the screen.
Touch
Operation of touching and then lifting your finger from the touch screen.
Drag
Operation of moving a finger while it touches the touch screen.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
81
Pinch (widen/narrow)
Operations of widening the distance between two fingers (pinch out) and
narrowing the distance between two fingers (pinch in) while they are
touching the touch screen.
•
If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe the
precautions for the sheet.
(Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor
protection sheet.)
•
Touch operations can be disabled:
([Touch Settings]: 570)
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
82
Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
≥ Setting the Viewfinder: 82
≥ Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83
≥ Switching the Display Information: 86
Setting the Viewfinder
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
Rotate the diopter adjustment dial while looking through the
viewfinder.
•
Adjust until you can clearly see the text on the viewfinder.
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
83
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder
With the default settings, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is set.
When you look through the viewfinder, the eye sensor (A) works and the
camera switches from monitor display to viewfinder display.
You can switch to viewfinder display or monitor display with [LVF] button
(B).
Press [LVF].
(C) Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
(D) Viewfinder display
(E) Monitor display
(A)(B)
(C) (D) (E)
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
84
Simultaneous Display on the Monitor and Viewfinder
When automatic viewfinder/monitor switching (C), if the monitor is rotated
towards the lens, the recording screen is displayed on the monitor even
when you look into the viewfinder.
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
85
•
The eye sensor may not work correctly due to the shape of eyeglasses, the way
the camera is held, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.
•
During video playback or slide show, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
does not work.
•
When the video frame rate is 200p or more, it is not possible to simultaneously
display on the monitor and viewfinder when using the following functions:
– HDMI output
– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone
– Tethered recording
•
To focus when looking through the viewfinder:
([Eye Sensor AF]: 569)
•
The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be changed:
([Eye Sensor]: 606)
•
You can set the display speed for live view on the monitor when recording
pictures:
([Monitor Frame Rate]: 603)
•
You can set the display speed for live view on the viewfinder when recording
pictures.
([LVF Frame Rate]: 604)
•
You can adjust the brightness, coloring, red or blue tints, etc., of the monitor/
viewfinder:
([Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]: 604)
•
You can adjust monitor/viewfinder luminance:
([Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance]: 605)
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
86
Switching the Display Information
Press [DISP.].
≥ The display information is switched.
Recording Screen
Monitor
(F) With information
(G) Without information
(H) Control panel
(I) Turned off (black)
999
ISO
AUTO
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
999
999
AWB
Fn
0 0
0
AFS FINE
4:3
ISO
AUTO
OFF
999
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
ISO
AUTO
(F) (G) (H) (I)
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
87
Viewfinder
(J) With information
(K) Without information
•
Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
This can also be set by using [Level Gauge]. ([Level Gauge]: 585)
•
Control panel operation (Control Panel: 91)
•
You can hide the control panel and black screen:
([Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 586)
•
The display can be changed so that live view and display information do not
overlap:
([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 580)
•
You can display the outline for the live view:
([Framing Outline]: 586)
999
L
FINE
AFSAFS
ISO
AUTO
(J) (K)
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
88
Playback Screen
(L) With information
(M) Detailed information display
•
Pressing 34 switches the display information. (Detailed information display: 732)
(N) Without information
(O) Without blinking highlights
•
This is a screen without blinking highlights display that is shown when [Blinking
Highlights] of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) is set to [ON].
In other than this screen, overexposed parts of the screen will blink. ([Blinking
Highlights]: 582)
100
100-0001
ISO
0
F2.8
60
2023.12. 1 10:00
s
RGB
1/5
FINE
AFS
STD.
L
4:3
AWB
2023.12.1 10:00 100-0001
ISO
100
F
2.8
±
0
L
FINE
(L) (M) (N) (O)
Basic Operations – Quick Menu
89
Quick Menu
This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used
during recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change
the Quick menu display method and the items to display.
1
Display the Quick menu.
≥Press [Q].
2
Select a menu item.
≥Press 3421.
≥Directions on the diagonal can also be selected using the joystick.
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
≥Selection is also possible by touching a menu item.
00 0
AWB
4:3
0 0
0
AUTO
ISO
Basic Operations – Quick Menu
90
3
Select a setting item.
≥Rotate or .
≥Selection is also possible by touching a setting item.
4
Close the Quick menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by pressing [Q].
•
Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
•
The Quick menu can be customized:
(Quick Menu Customization: 545)
4:3
Basic Operations – Control Panel
91
Control Panel
This screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the
monitor. You can also touch the screen to change the settings.
In the [ ] mode (Creative Video mode)/[S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick
mode), the display changes to one especially for video.
•
For information about the screen (Control Panel: 721, Control Panel (Creative
Video Mode/Slow & Quick Mode): 724)
1
Display the control panel.
≥Press [DISP.] several times.
2
Touch the items.
Example) Changing the AF mode
999
999
AWB
Fn
ISO
AUTO
0 0
0
AFS
FINE
4:3
Basic Operations – Control Panel
92
3
Change the setting.
≥Touch the setting item.
•
Refer to the pages explaining each item for information on how to change the
settings.
4
Touch [Set].
Basic Operations – Control Panel
93
Changing Directly Using the Dial
Steps
2
to
4
can also be changed using the following operations.
1 Press one of 3421 to enable selection of items.
•
Selected items are displayed in yellow.
2 Press 3421 to select an item.
•
Selection is also possible by rotating or .
3 Rotate to change the settings values.
•
Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
AWB
ISO
AUTO
0
0
AFS
FINE
4:3
AWB
ISO
AUTO
0
0
AFS
FINE
4:3
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
94
Menu Operation Methods
≥ [Reset]: 99
In this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and
performing camera customizations.
Menu operations can be performed using the cursors, joystick, dial, or by
touch.
Configuration and operation parts of the menu
The menu can be operated by pressing 21 to move between menu screens.
Use the operation parts indicated below to operate the main tab, the sub tab, the page
tab, and menu items without moving to the corresponding menu levels.
•
You can also operate by touching the icons, menu items, and setting items.
(A) Main tab ([Q] button)
(B) Sub tab ( )
(C) Menu item ( )
(D) Page tab ( )
(E) Setting item
(C)
(D)
(E)
(A)
(B)
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
95
1
Display the menu.
≥Press .
2
Select a main tab.
≥Press 34 to select a main tab and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the main tab and then pressing or .
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
96
3
Select a sub tab.
≥Press 34 to select a sub tab and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the sub tab and then pressing or .
•
If there are page tabs (D), then after the page tabs have finished switching,
the next sub tab is switched to.
4
Select a menu item.
≥Press 34 to select a menu item and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the menu item and then pressing or .
(D)
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
97
5
Select a setting item and then confirm your selection.
≥Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the setting item and then pressing or .
6
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by pressing [ ] several times.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
98
Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings
If you press [DISP.] while a menu item or setting item is selected, a
description about the item is displayed on the screen.
Grayed Out Menu Items
Menu items that cannot be set are displayed grayed out.
If you press or while a grayed out menu item is selected, the
reason why it cannot be set is displayed.
•
The reason why a menu item cannot be set may not be displayed depending on the
menu item.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
99
[Reset]
Return each of the following settings to the default setting:
•
Recording settings
•
Network settings (settings of [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])
•
Setup and custom settings (other than [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])
[] [] Select [Reset]
•
If the setup and custom settings are reset, the [Playback] menu is also reset.
•
If the setup and custom settings are reset, [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer]
in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu/[Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu is also
returned to the default setting.
•
The folder numbers and clock settings are not reset.
•
List of default settings and settings that can be reset (List of Default Settings/
Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 781)
Basic Operations – Entering Characters
100
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed.
1
Enter characters.
≥Press 3421 to select characters and then press or
until the character to enter is displayed. (Repeat this)
•
To repeatedly enter the same character, rotate or to the right to
move the entry position cursor.
•
If you select an item and press or , you can perform the following
operations:
– [ ]: Change the character type to [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower
case characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)
–[] ]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
•
When entering a password, (A) shows the number of characters you have
entered and the number of characters you can enter.
2
Complete entering.
≥Select [Set] and then press or .
(A)
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
101
Intelligent Auto Mode
The [iA] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings
automatically selected by the camera.
The camera detects the scene to set the optimal recording settings
automatically to match the subject and recording conditions.
1
Set the recording mode to [iA].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
102
2
Aim the camera at the subject.
≥When the camera detects the scene, the recording mode icon
changes.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
3
Adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon lights.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)
•
[ ] of the AF mode works and the AF area is displayed aligned to any
humans.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
103
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully to take pictures.
≥Press the video rec. button to record videos.
•
Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from
appearing dark when there is a backlight.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
104
Types of Automatic Scene Detection
*1 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus])
menu is set to [HUMAN].
*2 Detected when using an external flash.
*3 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus])
menu is set to [ANIMAL], [CAR] or [MOTORCYCLE].
Taking pictures Recording video
i-Portrait
*1
i-Scenery
i-Macro
i-Night Portrait
*2
i-Night Scenery
i-Food
i-Sunset
i-Low Light
*3
•
If none of the scenes are applicable, recording is with [ ] (standard setting).
•
Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on the
recording conditions.
•
Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.
•
When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are
not animals may be detected as animals.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
105
AF Mode
Changing the AF mode.
•
Each press of [ ] changes the AF mode.
•
The mode can also be changed by touching the screen or pressing and holding the
joystick.
•
[AF Detection Setting] is fixed to [ON].
•
The [Detecting Subject] setting is maintained for any recording mode other than [iA]
mode. (Automatic Detection: 174)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] ([Full Area AF])
Detects subjects for recording and focuses.
•
You can switch the subject to be focused by either touching the white AF area or
moving the joystick 3421.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
106
[ ] ([Tracking])
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of the
subject, maintaining focusing.
Aim the AF area over the subject and then press and hold the shutter button
halfway.
•
The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway or fully.
Flash
When recording using a flash, the camera switches to the appropriate flash
mode for the recording conditions.
When Slow Sync. ([ ], [ ]), be careful with regard to camera shake
because the shutter speed becomes slow.
•
For information about AF modes (Automatic Detection: 174, [Tracking]: 178)
•
For information about external flashes (Using an External Flash (Optional):
341)
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
107
Recording Using Touch Functions
≥ Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 107
≥ Touch AE: 110
Touch AF/Touch Shutter
Touch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the
shutter, etc.
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
([Touch Settings]: 570)
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
108
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch the icon.
≥The icon switches each time you touch it.
(Touch AF)
Focus on the touched position.
(Touch Shutter)
Record with focus on the touched position.
(OFF)
3
(When set to anything other than OFF) Touch the
subject.
AF
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
109
•
When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then disappears.
•
For information about operations to move the AF area (AF Area Operations:
188)
•
It is also possible to optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position:
(Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 193)
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
110
Touch AE
This function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position.
When a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to
match the face.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch [ ].
≥The Touch AE settings screen appears.
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
([Touch Settings]: 570)
AE
AF
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
111
3
Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the
brightness.
•
To return the position to which to adjust the brightness to the center, touch
[Reset].
4
Touch [Set].
How to Disable Touch AE
Touch [ ].
•
You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position you
touch. (At this time, Touch AE is not available):
(Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 193)
ュリヴヱハ
6HW
5HVHW
Taking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations
114
2
Adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway (press it gently).
≥The aperture value (A) and shutter speed (B) are displayed.
(When the correct exposure cannot be obtained, the indications
blink in red.)
≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon (C) lights.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing [AF ON].
(C)
F2.8
F2.8
F2.860
60
60
(A)(B)
Taking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations
115
3
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully (press it further).
•
Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review] of the
[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) menu. You can also change the picture
display duration to your preferred setting. ([Auto Review]: 576)
•
With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is
brought into focus.
If you set [Focus/Shutter Priority] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu
to [BALANCE] or [RELEASE], you will be able to take a picture even when
the subject is not in focus. ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 564)
Taking Pictures – [Aspect Ratio]
116
[Aspect Ratio]
You can select the image aspect ratio.
[] [] Select [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3]
Aspect ratio of a 4:3 monitor
[3:2]
Aspect ratio of a standard film camera
[16:9]
Aspect ratio of a 16:9 TV
[1:1]
Square aspect ratio
•
A frame for trimming (cropping) can be displayed on the recording screen:
([Frame Marker]: 417)
Taking Pictures – [Picture Size]
117
[Picture Size]
Sets the picture’s image size.
[] [] Select [Picture Size]
•
When [Ex. Tele Conv.] is set, the [M] and [S] image sizes are indicated with [ ].
[Aspect Ratio] [Picture Size]
[4:3]
[L] (25M) 5776×4336
[M] (12.5M) 4096×3072
[S] (6.5M) 2944×2208
[3:2]
[L] (22M) 5776×3848
[M] (11M) 4096×2728
[S] (5.5M) 2944×1960
[16:9]
[L] (18.5M) 5776×3248
[M] (9.5M) 4096×2304
[S] (5M) 2944×1656
[1:1]
[L] (19M) 4336×4336
[M] (9.5M) 3072×3072
[S] (5M) 2208×2208
Taking Pictures – [Picture Size]
118
•
When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available:
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– High Resolution mode
Taking Pictures – [Picture Quality]
119
[Picture Quality]
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
[] [] Select [Picture Quality]
[FINE]
JPEG images that give priority to image quality.
File format: JPEG
[STD.]
JPEG images of standard image quality.
This is useful for increasing the number of recordable pictures without changing the
picture size.
File format: JPEG
[RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]
This records RAW and JPEG images ([FINE] or [STD.]) simultaneously.
File format: RAW+JPEG
Taking Pictures – [Picture Quality]
120
[RAW]
This records RAW images.
File format: RAW
Note on RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed on the
camera.
Playback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated
software.
•
You can process RAW images on the camera. ([RAW Processing]: 502)
•
Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Adwaa) to process and edit RAW
files on a PC. (SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE: 698)
•
RAW images are always recorded in the [L] size of the [4:3] aspect ratio.
•
When you delete an image recorded with [RAW+FINE] or [RAW+STD.] on the
camera, both the RAW and JPEG images will be deleted simultaneously.
•
When the following function is being used, [Picture Quality] is not available:
– High Resolution mode
•
You can assign the function that records a RAW image and a JPEG image
simultaneously once only to an Fn button:
([1 Shot RAW+JPG]: 533)
•
Selects a Color Space setting from [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]:
([Color Space]: 562)
121
Recording Videos
These are the basic operations and settings for recording videos.
•
Please also refer to the following chapters for more detailed information about
recording videos:
– Video Settings: 360
– Special Video Recording: 421
– HDMI Output (Video): 461
≥ Basic Video Operations: 122
≥ [System Frequency]: 129
≥ [Rec. File Format]: 131
≥ [Rec Quality]: 133
≥ [Image Area of Video]: 148
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
122
Basic Video Operations
It is possible to record video with a maximum resolution of 5.8K
(5760×4320) on this camera.
It also supports switching of the system frequency and 3 types of recording
file format; MP4, MOV, and Apple ProRes.
[ ] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode)
are recording modes specifically for video.
In the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick
motion video by changing the frame rate.
1
Select the recording mode.
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
123
2
Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button (A).
•
Release the video rec. button right after you press it.
3
Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button (A) again.
(A)
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
124
Screen Displays While Video Recording
The live view angle of view changes to the angle of view for video
recording, and video recording time (B) and elapsed recording time (C) are
displayed.
•
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
•
The recording state indication (D) and card access indication (E) turn red while
videos are being recorded.
•
If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF,
press the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus.
24
m
59
s
24
m
59
s
24
m
59
s
3
s
3
s
3
s
(D) (C) (E) (B)
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
125
Exposure Control While Video Recording
Videos will be recorded using the aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO
sensitivity settings below.
Recording
mode
Aperture value/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity
[iA]
The camera automatically makes the settings to suit the scene.
(Types of Automatic Scene Detection: 104)
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
The settings vary depending on the [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
in the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu. The default setting is
[ON]. ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 562)
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with the values set in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
[]/[S&Q]Records with manually set values.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
126
Size Interval for Dividing Files
A new file will be created to continue recording if the continuous recording
time or the file size exceeds the following conditions.
(A) Using an SDHC memory card
(B) Using an SDXC memory card
(C) Using an external SSD
[Rec. File
Format]
Resolution Bit rate
Recording
media
File division
Continuous
recording time
File size
[MP4]
[FHD]
All
(A)
30 minutes 4 GB
(B)
(C)
Other than
[FHD]
(A) 30 minutes 4 GB
(B)
3 hours
4 minutes
96 GB
(C)
[MOV] All
600 Mbps
or less
(A) 30 minutes 4 GB
(B)
3 hours
4 minutes
192 GB
(C)
800 Mbps
or more
(A)
(B)
(C)
3 hours
4 minutes
640 GB
[Apple
ProRes]
[FHD]
All
(A) 30 minutes 4 GB
(B)
3 hours
4 minutes
192 GB
(C)
Other than
[FHD]
(A)
(B)
(C)
3 hours
4 minutes
640 GB
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
127
•
If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during video
recording, that operation sound may be recorded.
•
The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to video.
•
If the operation sound of pressing the video rec. button to end recording bothers
you, try the following:
– Record the video about 3 seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the
video using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] ([Edit Image]) menu.
– Use the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) for recording.
•
Depending on the type of card, the card access indication may appear for a while
after video recording. This is not a malfunction.
•
Even when playback is performed on a supported device, situations may occur
where image or sound quality is poor, recording information is not displayed
correctly, or playback is not possible, for example.
If you experience any of these, play them back on the camera.
•
Video recording is not possible while you are using the following functions:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
•
For information about the high temperature display
When the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] appears blinking on the screen.
If you continue to use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot
be used is displayed on the screen and some functions, such as recording and
HDMI output, will be stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the
message indicating that the camera can be used again. When the message
indicating that it can be used again is displayed, turn the camera off then on
again.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
128
•
When video recording, the continuous recording time after which the camera
automatically stops recording:
(Continuous Recording Time for Video: 779)
•
You can set the temperature during video recording at which the camera
automatically stops recording:
([Thermal Management]: 603)
•
You can switch the recording screen display to suit video recording just as with
the [ ] mode:
([Video-Priority Display]: 590)
•
You can display a red frame on the recording screen that indicates that video is
being recorded:
([Red REC Frame Indicator]: 590)
Recording Videos – [System Frequency]
129
[System Frequency]
This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played
back with the camera.
The default setting is for the system frequency to be set to the TV
broadcast system for the region where the camera was purchased.
[] [] Select [System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]
System frequency for regions using the NTSC broadcasting system
[50.00Hz (PAL)]
System frequency for regions using the PAL broadcasting system
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
System frequency for producing cinema film
Recording Videos – [System Frequency]
130
•
After changing the setting, turn the camera off and on.
•
If you record using a system frequency that differs from the broadcasting system
of your region, it may not be possible for you to properly play back videos on your
TV.
We recommend using the setting as it was at the time of purchase if you are
unsure about broadcasting systems or if you will not be involved in producing
cinema film.
•
After changing the setting, it is recommended to insert another card and format it
with this camera.
– Make the [System Frequency] setting the same for when you are recording and
playing back.
Recording Videos – [Rec. File Format]
131
[Rec. File Format]
Sets the recording file format of videos to be recorded.
[] [] Select [Rec. File Format]
[MP4]
This file format is suitable for playback on PCs.
[MOV]
This file format is suitable for image editing.
[Apple ProRes]
Records using the Apple ProRes codec.
This file format is suitable for image editing.
Recording Videos – [Rec. File Format]
132
•
The following types of video cannot be recorded to SD cards. You will need a
commercially available external SSD for recording. (Using an External SSD
(Commercially Available): 472)
– [MOV] video with bit rate of 800 Mbps or more
– [Apple ProRes] video with resolution other than FHD
– Slow & Quick video with a recording quality with image compression system
ALL-Intra
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
133
[Rec Quality]
Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded.
The image qualities you can select depend on the recording mode,
[System Frequency], and [Rec. File Format] settings.
The [Image Area of Video] setting items you can select depend on the [Rec
Quality] settings.
[Rec Quality] settings can also be made using [Filtering] ([Filtering]: 145)
to display only items that meet your conditions and [add to list] ([add to
list]: 146) to register recording qualities you use often.
•
The above shows some of the recording qualities available.
[16:9]
4K, FHD
[17:9]
5.7K,
C4K
4.4K
5.8K
[4:3]
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
134
[] [] Select [Rec Quality]
•
To record video with a bit rate of 72 Mbps or more, you require an SD card with the
corresponding Speed Class.
•
Video with a bit rate of 800 Mbps or more cannot be recorded to an SD card. You will
need a commercially available external SSD for recording. (Using an External
SSD (Commercially Available): 472)
•
[Apple ProRes] video with a resolution other than FHD cannot be recorded to an SD
card. You will need a commercially available external SSD for recording. (Using an
External SSD (Commercially Available): 472)
•
For information about the cards that can be used (SD Cards That Can Be Used
with This Camera: 25)
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
135
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
•
YUV, Bit value, Image compression:
– [10bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP
– [8bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 8 bit, Long GOP
•
Audio format: AAC (2ch)
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[4K/10bit/100M/60p] 3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 100 HEVC
[4K/10bit/72M/30p] 3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] 3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 100 AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/24p] 3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/24p] 3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 100 AVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 28 AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p] 1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 20 AVC
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p] 1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 24 AVC
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[4K/10bit/100M/50p] 3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 100 HEVC
[4K/10bit/72M/25p] 3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/25p] 3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] 1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 28 AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p] 1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 20 AVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
136
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
•
YUV, Bit value, Image compression:
– [422/10-I] recording quality: 4:2:2, 10 bit, ALL-Intra
– [422/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:2, 10 bit, Long GOP
– [420/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP
•
Audio format: LPCM (4ch)
Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks of
the video.
: Only available in Creative Video mode.
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[5.8K/30p/420/10-L] 5760×4320 4:3 29.97p 200 HEVC
[5.8K/24p/420/10-L] 5760×4320 4:3 23.98p 200 HEVC
[5.7K/60p/420/10-L] 5728×3024 17:9 59.94p 300 HEVC
[5.7K/48p/420/10-L] 5728×3024 17:9 47.95p 300 HEVC
[5.7K/30p/420/10-L] 5728×3024 17:9 29.97p 200 HEVC
[5.7K/24p/420/10-L] 5728×3024 17:9 23.98p 200 HEVC
[4.4K/60p/420/10-L] 4352×3264 4:3 59.94p 300 HEVC
[4.4K/48p/420/10-L] 4352×3264 4:3 47.95p 300 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
137
[C4K/120p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 119.88p 300 HEVC
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]
*
4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 800 AVC
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]
*
4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 600 AVC
[C4K/60p/422/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 200 AVC
[C4K/60p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 200 HEVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
*
4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 800 AVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
*
4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 600 AVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 200 AVC
[C4K/48p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 200 HEVC
[C4K/30p/422/10-I] 4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 400 AVC
[C4K/30p/422/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 150 AVC
[C4K/30p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 150 HEVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-I] 4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 400 AVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 150 AVC
[C4K/24p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 150 HEVC
[4K/120p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 119.88p 300 HEVC
[4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]
*
3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 800 AVC
[4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]
*
3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 600 AVC
[4K/60p/422/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 200 AVC
[4K/60p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 200 HEVC
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
*
3840×2160 16:9 47.95p 800 AVC
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
*
3840×2160 16:9 47.95p 600 AVC
[4K/48p/422/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 47.95p 200 AVC
[4K/48p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 47.95p 200 HEVC
[4K/30p/422/10-I] 3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 400 AVC
[4K/30p/422/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 150 AVC
[4K/30p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 150 HEVC
[4K/24p/422/10-I] 3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 400 AVC
[4K/24p/422/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 150 AVC
[4K/24p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 150 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
138
[FHD/240p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 239.76p 800 AVC
[FHD/240p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 239.76p 200 AVC
[FHD/240p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 239.76p 200 HEVC
[FHD/120p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 400 AVC
[FHD/120p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 150 AVC
[FHD/120p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 150 HEVC
[FHD/60p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 200 AVC
[FHD/60p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 100 AVC
[FHD/60p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 100 HEVC
[FHD/48p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 47.95p 200 AVC
[FHD/48p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 47.95p 100 AVC
[FHD/48p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 47.95p 100 HEVC
[FHD/30p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 200 AVC
[FHD/30p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 100 AVC
[FHD/30p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 100 HEVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 200 AVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 100 AVC
[FHD/24p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 100 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
139
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[5.8K/25p/420/10-L] 5760×4320 4:3 25.00p 200 HEVC
[5.7K/50p/420/10-L] 5728×3024 17:9 50.00p 300 HEVC
[5.7K/25p/420/10-L] 5728×3024 17:9 25.00p 200 HEVC
[4.4K/50p/420/10-L] 4352×3264 4:3 50.00p 300 HEVC
[C4K/100p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 100.00p 300 HEVC
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]
*
4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 800 AVC
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]
*
4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 600 AVC
[C4K/50p/422/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 200 AVC
[C4K/50p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 200 HEVC
[C4K/25p/422/10-I] 4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 400 AVC
[C4K/25p/422/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 150 AVC
[C4K/25p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 150 HEVC
[4K/100p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 100.00p 300 HEVC
[4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]
*
3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 800 AVC
[4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]
*
3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 600 AVC
[4K/50p/422/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 200 AVC
[4K/50p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 200 HEVC
[4K/25p/422/10-I] 3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 400 AVC
[4K/25p/422/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 150 AVC
[4K/25p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 150 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
140
[FHD/200p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 200.00p 800 AVC
[FHD/200p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 200.00p 200 AVC
[FHD/200p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 200.00p 200 HEVC
[FHD/100p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 400 AVC
[FHD/100p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 150 AVC
[FHD/100p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 150 HEVC
[FHD/50p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 200 AVC
[FHD/50p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/50p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 100 HEVC
[FHD/25p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 200 AVC
[FHD/25p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/25p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 100 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
141
* [Rec Quality] [(H)] indicates a bit rate of 800 Mbps and [(L)] indicates a bit rate of
600 Mbps.
[(H)] video cannot be recorded to SD cards.
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[5.8K/24p/420/10-L] 5760×4320 4:3 24.00p 200 HEVC
[5.7K/48p/420/10-L] 5728×3024 17:9 48.00p 300 HEVC
[5.7K/24p/420/10-L] 5728×3024 17:9 24.00p 200 HEVC
[4.4K/48p/420/10-L] 4352×3264 4:3 48.00p 300 HEVC
[C4K/120p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 120.00p 300 HEVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-I] 4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 400 AVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 150 AVC
[C4K/24p/420/10-L] 4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 150 HEVC
[4K/120p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 120.00p 300 HEVC
[4K/24p/422/10-I] 3840×2160 16:9 24.00p 400 AVC
[4K/24p/422/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 24.00p 150 AVC
[4K/24p/420/10-L] 3840×2160 16:9 24.00p 150 HEVC
[FHD/120p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 120.00p 400 AVC
[FHD/120p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 120.00p 150 AVC
[FHD/120p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 120.00p 150 HEVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-I] 1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 200 AVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/24p/420/10-L] 1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 100 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
142
[Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes]
•
Audio format: LPCM (4ch)
Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks of
the video.
: Only available in Creative Video mode.
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate
(C) Video compression format (422 HQ: Apple ProRes 422 HQ, 422: Apple ProRes
422)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[5.7K/30p/422 HQ] 5728×3024 17:9 29.97p 1.9 Gbps 422 HQ
[5.7K/30p/422] 5728×3024 17:9 29.97p 1.3 Gbps 422
[5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 5728×3024 17:9 23.98p 1.5 Gbps 422 HQ
[5.7K/24p/422] 5728×3024 17:9 23.98p 1.0 Gbps 422
[C4K/60p/422 HQ] 4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 1.9 Gbps 422 HQ
[C4K/60p/422] 4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 1.3 Gbps 422
[C4K/30p/422 HQ] 4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 972 Mbps 422 HQ
[C4K/30p/422] 4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 648 Mbps 422
[C4K/24p/422 HQ] 4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 778 Mbps 422 HQ
[C4K/24p/422] 4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 519 Mbps 422
[FHD/60p/422 HQ] 1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 454 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/60p/422] 1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 302 Mbps 422
[FHD/30p/422 HQ] 1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 227 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/30p/422] 1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 151 Mbps 422
[FHD/24p/422 HQ] 1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 181 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/24p/422] 1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 121 Mbps 422
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
143
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[5.7K/25p/422 HQ] 5728×3024 17:9 25.00p 1.6 Gbps 422 HQ
[5.7K/25p/422] 5728×3024 17:9 25.00p 1.1 Gbps 422
[C4K/50p/422 HQ] 4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 1.6 Gbps 422 HQ
[C4K/50p/422] 4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 1.1 Gbps 422
[C4K/25p/422 HQ] 4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 811 Mbps 422 HQ
[C4K/25p/422] 4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 541 Mbps 422
[FHD/50p/422 HQ] 1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 378 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/50p/422] 1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 252 Mbps 422
[FHD/25p/422 HQ] 1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 189 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/25p/422] 1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 126 Mbps 422
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 5728×3024 17:9 24.00p 1.5 Gbps 422 HQ
[5.7K/24p/422] 5728×3024 17:9 24.00p 1.0 Gbps 422
[C4K/24p/422 HQ] 4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 779 Mbps 422 HQ
[C4K/24p/422] 4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 519 Mbps 422
[FHD/24p/422 HQ] 1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 182 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/24p/422] 1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 121 Mbps 422
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
144
•
In this document, videos are indicated as follows according to their resolution:
– 5.8K (5760×4320) video: 5.8K video
– 5.7K (5728×3024) video: 5.7K video
– 4.4K (4352×3264) video: 4.4K video
– C4K (4096×2160) video: C4K video
– 4K (3840×2160) video: 4K video
– Full High Definition (1920×1080) video: FHD video
•
Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed
automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, video recording
time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded.
•
Videos in ALL-Intra and 4:2:2 10-bit formats and videos whose [Rec. File Format]
is [Apple ProRes] are intended for editing on a PC used for video production.
•
You can register a combination of [System Frequency], [Rec. File Format],
[Image Area of Video], and [Rec Quality] to My List. ([add to list]: 146)
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
145
[Filtering]
When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes], you can
specify items such as frame rate, number of pixels (resolution), and
compression format (YUV, bit value, image compression), and just display
recording qualities that meet those conditions.
1 In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [DISP.].
2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
•
Settings: [Frame Rate]/[Resolution]/[Codec]
3 Press 34 to select the filtering conditions and then press or .
4 Press [DISP.] to confirm the setting.
•
You are returned to the [Rec Quality] setting screen.
Clearing the filtering conditions
Select [ANY] in Step 3.
•
The filtering conditions are also cleared when you do the following:
– Change the [Rec. File Format]
– Change the [System Frequency]
– Select a recording quality from [Rec Quality (My List)]
•
When you change recording quality using a filter, the current filtering conditions
are stored.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
146
[add to list]
Select a recording quality and register it in My List. The recording quality
you register can be set in [Rec Quality (My List)].
In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [Q].
•
The following settings are also registered at the same time:
– [System Frequency]
– [Rec. File Format]
– [Image Area of Video]
Setting or deleting in My List
1 Select [Rec Quality (My List)].
•
[] [] [Rec Quality (My List)]
2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
•
You cannot select setting items that have different system frequencies.
•
To delete from My List, select the item and press [Q].
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
147
Setting from the control panel
It is possible to display the My List of recording qualities from the control panel in
[ ]/[S&Q] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] is set.
Touch the recording quality item.
•
When already registered in My List, the [Rec Quality (My List)] setting screen is
displayed.
When not yet registered, the [Rec Quality] setting screen is displayed.
•
[Rec Quality (My List)] and [Rec Quality] switch each time you press the [DISP.]
button.
•
The next time the setting screen is displayed, the screen last used is displayed.
•
Up to 12 types of recording quality can be registered.
0
FPS
30
F2.8
1/60
100
AWB
IRISSHUTTER
ISO WBPHOTO STYLE
FULL
4K 29.97
p
420/10-L
MOV
AUTO
-2
-36 -12 -6-24 0
-6
CH2
CH1
TC
DF
00:00:00.00
48kHz/24bit
24m59s
24m59s
OFF
Recording Videos – [Image Area of Video]
148
[Image Area of Video]
Set the image area during video recording. The angle of view differs
depending on the image area. Narrowing the image area allows you to
achieve a telescopic effect without image deterioration.
[] [] Select [Image Area of Video]
[FULL]
Records according to the range that corresponds to the image circle of the lens that is
for Micro Four Thirds.
[PIXEL/PIXEL]
Records with one pixel on the sensor, which is equal to one pixel of the video.
Records a range corresponding to the resolution range in [Rec Quality]. ([Rec
Quality]: 133)
•
The [Image Area of Video] settings you can select differ depending on the [Rec
Quality] setting. ([Rec Quality]: 133)
Recording Videos – [Image Area of Video]
149
Image area (Ex.: FHD video)
(A) Angle of view: Wide/Telescopic effect: Not possible
(B) Angle of view: Narrow/Telescopic effect: Possible
FULL
PIXEL/PIXEL
FULL PIXEL/PIXEL
(A) (B)
150
Focus / Zoom
Smoother focusing is possible by selecting the focus mode and AF mode
most suited to the recording conditions and the subject.
• This camera supports phase detection AF and contrast AF.
≥ Selecting the Focus Mode: 151
≥ Using AF: 153
≥ Selecting the AF Mode: 171
≥ AF Area Operations: 188
≥ Record Using MF: 197
≥ Recording with Zoom: 204
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode
151
Selecting the Focus Mode
Select the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement.
It is also possible to customize the AF tracking features with [AFC]. ([AF
Custom Setting(Photo)]: 160)
Set the focus mode lever.
[S] ([AFS])
This is suitable for recording still subjects.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses once.
The focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[C] ([AFC])
This is suitable for recording moving subjects.
While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is constantly adjusted according
to the movement of the subject.
•
This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement
prediction)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode
152
[MF]
Manual focusing. Use this when you want to fix the focus or avoid activating AF.
(Record Using MF: 197)
•
In the following cases, [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the shutter button is
pressed halfway:
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– During video recording
– In low light situations
•
When the following function is being used, [AFC] switches to [AFS]:
– High Resolution mode
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
153
Using AF
≥ [AF-Point Scope]: 158
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 160
≥ [Focus Limiter]: 163
≥ [AF Assist Light]: 165
≥ [Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 166
≥ [AF Micro Adjustment]: 167
AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.
Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and
scene.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC].
≥Set the focus mode lever. (Selecting the Focus Mode: 151)
2
Select the AF mode.
≥Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen, and set
using or . (Selecting the AF Mode: 171)
•
In [iA] mode, each press of [ ] switches between [ ] and [ ]. (AF
Mode: 105)
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
154
3
Press the shutter button halfway.
≥The AF operates.
Focus
In focus Not in focus
Focus icon (A) Lights Blinking
AF area (B) Green Red
AF beep Two beeps —
(A) (B)
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
155
Low illumination AF
•
In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus icon
is indicated as [ ].
•
Achieving focus may take more time than usual.
Starlight AF
•
If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF, then
Starlight AF will be activated.
When focus is achieved, the focus icon will display [ ], and the AF area will be
displayed on the area in focus.
•
Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.
[AF ON] button
You can also activate AF by pressing [AF ON].
LOW
STAR
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
156
•
Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF
mode
– Fast-moving subjects
– Extremely bright subjects
– Subjects without contrast
– Subjects recorded through windows
– Subjects near shiny objects
– Subjects in very dark locations
– When recording subjects both distant and near
•
When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFC], it may
take some time for the camera to focus:
– When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end
– When the subject is suddenly changed from one far away to one close by
•
If using the zoom after achieving focus, the focus may be erroneous. In that
case, re-adjust the focus.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
157
•
You can restrict the range for AF to work:
([Focus Limiter]: 163)
•
When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically:
([Quick AF]: 568)
•
You can change the settings so that AF does not function when the shutter button
is pressed halfway:
([Shutter AF]: 567)
•
The AF beep volume and sound can be changed:
([Beep]: 607)
•
You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects
close by to an Fn button.
This function is useful when the camera mistakenly focuses on the background:
([AF-ON : Near Shift]: 534)
•
You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects far
away to an Fn button.
This function is useful when taking pictures through fences or nets:
([AF-ON : Far Shift]: 534)
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
158
[AF-Point Scope]
This magnifies the focus point when the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ]. (In
other AF modes, the center of the screen is magnified.)
You can check focus and observe an enlarged subject as with a telephoto
lens.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[AF-Point Scope]. (Fn Buttons: 527)
Press and hold the AF-Point Scope button.
≥ While pressing the button, the focus point is enlarged.
•
When the screen is enlarged, pressing the shutter button halfway re-acquires focus
in a small central AF area.
•
When the screen is enlarged, turn or to adjust the magnification.
Use for more detailed adjustments.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
160
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
You can select features of AF operation when taking pictures with [AFC]
that are appropriate for the subject and scene.
Each of these features can be further customized.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFC].
≥Set the focus mode lever. (Selecting the Focus Mode: 151)
2
Set [AF Custom Setting(Photo)].
≥ [] [] [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[Set 1]
Basic general-purpose setting.
[Set 2]
Suggested for situations where the subject moves at a constant speed in one
direction.
[Set 3]
Suggested when the subject moves randomly, and other objects may be in the
scene.
[Set 4]
Suggested for situations where the speed of the subject changes significantly.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
161
Adjusting AF Custom Settings
1 Press 21 to select the AF Custom setting type.
2 Press 34 to select items and press 21 to adjust.
•
A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.].
•
To reset settings to the default, press [Q].
3 Press or .
[AF Sensitivity]
Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects.
[+]
When the distance to the subject changes drastically,
the camera re-adjusts the focus immediately. You can
bring different subjects into focus one after another.
[−]
When the distance to the subject changes drastically,
the camera waits for a short period of time before
re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent the
focus from being accidentally re-adjusted when, for
example, an object moves across the image.
[AF Area
Switching
Sensitivity]
Sets the sensitivity for switching the AF area to match subject
movement.
(When AF mode is set to Full Area AF)
[+]
When the subject moves out of the AF area, the camera
immediately switches the AF area to keep the subject in
focus.
[−]
The camera switches the AF area at a gradual pace.
Effects caused by a slight movement of the subject or by
obstacles in front of the camera will be minimized.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
162
[Moving Subject
Prediction]
Sets the tracking method for changes in the speed of subject
movement.
•
At larger setting values, the camera tries to maintain focus by
responding even to sudden movements of the subject.
However, the camera becomes more sensitive to slight
movements of the subject, so focusing may become unstable.
[0]
This is suited to a subject with minimal changes in
speed.
[+1]
These are suited to a subject that changes its speed.
[+2]
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
163
[Focus Limiter]
You can restrict the range for AF to work.
The focusing speed of AF increases when you limit the range where AF
works.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC].
≥Set the focus mode lever. (Selecting the Focus Mode: 151)
2
Set [Focus Limiter].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Focus Limiter]
[ON]
Enables the following settings.
[OFF]
Disables the following settings.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
164
[SET]
1 Use the same procedure as MF (Record Using MF: 197) to check the
focus, then press [WB] or [ISO] to set the range of operation for AF.
•
This can also be set by touching [Limit1]/[Limit2].
•
[Limit1]/[Limit2] can be set from either.
2 Press or to confirm the setting.
•
Press [DISP.] to return the operation range to the default setting.
•
This can be set when using a lens with a focus ring or a focus lever.
•
It cannot be set if the focusing distance range selector switch of the lens has
been used to limit the operation range.
•
The setting values are reset when the lens is replaced.
•
When [Focus Limiter] is working, [ ]/[ ] is displayed on the screen.
•
When the following function is being used, [Focus Limiter] is not available:
–[AF+MF]
∞
10(m) 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
1 2
Limit1
Limit2
WB
ISO
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
165
[AF Assist Light]
When recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light turns on when
you press the shutter button halfway, making it easier for the camera to
focus.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [AF Assist Light]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
The effective range of the AF assist light is different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is attached and at wide-angle
end.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.5 m (11 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is attached and at wide-angle
end.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
•
Remove the lens hood.
•
The AF assist light may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus
when a lens with large diameter is used.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
166
[Focus Frame Moving Speed]
Sets the speed when moving the AF area/MF Assist.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Focus Frame Moving
Speed]
Settings: [FAST]/[NORMAL]
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
167
[AF Micro Adjustment]
You can make fine adjustments to the focus point when focusing with
phase detection AF.
•
There is normally no need to adjust the focus point. Adjust only when necessary.
If you adjust on a lens that has a correct focus point, there is a risk that the
camera will not be able to record with the appropriate focus point.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
168
[] [] Select [AF Micro Adjustment]
[ALL]
Adjust uniformly for all lenses.
Used in cases such as when you have attached lenses that are not registered in
[ADJUST BY LENS].
[ADJUST BY LENS]
Adjust each lens separately and register the adjustment values on the camera.
When a registered lens is attached, the adjusted value is recalled when it is set in
[ADJUST BY LENS].
•
When using a zoom lens, you can adjust the focus point individually at the
wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
•
If the lens has already been registered, the adjustment value is overwritten.
[OFF]
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
169
Registering the Adjusted Value
1 Select [ALL] or [ADJUST BY LENS] and then press [DISP.].
2 (When [ADJUST BY LENS] is selected) Register the lens.
•
Press [DISP.] and select [Yes] to register.
•
If the lens is already registered, the screen moves to the one in Step 3.
3 (When [ADJUST BY LENS] is selected) Select [Wide Adjustment] or [Tele
Adjustment].
•
Press 34 to select, and then press or .
•
When using a prime lens, [Adjustment] is displayed.
4 Adjust the focus point.
•
Press 21 to adjust the focus point and then press or .
•
You can also adjust by rotating , , or .
•
The focus point is moved backward when adjusted with the [+] side. The focus
point is moved forward when adjusted with the [−] side.
5 Record and repeat Step 4 until the suitable focus point is reached.
•
Check the set focus point in an image recorded with [AFC] of the [Focus/
Shutter Priority] set to [FOCUS] and with the focus mode set to [AFC].
([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 564)
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
170
Initializing
Registered lens information and adjusted values are initialized.
1 Select [ALL] or [ADJUST BY LENS] and then press [Q].
2 Select [Yes] to initialize.
•
We recommend making the adjustments in the same environment that will be
used for recording.
•
We recommend using a tripod when adjusting.
•
You can register a maximum of 40 lenses in [ADJUST BY LENS]. When the
upper limit is exceeded, already registered lens information is overwritten.
•
When a teleconverter is used when adjusted with [ADJUST BY LENS], the
combination of the lens and teleconverter is registered.
•
The focus point for the wide-angle end and the telephoto end cannot be
individually adjusted in [ALL].
•
The registration numbers and lens names registered in [ADJUST BY LENS] are
entered automatically and cannot be changed.
•
Irrespective of the [ALL]/[ADJUST BY LENS] selection, all of the registered lens
information and adjusted values in [AF Micro Adjustment] are initialized.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
171
Selecting the AF Mode
≥ Automatic Detection: 174
≥ [Tracking]: 178
≥ [Full Area AF]: 179
≥ [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone]: 182
≥ [1-Area+]/[1-Area]: 184
≥ [Pinpoint]: 186
Select the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects.
In an AF mode other than Pinpoint, you can automatically focus by
detecting subjects.
1
Press [ ].
≥The AF mode selection screen appears.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
172
2
Select the AF mode.
≥Press 21 to select an item and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ ].
[Tracking]
([Tracking]: 178)
[Full Area AF]
([Full Area AF]: 179)
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]
([Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]: 182)
[Zone]
([Zone]: 183)
[1-Area+]
([1-Area+]: 184)
[1-Area]
([1-Area]: 184)
[Pinpoint]
([Pinpoint]: 186)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
173
•
When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Live View Composite]
•
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
•
You can set the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection
screen:
([Show/Hide AF Mode]: 566)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
174
Automatic Detection
When automatic detection is enabled, subjects for recording are
automatically detected and the camera focuses.
1
Set [AF Detection Setting] to [ON].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [AF Detection Setting] [ON]
•
You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic
detection [ON]/[OFF].
•
Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.
•
When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are
not animals may be detected as animals.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
175
2
Select [Detecting Subject].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Detecting Subject]
•
Select [Type of Subject] and [Target Parts].
•
It is also possible to select by pressing [DISP.] in the AF mode selection
screen.
[Type of
Subject]
[HUMAN]
Detects humans.
Select either [Eye/Face/Body] or [Eye/Face] for the
[Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[ANIMAL]
Detects animals.
Select either [Body] or [Eye/Body] for the [Target
Parts].
•
Animals that can be detected are birds, canines
(including wolves, etc.), and felines (including
lions, etc.).
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[CAR]
Detects cars (mainly for motor sports).
[Target Parts] cannot be selected.
•
[ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[MOTORCYCLE]
Detects motorcycles (mainly for motor sports).
[Target Parts] cannot be selected.
•
[ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[Target
Parts]
Select the part to be brought into focus.
This can be set when the [Type of Subject] is either [HUMAN] or
[ANIMAL].
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
176
When [ ]
When a subject to be recorded is detected, an AF area is displayed.
If multiple subjects are detected, multiple AF areas are also displayed, and
you can select the subject you want to focus on from amongst these.
Yellow
AF area to be brought into focus.
The camera selects this automatically.
•
A cross appears in the AF area when a human eye is detected. (A)
White
Displayed when multiple subjects are detected.
(A)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
177
When [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]
If even part of a subject to be recorded enters the AF area, it is
automatically detected and focused.
•
If eyes are detected inside the AF area, eye detection (B) works.
It is not possible to change the eye to focus on.
•
[AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [ ].
•
When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought
into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
•
Depending on [Detecting Subject], the number of subjects that can be detected
at once with [ ] of the AF mode will be different.
[HUMAN] ([Eye/Face/Body], [Eye/Face]): Maximum 15 (maximum 3 bodies
detected)
[ANIMAL] ([Body]), [CAR], [MOTORCYCLE]: Maximum 3
[ANIMAL] ([Eye/Body]): Maximum 1
•
Automatic detection may not be available due to the camera settings.
•
You can make it so the metering range for automatic exposure is not prioritized
on the eyes and face when automatic detection works:
([Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 560)
•
The cross that appears on human eyes when focused can be made to disappear:
([Human Eye Detection Display]: 568)
(B)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
178
[Tracking]
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of
the subject, maintaining focusing.
Start tracking.
≥ Aim the AF area over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed
halfway or pressed fully.
•
If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red.
•
When set to [AFS], the focus will be on the AF area position. Tracking will not work.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 188)
•
In [ ]/[S&Q] mode and while recording video, tracking will continue even if
the shutter button is released.
To cancel tracking, press or , or touch [ ].
Tracking is also available with [AFS].
•
When automatic detection is working, the detected subject is tracked.
•
Set [Metering Mode] to [ ] to continue to adjust the exposure as well.
•
[ ] may not be available due to the camera settings.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
179
[Full Area AF]
The camera selects the most optimal AF area to focus.
When multiple AF areas are selected, all selected AF areas will be brought
into focus.
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], you can ensure that the focus stays
on the subject by recording while keeping the subject within the Full Area
AF area.
Specify the Subject to Bring into Focus
When automatic detection is [ON], multiple subjects are detected.
When the subject to be brought into focus is shown using the white AF
area, you can change this to a yellow AF area.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
180
≥ Touch operations
Touch the subject indicated with the white AF area.
•
The AF area will change to yellow.
•
To cancel the setting, touch [ ].
≥ Operations with the joystick
Tilt the joystick to
3421
.
•
Each tilt to 3421 switches the subject to be brought into focus.
•
To cancel the setting, press .
≥ Button operations
1 Press 4 in the AF mode selection screen.
2 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
3 When the white AF area changes to yellow, press .
•
To cancel the setting, press .
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
181
Setting the AF Area in Any Position
The [ ] AF area can be set in any position.
≥ Touch operations
Touch any position on the recording screen and then touch [Set].
•
Touch [ ] to return to [ ].
≥ Operations with the joystick
Press and hold the joystick.
•
The [ ] AF area is set in the center of the screen.
•
Either press and hold the joystick again or press to return to [ ].
≥ Button operations
1 Press 4 in the AF mode selection screen.
2 Press 3421 to move the AF area, and then press to confirm.
•
Press again to return to [ ].
•
You can move and change the size of the set AF area:
(AF Area Operations: 188)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
182
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/ [Zone]
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]
Within the full area, vertical and horizontal zones can be focused.
Horizontal pattern
Vertical pattern
•
To switch between the horizontal pattern and vertical pattern, press 3421 in the
AF area setting screen.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 188)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
184
[1-Area+]/ [1-Area]
[1-Area+]
Emphasis within a single AF area can be focused.
Even when the subject moves out of the single AF area, the subject
remains focused in a supplementary AF area (E).
•
Effective when recording moving subjects that are difficult to track with [ ].
[1-Area]
Specify the point to be brought into focus.
(E)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
185
A dot (F) is displayed on the recording screen when a single AF area is
reduced to the minimum size. The AF area can be set on the location
where the dot is displayed.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 188)
•
It is not possible to reduce a single AF area to the minimum when using the
following function:
– During video recording
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– [Ex. Tele Conv.]
(F)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
186
[Pinpoint]
You can achieve a more precise focus on a small point.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the
focus will be enlarged.
•
The enlarged screen is displayed when you set an AF area.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 188)
•
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
•
Automatic detection does not work in [ ].
•
When the following functions are being used, [ ] switches to [ ]:
– During video recording
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
187
Operations on the Magnification Window
*1 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.
*2 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 10×.
•
You can also take a picture by touching [ ].
Button
operations
Touch
operations
Description of operation
3421 Touch
Moves [+].
•
Positions can be moved to the diagonal
directions using the joystick.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode
*1
/full screen mode
*2
).
[DISP.] [Reset] Quits the enlarged display.
•
You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
([Pinpoint AF Setting]: 567)
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
188
AF Area Operations
≥ Move the Position of the AF Area: 188
≥ Changing the Size of the AF Area: 191
≥ Resetting the AF Area: 192
≥ Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 193
≥ Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad: 194
≥ [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 196
Move the Position of the AF Area
Touch operations
With the default settings, focus is on the point touched when you touch the
screen. ([Touch Settings]: 570)
Touch the recording screen.
•
The AF area setting screen is displayed.
The AF area is set when you either touch [Set] or press the shutter button halfway.
•
You can optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position. (Focus on
and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 193)
•
You can focus on the touched position and release the shutter. (Touch AF/
Touch Shutter: 107)
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
189
Operations with the joystick
With the default settings, the AF area can be manipulated with the joystick.
([Joystick Setting]: 574)
Tilt the joystick in the recording screen.
•
The AF area setting screen is displayed.
The AF area is set when you either press or press the shutter button halfway.
•
Pressing enables switching between the default and set AF area positions.
In [ ], this operation displays the enlarged screen.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
190
Button operations
1 Press 4 in the AF mode selection screen.
•
The AF area setting screen is displayed.
2 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
•
The AF area is set when you either press or press the shutter button
halfway.
•
When [Metering Mode] is [ ], the metering target also moves together with the
AF area.
•
You can set the AF area to loop when moved:
([Looped Focus Frame]: 569)
•
You can assign the function that displays the AF area/MF Assist movement
screens to an Fn button:
([Focus Area Set]: 534)
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
191
Changing the Size of the AF Area
Touch operations
Pinch out/pinch in the AF area in the AF area setting screen.
•
Either touch [Set] or press the shutter button halfway to confirm.
Dial Operations
Rotate , , or .
•
Either press or press the shutter button halfway to confirm.
•
In [ ], [ ], and [ ], the size of the AF area cannot be changed.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
192
Resetting the AF Area
Touch operations
Touch [Reset] in the AF area setting screen.
•
The first touch returns the AF area position to the center. The second touch returns
the AF area size to the default.
Button operations
Press [DISP.] in the AF area setting screen.
•
The first press returns the AF area position to the center. The second press returns
the AF area size to the default.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
193
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched
Position ([AF+AE])
1
Set [Touch AF].
≥ [] [] [Touch Settings] [Touch AF] [AF+AE]
2
Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the
brightness.
≥At the touched position, an AF area that works in the same way as
[ ] is displayed.
This places a point to adjust brightness at the center of the AF
area.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 188)
3
Touch [Set].
≥The [AF+AE] setting is canceled if you touch [ ] (when [ ] or
[ ] is set: [ ]) on the recording screen.
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
194
Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad
During viewfinder display, you can touch the monitor to change the position
and size of the AF area.
1
Set [Touch Pad AF].
≥ [] [] [Touch Settings] [Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]/[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]
2
Move the position of the AF area.
≥During viewfinder display, touch the monitor.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 188)
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
195
Setting Items ([Touch Pad AF])
[EXACT]
Moves the AF area of the viewfinder by touching a desired position on the touch pad.
[OFFSET1] (entire area)/[OFFSET2] (right half)/[OFFSET3] (upper right)/[OFFSET4]
(lower right)/[OFFSET5] (left half)/[OFFSET6] (upper left)/[OFFSET7] (lower left)
Moves the AF area of the viewfinder according to the distance you drag your finger on
the touch pad.
Select the range to be detected with the drag operation.
[OFF]
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
196
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
Memorizes separate positions for AF areas for when the camera is
vertically aligned and for when it is horizontally aligned.
Two vertical orientations, left and right, are available.
[] [] Select [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[ON]
Memorizes separate positions for vertical and horizontal orientations.
[OFF]
Sets the same position for vertical and horizontal orientations.
•
In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
197
Record Using MF
≥ [Focus Peaking]: 202
MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance
between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to
activate AF.
1
Set the focus mode to [MF].
≥Set the focus mode lever. (Selecting the Focus Mode: 151)
2
Select the focus point.
≥Tilt the joystick to select the focus point.
•
To return the point to be brought into focus to the center, press [DISP.].
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press .
≥This switches to the MF Assist screen, and shows an enlarged
display.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
198
4
Adjust the focus.
≥Rotate the focus ring.
•
This will display the in-focus portion highlighted with color. (Focus Peaking)
•
A recording distance guideline is displayed. (MF Guide)
(A) MF Assist (enlarged screen)
(B) Focus Peaking
(C) Indicator for ¶ (infinity)
(D) MF Guide
5
Close the MF Assist screen.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This operation can also be performed by pressing .
AF
∞
10(m) 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
(D)
(C)
(B)
(A)
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
199
6
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
Operations on the MF Assist Screen
*1 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.
*2 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 20×. (Maximum 6× during video recording, when
[Enlarged Live Display] in [HDMI Rec Output] is set to [OFF] during HDMI output,
and when in [ ]/[S&Q] mode)
Button
operations
Touch
operations
Description of operation
3421 Drag
Moves the enlarged display position.
•
Positions can be moved to the diagonal
directions using the joystick.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode
*1
/full screen mode
*2
).
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns the MF Assist position to the
center.
Second time: Returns the MF Assist
magnification to the default setting.
[AF ON] The AF operates.
AF
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
200
•
On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF Assist
screen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the assist screen
will be exited a short time after you cease the operation.
•
You can also display the MF Assist screen by pressing the [ ].
•
During MF, pressing [AF ON] will activate AF.
•
The MF Assist screen can also be displayed during video recording.
•
The recording distance reference mark indicates the position of the imaging
surface. This becomes the reference when measuring the recording distance.
•
While you are using the following function, the MF Assist screen will not be
displayed:
– SH burst recording
•
During video recording using the following functions, the MF Assist screen
cannot be displayed:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
201
•
You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method:
([Focus Peaking]: 202)
•
You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and horizontal
orientations:
([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 196)
•
You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
([MF Assist]: 565)
•
You can change the MF Guide display units:
([MF Guide]: 566)
•
You can disable focus ring operation:
([Focus Ring Lock]: 566)
•
You can set the movement of the MF Assist position to loop:
([Looped Focus Frame]: 569)
•
The camera memorizes the focus point when you turn it off:
([Lens Focus Resume]: 592)
•
The amount of focus movement can be set:
([Focus Ring Control]: 594)
•
You can assign the function that displays the AF area/MF Assist movement
screens to an Fn button:
([Focus Area Set]: 534)
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
202
[Focus Peaking]
During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear
outlines) are highlighted with color.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Focus Peaking]
[ON] Focus Peaking display is performed.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Focus Peaking
Sensitivity]
If adjusted to the negative direction, portions
to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you
to achieve a more precise focus.
[Display Color]
You can set the display color of the in-focus
portion.
[Display During
AFS]
When set to [ON], the Focus Peaking
display is also possible when the shutter
button is pressed halfway in the [AFS] focus
mode.
[Display During
MF]
[While In Live View]: Focus Peaking is
displayed in the recording screen.
[While Live View Is Enlarged]: Focus
Peaking is displayed in the MF Assist screen
and the video enlarged display of live view
screen.
[When Shutter Is Pressed]: When set to
[OFF], Focus Peaking is hidden when the
shutter is pressed.
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
204
Recording with Zoom
≥ Extended Tele Conversion: 206
≥ [Power Zoom Lens]: 208
Use the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle.
When taking pictures, use [Ex. Tele Conv.] to increase a telescopic effect
without image deterioration.
When recording videos, use [Image Area of Video] to obtain the same
telescopic effect as [Ex. Tele Conv.].
•
For details about [Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
Interchangeable lens with a zoom ring
Rotate the zoom ring.
(T): Telephoto
(W): Wide-angle
(W)
(T)
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
205
Interchangeable lens that supports power zoom (motorized zoom)
Move the zoom lever.
(The zoom speed varies depending on how far you move the lever.)
•
If you assign [Zoom Control] to an Fn button, you can operate optical zoom slowly by
pressing 21 or fast by pressing 34. (Fn Buttons: 527)
Interchangeable lens that does not support zoom
Optical zoom is not available.
≥ The focal length is displayed on the recording screen.
•
The focal length display can be hidden:
([Focal Length]: 582)
(W)
(T)
35mm
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
206
Extended Tele Conversion
[Ex. Tele Conv.] enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged
beyond what is available with the optical zoom, without any deterioration in
image quality.
•
The [Ex. Tele Conv.] maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the [Picture
Size] set in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu.
– Set to [ M]: 1.4×
– Set to [ S]: 2.0×
1
Set [Picture Size] to [M] or [S].
≥ [] [] [Picture Size] [M]/[S]
2
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].
≥ [] [] [Ex. Tele Conv.]
[TELE CONV.]
Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.
[OFF]
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
207
•
When displaying the [Ex. Tele Conv.] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing
[DISP.] allows you to change the [Picture Size] setting.
•
When the following functions are being used, [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not available:
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– High Resolution mode
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
208
[Power Zoom Lens]
This sets the zoom operation when using a lens that supports power zoom
(motorized zoom).
•
This is available when using a supported interchangeable lens.
[] [] Select [Power Zoom Lens]
[Step Zoom]
When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will
stop at preset focal length positions.
•
This is not possible during video recording.
[Zoom Speed]
You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
•
If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not
change.
[Photo]
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Medium speed)/[L]
(Low speed)
[Video]
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Medium speed)/[L]
(Low speed)
[Zoom Ring]
This can be selected when a lens compatible with power zoom
that has a zoom lever and zoom ring is mounted on the camera.
The operations with the zoom ring are disabled when set to
[OFF] to prevent erroneous operation.
209
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer
This chapter describes functions for recording in drive mode and the image
stabilizer function.
≥ Selecting the Drive Mode: 210
≥ Taking Burst Pictures: 212
≥ High Resolution mode: 223
≥ Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 228
≥ Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 235
≥ Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 239
≥ Recording Using the Self-timer: 241
≥ Bracket Recording: 245
≥ [Live View Composite]: 253
≥ [Silent Mode]: 257
≥ [Shutter Type]: 259
≥ Image Stabilizer: 266
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode
210
Selecting the Drive Mode
You can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the recording
conditions.
Rotating the drive mode dial.
[ ] (Single)
Takes one picture each time the shutter button is pressed.
[ ]/[ ] (Burst) (Taking Burst Pictures: 212)
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
[ ] (High Resolution mode) (High Resolution mode: 223)
This merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.
[ ] (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation) (Recording with Time Lapse
Shot: 228, Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 235)
Takes pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation.
[ ] (Self-timer) (Recording Using the Self-timer: 241)
Takes pictures when the set time elapses after the shutter button is pressed.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode
211
•
The detailed setting screens for each drive mode can be called up with an Fn
button:
[] [] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [Drive Mode
Setting]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
212
Taking Burst Pictures
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
You can select burst recording settings to suit the recording conditions,
including [H], [M], and [L] which enable burst recording with high image
quality, and SH burst recording which takes burst pictures at ultra high
speeds using an electronic shutter.
1
Set the drive mode to [ ] (Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst
Shot 2).
≥Set the drive mode dial. (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
•
Configure the burst settings for each of [ ] and [ ].
2
Select the burst rate.
≥ [] [] [Burst Shot Setting] [Burst Shot 1
Setting]/[Burst Shot 2 Setting]
•
With the default settings, [H] is set for [ ] and [SH75] is set for [ ].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
213
[SH75]
Takes burst pictures at ultra high speed with the electronic shutter, 75 frames/
second.
[SH60]
Takes burst pictures at ultra high speed with the electronic shutter, 60 frames/
second.
[SH20]
Takes burst pictures at ultra high speed with the electronic shutter, 20 frames/
second.
[SH75 PRE]
Takes pre-burst pictures at ultra high speed, 75 frames/second. (SH
Pre-burst Recording: 215)
[SH60 PRE]
Takes pre-burst pictures at ultra high speed, 60 frames/second. (SH
Pre-burst Recording: 215)
[SH20 PRE]
Takes pre-burst pictures at ultra high speed, 20 frames/second. (SH
Pre-burst Recording: 215)
[H]
Takes high-speed burst pictures.
[M]
Takes medium-speed burst pictures.
[L]
Takes low-speed burst pictures.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
214
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Start recording.
•
Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is pressed fully.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
215
SH Pre-burst Recording
The camera also records images for the set amount of time during the
period between when the shutter button is pressed halfway and when it is
pressed fully.
In [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time] you can set the length of time recordings
are made before the shutter is pressed fully.
(A) [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time]
(B) Recorded range
[] [] [Burst Shot Setting] [SH Burst Pre-Recording
Time]
[1.5SEC]
Recording starts from 1.5 seconds before the shutter button was pressed fully.
[1.0SEC]
Recording starts from 1 second before the shutter button was pressed fully.
[0.5SEC]
Recording starts from 0.5 seconds before the shutter button was pressed fully.
•
The setting for [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time] is applied to both [Burst Shot 1
Setting] and [Burst Shot 2 Setting].
•
[PRE] is displayed on the recording screen during SH pre-burst recording.
•
If the shutter button is pressed and held at halfway for approx. 1 minute, the frames
before pressing fully cannot be saved. Press the shutter button halfway again.
(A)
(B)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
216
Burst Rate
•
The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as [Picture
Size] and focus mode.
Mechanical
shutter
Electronic
front curtain
Electronic
shutter
Live View
when taking
burst
pictures
[SH75]/
[SH75 PRE]
——
75 frames/
second
([AFS]/[MF])
None
[SH60]/
[SH60 PRE]
——
60 frames/
second
([AFS]/[AFC]/
[MF])
None
[SH20]/
[SH20 PRE]
——
20 frames/
second
([AFS]/[AFC]/
[MF])
None
[H]
(High speed)
14 frames/
second
([AFS]/[MF])
10 frames/
second
([AFC])
14 frames/
second
([AFS]/[MF])
9frames/
second
([AFC])
14 frames/
second
([AFS]/[MF])
9frames/
second
([AFC])
None ([AFS]/
[MF])
Available
([AFC])
[M]
(Medium speed)
6 frames/second ([AFS]/[AFC]/[MF]) Available
[L]
(Low speed)
2 frames/second ([AFS]/[AFC]/[MF]) Available
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
217
Maximum Number of Frames Recordable
•
When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.
Recording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.
*1 Recording stops when the maximum number of frames recordable is reached.
For SH pre-burst recording, this includes the number of pictures taken with
pre-burst recording.
*2 The burst rate will become lower during recording but pictures can continue to be
taken until the card becomes full.
[Picture Quality]
[FINE]/[STD.]
[RAW+FINE]/
[RAW+STD.]
[RAW]
[SH75]/
[SH75 PRE]
200 frames
*1
[SH60]/
[SH60 PRE]
[SH20]/
[SH20 PRE]
[H]
(High speed)
200 frames or
more
*2
160 frames or
more
*2
170 frames or
more
*2
[M]
(Medium speed)
[L]
(Low speed)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
218
Number of Frames That Can Be Saved with Pre-burst
Recording Before the Shutter Button Is Pressed Fully
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously
When you press the shutter button halfway, the number of pictures that can
be taken continuously will appear on the recording screen.
Example) When 20 frames: [r20]
•
Once recording starts, the number of pictures that can be taken continuously will
decrease.
– During [H]/[M]/[L] burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst rate decreases.
– During SH burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst recording stops.
•
When [r99+] is displayed on the recording screen, you can take 100 or more burst
pictures.
[SH Burst
Pre-Recording Time]
[SH75 PRE] [SH60 PRE] [SH20 PRE]
[1.5SEC] 113 frames 90 frames 30 frames
[1.0SEC] 75 frames 60 frames 20 frames
[0.5SEC] 38 frames 30 frames 10 frames
r20
ISO
100
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
219
Focus when Taking Burst Pictures
•
When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.
•
With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the
extent possible.
•
With normal focus, the burst rate may become slow.
Focus mode
[Focus/
Shutter
Priority]
([Focus/
Shutter
Priority]: 564)
[SH75]/
[SH75 PRE]
[SH60]/
[SH60 PRE]/
[SH20]/
[SH20 PRE]/
[H]
[M]/[L]
[AFS]
[FOCUS]
Fixed to the focus of the first frame
[BALANCE]
[RELEASE]
[AFC]
[FOCUS]
—
Estimated
focus
Normal focus
[BALANCE]
Estimated focus
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with manual focus
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
220
Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures
Focus mode
[SH75]/
[SH75 PRE]
[SH60]/
[SH60 PRE]/
[SH20]/
[SH20 PRE]/
[H]
[M]/[L]
[AFS] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame
The exposure is
adjusted for each
frame
[AFC] —
The exposure is
adjusted for each
frame
[MF] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
221
•
It may take a while to save burst pictures.
If you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the maximum
number of frames recordable will be reduced.
When taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card.
•
Taking burst pictures does not work while you are using the following function:
– [Live View Composite]
Notes on SH burst recording
•
[Shutter Type] is fixed to [ELEC.].
•
There are limits on the shutter speed you can set during SH burst recording.
– [SH75]/[SH75 PRE]: To a minimum of 1/80
– [SH60]/[SH60 PRE]: To a minimum of 1/60
– [SH20]/[SH20 PRE]: To a minimum of 1/60
•
The aperture will be fixed during burst recording.
•
The images recorded will be saved as a set of burst group pictures. (Group
Images: 498)
•
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [SH75]/[SH75 PRE] is not available.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
222
Notes on SH pre-burst recording
•
Pictures taken before the shutter button is pressed fully are not saved in the
following cases:
– When recording with the Touch Shutter
– When [Half-Press Shutter] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu is set to
[ON]
•
When the ambient temperature is high or Pre-Burst recording is performed
continuously, even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not
operate to protect the camera from overheating. Wait until the camera cools
down.
•
Even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not operate when
there is insufficient free space on the card.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
223
High Resolution mode
This merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.
This function is suitable for recording subjects that do not move.
When [Handheld High-Res] is set to on, you can record pictures with a
higher resolution without using a tripod.
The picture after merging can be saved in RAW or JPEG format.
1
Set the drive mode to [ ] (High resolution).
≥Set the drive mode dial. (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
2
Set the recording settings.
≥ [] [] [High Resolution Mode Setting]
•
When recording with [Handheld High-Res] set to [OFF], use a tripod to
minimize camera shake.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
224
[Handheld High-Res]
You can record without using a tripod. Turn on the image stabilizer function.
•
When [OFF], the image stabilizer function is not available.
[Picture Quality]
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.
[COMBINED]/[FINE]/[RAW+FINE]/[RAW]
•
When set to [COMBINED], recording is with the same settings as [Picture
Quality] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu. (However, [STD.] changes to
[FINE].)
[Picture Size]
Sets the image size after merging.
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [4:3].
[XL] (100 M): 11552×8672
[LL] (50.5 M): 8192×6144
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [3:2].
[XL] (89 M): 11552×7696
[LL] (44.5 M): 8192×5464
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [16:9].
[XL] (75 M): 11552×6496
[LL] (37.5 M): 8192×4608
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [1:1].
[XL] (75 M): 8672×8672
[LL] (37.5 M): 6144×6144
•
RAW images are always recorded in the [4:3] (11552×8672) aspect ratio.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
225
[Simul Record Normal Shot]
Simultaneously takes pictures that are not merged when [ON] is set. The first
picture will be saved with [Picture Size] set to [L].
[Shutter Delay]
Sets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is
released.
[30 SEC]/[15 SEC]/[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[1/2 SEC]/[1/4 SEC]/[1/8
SEC]/[Off]
[Motion Blur Processing]
Sets the correction method to use when the subject moved.
[MODE1]: This gives priority to High Resolution mode, therefore subject blur
appears as an afterimage in the picture.
[MODE2]: This reduces afterimage from subject blur, but cannot obtain the
same High Resolution mode effect in the corrected range.
•
When [Handheld High-Res] is [ON], [Motion Blur Processing] is fixed to
[MODE2].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
226
3
Decide on the composition and then fix the camera in
place.
•
If blurring is detected, the High Resolution mode icon (A) blinks.
•
When [Handheld High-Res] is set to [ON], the icon changes to [ ].
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
•
With the default settings, [Shutter Delay] is activated, so there will be a gap in
time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is released.
•
The screen goes dark during recording.
•
The recording state indication (red) (B) blinks.
Do not move the camera while it is blinking.
•
You can continue recording when the merging process ends.
(A)
(B)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
227
•
In High Resolution mode, recording will be performed using the following
settings:
– [Shutter Type]: Fixed to [ELEC.]
– Minimum aperture value: F11
– Shutter speed: 1 second to 1/32000 of a second
– ISO sensitivity: Upper limit to [1600]
– Focus mode: [AFS]/[MF]
•
Hold the camera firmly during handheld recording so that the camera does not
shake. Recording may fail if there is a lot of shaking.
•
Image merging can take a long time with handheld recording.
•
When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may change
or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
•
Devices other than this camera may not be able to play back images recorded
using High Resolution mode.
•
When the following function is being used, High Resolution Mode is not
available:
– [Live View Composite]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
228
Recording with Time Lapse Shot
Pictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval.
This feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects such
as animals and plants.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be
combined into a video. (Group Images: 498)
1
Set the drive mode to [ ].
≥Set the drive mode dial. (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
2
Set [Mode] to [Time Lapse Shot].
≥ [] [] [Time Lapse/Animation] [Mode] [Time
Lapse Shot]
•
Check that the clock is set correctly. (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for
the First Time): 68)
•
For long recording intervals, we recommend setting [Lens Focus Resume] to
[ON] in the [Custom] ([Lens / Others]) menu.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
229
3
Set the recording settings.
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.
[Shooting Interval Setting]
[ON]: Sets the interval before the next recording takes place.
[OFF]: Takes pictures without leaving recording intervals.
[Start Time]
[Now]: Starts recording when the shutter button is pressed fully.
[After 2 Seconds]: Starts recording 2 seconds after the shutter button is
pressed fully.
[Start Time Set]: Starts recording at the set time.
[Image Count]/[Shooting Interval]
Sets the number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken.
The number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken can be
automatically calculated and set. (Setting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot
Recording: 231)
•
[Shooting Interval] is not available when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to
[OFF].
[Exposure Leveling]
Adjusts the exposure automatically to prevent large changes in brightness
between adjacent frames.
[Create New Folder At Rec]
[Create a New Folder]: When set to [ON], a new folder is created each time
that Time Lapse Shot recording is started.
[File Number Reset]: When set to [ON], the file number is reset each time a
new folder is created.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
230
4
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
•
When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera will enter into sleep status until the
start time is reached.
•
During recording standby, the camera enters into sleep status when no
operation is performed for a certain period of time.
•
The recording will stop automatically.
6
Create a video. (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion
Animation Videos: 239)
•
After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Time Lapse Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. ([Time Lapse Video]: 519)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
231
Setting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot Recording
When [DISP.] is pressed in the [Image Count]/[Shooting Interval] setting
screen, [Image Count] and [Shooting Interval] can be set by automatically
calculating them from the frame rate, time, and recording duration of the
video to be created.
1 Press 34 to select the item and then press or .
[Production Frame Rate]
Sets the frame rate of videos to be created.
It can be set in the range between 1 fps and 99 fps.
[Video Length]
Sets the playback time of videos to be created.
It can be set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s.
[Time Lapse Shooting Duration]
Sets the Time Lapse Shot duration.
It can be set in the range between 00h00m01s and 99h59m59s.
2 Press [DISP.] to confirm.
•
The settings are reflected when you select [Yes].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
232
•
[Image Count] can be set in the range between 1 and 9999.
•
[Shooting Interval] is set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s.
Decimal places are rounded down if the number is not evenly divisible.
•
When the setting is one where recording is not possible, [Image Count] or
[Shooting Interval] is displayed in red letters.
•
When [Shooting Interval Setting] is [OFF], the Time Lapse Shot settings cannot
be automatically calculated.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
233
Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording
Pressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the
camera.
•
You can perform the following operations by pressing [Q] during Time Lapse Shot
recording.
[Continue]
Returns to the recording. (Only during recording)
[Pause]
Pauses the recording. (Only during recording)
[Resume]
Resumes the recording. (Only while paused)
•
You can also press the shutter button to resume.
[End]
Stops the Time Lapse Shot recording.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
234
•
Pictures recorded to more than one card cannot be combined into a single video.
•
The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take
pictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures.
Furthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen.
•
Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– When you set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]
You can set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and replace the battery or card.
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON] and then press the shutter button fully to
resume recording.
(Note that the images recorded after replacing the card will be saved as a
separate set of group images.)
•
[Exposure Leveling] is not available if ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO]
in [M] mode.
•
[Time Lapse Shot] is not available when using the following function:
– [Live View Composite]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
235
Recording with Stop Motion Animation
Take pictures while moving the subject little by little.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be
combined into a stop motion video. (Group Images: 498)
1
Set the drive mode to [ ].
≥Set the drive mode dial. (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
2
Set [Mode] to [Stop Motion Animation].
≥ [] [] [Time Lapse/Animation] [Mode] [Stop
Motion Animation]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
236
3
Set the recording settings.
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.
[Add to Picture Group]
Allows you to continue recording for a set of stop motion images that have
already been recorded.
•
Select an image and proceed to Step
5
.
[Auto Shooting]
[ON]: Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.
[OFF]: This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
[Shooting Interval]
Sets the recording interval for [Auto Shooting].
4
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
237
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
≥Take pictures repeatedly while moving the subject little by little.
•
The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them
as reference for the amount of movement.
•
You can play back the recorded stop motion images by pressing [ ] during
recording.
Press [ ] to delete unnecessary images.
To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
6
Stop recording.
≥Press and then select [Time Lapse/Animation] from the
[Photo] menu to stop recording.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
238
7
Create a video. (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion
Animation Videos: 239)
•
After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. ([Stop Motion Video]: 519)
•
Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
•
If the camera is turned off while recording, a message for resuming the recording
is displayed when it is turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the
recording from the interruption point.
•
The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take
pictures at the set interval when the flash, etc. is used for recording.
•
A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one
that was taken.
•
[Stop Motion Animation] is not available when using the following function:
– [Live View Composite]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos
239
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation
Videos
After performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can
proceed to create a video.
•
Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.
– Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 228
– Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 235
•
You can also create videos with [Time Lapse Video] ([Time Lapse Video]: 519) or
[Stop Motion Video] ([Stop Motion Video]: 519) in the [Playback] menu.
1
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen that appears
after recording.
2
Set the options for creating a video.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos
240
3
Select [OK].
≥A video will be created in the [MP4] recording file format.
[OK]
Creates a video.
[Rec Quality]
Sets the video image quality.
[Frame Rate]
Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the video will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]: Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]: Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
•
Videos cannot be created when the [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz
(CINEMA)].
•
Videos cannot be created if the recording time exceeds 30 minutes.
•
In the following cases, videos cannot be created if the file size exceeds 4 GB:
– When an SDHC memory card is being used and a 4K [Rec Quality] is set
– When an FHD [Rec Quality] is set
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
241
Recording Using the Self-timer
1
Set the drive mode to [ ].
≥Set the drive mode dial. (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
2
Set the self-timer time. (Setting the Self-timer Time:
243)
• When recording videos, set [Self Timer For Video] in [Self Timer
Setting] of the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu to [ON].
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Decide on the composition and then adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
•
The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
242
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button.
≥After the self-timer light blinks, shooting or video recording starts.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
243
Setting the Self-timer Time
Picture: [] [] Select [Self Timer]
Video: [] [] [Self Timer Setting] Select [Self Timer]
*
* This can be set by setting [Self Timer For Video] to [ON] in [Self Timer Setting] in
the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu.
[] Takes a picture after 10 seconds.
[]
Takes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after 10 seconds.
(When recording video, it will be the same operation with
[ ].)
[]
Takes a picture after 2 seconds.
•
This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera shake
caused by pressing the shutter button.
[] to [ ]
(Custom)
Takes a picture after the time selected with [Custom Time].
[SET]
[Custom Time]
Sets the time until recording starts.
[10SEC]/[9SEC]/[8SEC]/[7SEC]/[6SEC]/
[5SEC]/[4SEC]/[3SEC]/[2SEC]
[Display
Countdown]
A countdown is displayed on the recording
screen when the self-timer is Custom.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
244
•
We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
•
[Self Timer] in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu and [Self Timer] in the [Self
Timer Setting] ([Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu) work together.
•
When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] ([Filter Settings])
– [Bracketing]
– [Live View Composite]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
245
Bracket Recording
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple
images while automatically changing the setting value for exposure,
aperture, focus or white balance (adjustment value or color temperature).
1
Set [Bracketing Type].
≥ [] [] [Bracketing] [Bracketing Type]
•
Aperture Bracket can be selected in the following modes:
– [A] mode
– [M] mode (when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO])
•
White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) can be selected when the white
balance is set to [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
1 2 3 4
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
246
2
Set [More Settings].
≥For information about [More Settings], refer to page for each
bracketing method.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Focus on the subject and then take pictures.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
247
Setting Items ([Bracketing Type])
[ ] (Exposure Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the exposure.
([More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 249)
[ ] (Aperture Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the aperture
value. ([More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 250)
[ ] (Focus Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the focus
point. ([More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 251)
[ ] (White Balance Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed once, the camera automatically records three
images with the different white balance adjustment values. ([More Settings] (White
Balance Bracket): 252)
[ ] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature))
When the shutter button is pressed once, the camera automatically records three
images with the different white balance color temperatures. ([More Settings] (White
Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)): 252)
[OFF]
How to Cancel Bracketing
Select [OFF] in Step
1
.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
248
•
White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) are not
available when using the following functions:
– [iA] mode
– Taking burst pictures
– [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Filter Settings]
•
Bracket recording is not available while you are using the following functions:
– SH burst recording
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– High Resolution mode
– [Live View Composite]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
249
[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket)
[Step]
Sets the image count and exposure compensation step.
[3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record 7 images in 1 EV steps)
[Sequence]
Sets the order in which images are recorded.
[Single Shot Setting]
[]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is pressed.
[]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter button is pressed once.
•
The [BKT] icon blinks until all of the set number of pictures is taken.
•
When you record images with Exposure Bracket after setting the exposure
compensation value, the images recorded are based on the selected exposure
compensation value.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
250
[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket)
[Image Count]
[3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately setting the aperture value
in the sequence of one before and then one after using the initial aperture value as the
reference.
[ALL]: Records images using all aperture values.
Example when the initial position is set to F8.0 (H-ES12060)
(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image, (3) 3rd image ... (7) 7th image
4.02.8 5.6 8.0 11 16 22
(1)(6) (4) (2) (3) (5) (7)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
251
[More Settings] (Focus Bracket)
[Step]
Sets the focus adjustment step.
•
The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if the initial focus point is
close, and longer if it is far away.
[Image Count]
Sets the image count.
•
This cannot be set when taking burst pictures.
Burst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.
[Sequence]
[0/−/+]: Records while alternately moving the focus point in the sequence of forward
and then backward using the initial focus point as the reference.
[0/+]: Records while moving the focus point toward the far side using the initial focus
point as the reference.
Example when [Sequence]: [0/−/+] is set
Example when [Sequence]: [0/+] is set
(A) Focus: closer
(B) Focus: more distant
(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image ... (5) 5th image ...
•
When [Focus Limiter] is set, recording is within the set range where AF works.
•
Pictures recorded with Focus Bracket are displayed as images of one group.
(Group Images: 498)
・・・ ・・・
(A) (B)
(1) (3) (5)(2)(4)
・・・
(A) (B)
(3) (4) (5)(2)(1)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
252
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket)
Rotate , or to set the correction step and then press
or .
Rotate to the right:
Horizontal direction ([A] - [B])
Rotate to the left:
Vertical direction ([G] - [M])
•
The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ].
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color
Temperature))
Rotate , or to set the correction step and then press
or .
•
The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ].
GGGGGGG
AAAAAABBBBBBB
MMMMMM
±300K
5500K5500K5500K
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Live View Composite]
253
[Live View Composite]
Images are recorded over several times and only the parts that change to
become brighter form part of the composition.
The images composed by recording at a set exposure time (shutter speed)
are displayed, allowing the images to be confirmed as recording proceeds.
This allows you to reduce the overall brightness for recording, so it is
convenient for recording the light trails of stars or fireworks against a bright
nightscape.
1
Set the recording mode to [M].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Set [Live View Composite].
≥ [] [] [Live View Composite]
3
Start Live View Composite recording.
≥Select [Start] and then press or .
•
Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Live View Composite]
254
4
Decide on the composition and then fix the camera in
place.
5
Set the shutter speed and ISO sensitivity.
≥Rotate to set the shutter speed.
≥Press [ISO], then rotate , , or to set the ISO sensitivity.
• The shutter speed can be set in the range between 60 seconds
and 1/1.6 of a second.
• The ISO sensitivity can be set in the range between [100] and
[1600] ([50] and [1600] when [Extended ISO] is set).
6
Get the image to use for noise reduction.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
7
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
• Recording is done according to the settings in Step
5
, and images
processed with noise reduction are merged a frame at a time.
(A) Histogram display
(B) Shutter speed × Number of images merged
(C) Elapsed time
LC
LC
LC
5
sec. x 1200
sec. x 1200
5 sec. x 1200
1h40m00s
1h40m00s
1h40m00s
(A)(B) (C)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Live View Composite]
255
8
Stop recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
• A maximum of 3 hours can be recorded with one Live View
Composite recording.
(Recording automatically ends when the time exceeds 3 hours.)
9
End [Live View Composite].
≥Press [Q].
Setting Items ([Live View Composite])
[Start]
Starts Live View Composite recording.
[Shutter Delay]
Sets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is
released.
[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[OFF]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Live View Composite]
256
•
[Long Exposure NR] will be [ON].
•
When recording with the flash, the flash fires only in the first frame.
•
Some menus are not displayed after getting the noise reduction image.
•
The image for noise reduction is discarded when you do the following. Do Step
6
again.
– Modify the shutter speed/ISO sensitivity
– Switch the playback mode
•
When pressing the shutter button fully to end recording, the last image may not
be merged.
•
During Live View Composite recording, audio is not output to an external device
connected by HDMI.
•
[Live View Composite] is not available when using the following functions:
– [ELEC.]/[ELEC.+NR] ([Shutter Type])
– High Resolution mode
– [Filter Settings]
– [Silent Mode]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]
257
[Silent Mode]
This disables all operation sounds and light output at once.
The audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF assist
light will be set to forced off mode.
•
The following settings are fixed:
– [Flash Mode]: [ ] (Forced Flash Off)
– [AF Assist Light]: [OFF]
– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.]
– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [AF Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [E-Shutter Vol]: [ ] (OFF)
Picture: [] [] Select [Silent Mode]
Video: [] [] Select [Silent Mode]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]
258
•
Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink:
– Charging light/Network connection light
– Card access lights
– Self-timer light
•
[Silent Mode] is not available when using the following function:
– [Live View Composite]
•
Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the privacy,
portrait, and other rights of subjects.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
260
[AUTO]
Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording conditions and
shutter speed.
[MECH.]
Records with the mechanical shutter type.
[EFC]
Records with the electronic front curtain type.
[ELEC.]
Records with the electronic shutter type.
[ELEC.+NR]
Records with the electronic shutter type.
When pictures are taken at slower shutter speeds, the shutter is closed after recording
to perform long shutter noise reduction.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
261
*1 This setting is available only in [M] mode.
*2 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone] in
[Beep] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. ([Beep]: 607)
•
The electronic front curtain type reduces blur caused by the shutter because the
amount of vibration from the shutter is small compared to the mechanical shutter
type.
•
The electronic shutter type allows you to record without vibration from the shutter.
Mechanical
shutter type
Electronic front
curtain type
Electronic shutter
type
Mechanism
This type starts and
ends exposure with
the mechanical
shutter.
This type starts
exposure
electronically and
ends it with the
mechanical shutter.
This type starts and
ends exposure
electronically.
Flash —
Shutter speed
(sec.)
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
30 minutes)
*1
,
60 to 1/8000
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
30 minutes)
*1
,
60 to 1/2000
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
60 seconds)
*1
,
60 to 1/32000
Shutter sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Electronic shutter
sound
*2
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
262
•
To reduce shutter-induced blur, you can set the shutter to release a few seconds
after the shutter button is pressed:
([Shutter Delay]: 265)
•
When [ ] is displayed on the screen, recording will be with the electronic
shutter type.
•
When a moving subject is recorded using the electronic shutter, the subject may
appear distorted in the picture.
•
When you record using the electronic shutter under lighting such as fluorescent
or LED lighting, horizontal stripes may be recorded. In such a case, lowering the
shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
263
[Long Exposure NR]
The camera automatically removes noise generated when recording
images with a slow shutter speed.
[] [] Select [Long Exposure NR]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
Recording is not possible during noise reduction.
•
When the following functions are being used, [Long Exposure NR] is not
available:
– Video recording/SH burst recording
– [ELEC.] (Excluding [ELEC.+NR])/[Silent Mode]
– High Resolution mode
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
264
[Min. Shutter Speed]
Sets the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
[] [] Select [Min. Shutter Speed]
[AUTO]
The camera automatically sets the minimum shutter speed.
[1/32000] to [1/1]
•
The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in recording situations
where correct exposure cannot be achieved.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
265
[Shutter Delay]
To reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur, the shutter is released
after the specified time has passed since the shutter button was pressed.
[] [] Select [Shutter Delay]
Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
•
When the following functions are being used, [Shutter Delay] is not available:
– Video recording/SH burst recording
– High Resolution mode
– [Live View Composite]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
266
Image Stabilizer
≥ Image Stabilizer Settings: 269
This camera can use both the in-body image stabilizer and the in-lens
image stabilizer.
It is compatible with the Dual I.S.2 system that is an effective combination
of the 2 image stabilizers.
Furthermore, during video recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image
Stabilizer that incorporates electronic stabilization.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
267
Combinations of lenses and image stabilizers (As of September 2023)
Image stabilizers that can be used will differ depending on the attached
lens.
* If the [ ] or [ ] icon is not displayed on the recording screen even when
a compatible lens is used, update the lens firmware to the latest version.
(Firmware of Your Camera/Lens: 18)
•
The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 272) can be used
with any lenses.
Attached lens
Available image
stabilizer
Example of icon
Panasonic lenses compatible
with Dual I.S. mode
(Based on the Micro Four
Thirds system standard)
*
Body+Lens
(Dual I.S./Dual I.S.2)
/
Lenses compatible with the
image stabilizer function
(Based on the Micro Four
Thirds system standard)
Body or Lens
Lenses without image
stabilizer function
Body
Lenses without function to
communicate with this
camera
Body
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
268
Using the Image Stabilizer
•
When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to [ON].
•
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this camera,
after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens
information is displayed.
Correctly operating the image stabilization function requires that the focal length be
set to match the attached lens.
Set the focal length in accordance as prompted by the message.
This can also be set using the menu. ([Lens Information]: 274)
•
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera shake alert icon [ ]
may be displayed on the recording screen.
If this is displayed, we recommend using a tripod, the self timer or the Shutter
Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).
•
We recommend turning off the image stabilizer function when using a tripod.
•
The image stabilizer may cause vibration or produce operational sound during
operation, but these are not malfunctions.
•
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this
camera, you can hide the message asking for confirmation of the lens
information that is displayed after turning on the camera:
([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 595)
•
You can display the reference point and check the camera shake status:
([I.S. Status Scope]: 584)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
269
Image Stabilizer Settings
Set the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation.
Picture: [] [] Select [Image Stabilizer]
Video: [] [] Select [Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
Sets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method (normal,
panning). ([Operation Mode]: 271)
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
Through the combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic image stabilizers,
corrections are made to camera shake on 5 axes during video recording along the
vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes, and to the peripheral distortion that
readily occurs when you are using a wide-angle lens. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 272)
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
Increases the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to perform recording
from a fixed perspective. ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 273)
[Anamorphic (Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording. ([Anamorphic
(Video)]: 273)
[Lens Information]
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera,
register the lens information in the camera. ([Lens Information]: 274)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
270
•
When the following function is being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not
available:
– [S&Q] mode
•
While you are using the following functions, [HIGH] in [E-Stabilization (Video)] is
not available:
– Other than [OFF] in [Anamorphic (Video)]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
271
[Operation Mode]
Set the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method
(normal, panning).
[Normal]
Corrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera shake.
This function is suitable for normal recording.
[Panning (Left/Right)]
Corrects vertical camera shake.
This is suitable for horizontal panning.
[Panning (Up/Down)]
Corrects horizontal camera shake.
This is suitable for vertical panning.
[OFF]
Turns the image stabilization function OFF.
•
The [Operation Mode] that can be used differ depending on the lens used.
•
[Operation Mode] is fixed to [ ] ([Normal]) when using other manufacturers’
lenses with an image stabilization function.
•
When using lenses with an O.I.S. switch, the camera’s operation mode cannot be
set to [OFF]. Set the switch on the lens to [OFF].
•
When the following functions are being used, [Operation Mode] switches to [ ]
([Normal]):
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– Video recording
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
272
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
Through the combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic image
stabilizers, corrections are made to camera shake on 5 axes during video
recording along the vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes, and to the
peripheral distortion that readily occurs when you are using a wide-angle
lens. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
[HIGH]
Large shakes and peripheral distortion are corrected electronically.
The angle of view is narrower than [STANDARD].
•
[ ] is displayed on the screen during video recording.
[STANDARD]
Shakes and peripheral distortion are corrected electronically.
The angle of view is narrower.
•
[ ] is displayed on the screen during video recording.
[OFF]
Turns the electronic image stabilizer (video) OFF.
•
There will be variation in the effectiveness of the correction depending on the video
mode used for recording and the recording conditions.
•
Using [E-Stabilization (Video)] may cause a drop in resolution.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
273
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
Increase the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to
perform recording from a fixed perspective.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is operating, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
•
To change composition while recording, first set this to [OFF] before moving the
camera.
To set this to [OFF] during recording, use the Fn button. (Fn Buttons: 527)
•
Longer focal lengths will result in weaker stabilization.
[Anamorphic (Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording.
Settings:
[ ]([2.0×])/[ ]([1.8×])/[ ]([1.5×])/[ ]([1.33×])/[ ]([1.30×])/
[OFF]
•
Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
•
While [Anamorphic (Video)] is functioning, the set magnification appears on the
image stabilizer icons on the recording screen, as shown by [ ] and [ ].
•
When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is set, [Boost I.S. (Video)] is prioritized.
•
Image stabilizer functions on your lens may not work correctly. Turn off the image
stabilizer function on your lens if this is the case.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
274
[Lens Information]
Register the information for lenses that cannot communicate with the
camera.
Match the in-body image stabilizer with the information of the lens you
register.
Press 34 to select the lens information to use and then press or
.
•
In the default setting, the lens information for 6 lenses with a focal length of between
24 mm and 135 mm is registered.
The lens information for up to 12 lenses can be registered.
Registering, modifying, and deleting lens information
1 Press 34 to select the lens information and then press [DISP.].
•
If lens information that has not been registered is selected, press or
to proceed to Step 3.
2 Press 34 to select [Edit], [Sorting], or [Delete] and then press or .
•
You can change the display order of lens information by selecting [Sorting].
•
The lens information is deleted when you select [Delete].
•
You cannot delete the lens information for a lens that is being used.
3 Enter the lens Information.
•
The lens information changes if the lens information has already been
registered.
4 (If lens information that has not been registered is selected) Press [DISP.] to
register the lens information.
276
Metering / Exposure / ISO
Sensitivity
This chapter describes recording modes for determining exposure and ISO
sensitivity.
≥ [Metering Mode]: 277
≥ Program AE Mode: 279
≥ Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 283
≥ Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 286
≥ Manual Exposure Mode: 289
≥ Preview Mode: 294
≥ Exposure Compensation: 296
≥ Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 300
≥ ISO Sensitivity: 302
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]
277
[Metering Mode]
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Metering Mode]
[ ] (Multi-metering)
Method in which the most suitable exposure is measured by judging the allocation of
brightness on the whole screen.
[ ] (Center-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the center of the screen.
[ ] (Spot)
Method used to measure the extremely small part around the spot-metering target (A).
•
When you move the AF area, the spot metering target also moves to match.
(A)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]
278
[ ] (Highlight-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the highlighted parts of the
screen to prevent overexposure.
This is suitable for theatre photography, etc.
•
The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:
([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 560)
•
You can assign the function that records with the metering mode set to [ ]
(Spot) once only to an Fn button:
([1 Shot Spot Metering]: 533)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
279
Program AE Mode
≥ Program Shift: 281
In [P] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the shutter
speed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject.
You can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed
and aperture values while keeping the same exposure.
1
Set the recording mode to [P].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the
recording screen.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
280
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved, the aperture value (A) and shutter
speed (B) blink red.
3
Start recording.
F2.860
(A)(B)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
281
Program Shift
You can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set
automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.
With this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused by
decreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more
dynamically by slowing the shutter speed.
1
Press the shutter button halfway.
•
This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the recording
screen. (Approx. 10 seconds)
2
Rotate or while the values are displayed.
•
This displays the Program Shift icon (C) on the recording screen.
3
Start recording.
Canceling Program Shift
•
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
•
Rotate or until the Program Shift icon disappears.
F5.630
(C)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
282
•
Program Shift is not available when using the following function:
–Flash
•
You can customize dial operations:
([Dial Set.]: 573)
•
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
([Expo.Meter]: 582)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
283
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
In [A] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value
before recording.
The shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera.
Smaller aperture values
It becomes easier to defocus the background.
Larger aperture values
It becomes easier to bring everything into focus including the background.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
284
1
Set the recording mode to [A].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Set the aperture value.
≥Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
F8.0
F8.0
F8.0
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
285
Depth of Field Characteristics
Aperture value Small Large
Focal length of lens Telephoto Wide-angle
Distance to subject Near More distant
Depth of field
(area in sharp focus)
Shallow (narrow)
Example: When you want
to take a image with a
defocused background.
Deep (wide)
Example: When you want
to take a image with focus
as far as the background.
•
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (Preview Mode:
294)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect to constantly operate in [A] mode
to check the depth of field while recording:
([Constant Preview]: 576)
•
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
•
When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
•
You can customize dial operations:
([Dial Set.]: 573)
•
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
([Expo.Meter]: 582)
•
When a supported lens is being used, stops for setting the aperture value with
the aperture ring can be changed:
([Aperture Ring Increment]: 593)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
286
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
In [S] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed
before recording.
The aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.
Slower shutter speeds
It becomes easier to capture motion
Faster shutter speeds
It becomes easier to freeze motion
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
287
1
Set the recording mode to [S].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Set the shutter speed.
≥Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
250
250
250
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
288
•
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (Preview Mode:
294)
•
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
•
Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording
using a flash. (Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes: 347)
•
You can customize dial operations:
([Dial Set.]: 573)
•
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
([Expo.Meter]: 582)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
289
Manual Exposure Mode
≥ Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.): 292
≥ [B] (Bulb): 293
In [M] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can record by manually setting
the aperture value and shutter speed.
In default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
As a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture
value and shutter speed.
Exposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
1
Set the recording mode to [M].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
290
2
Set the aperture value and shutter speed.
≥Rotate to set the aperture value (A), and to set the shutter
speed (B).
3
Start recording.
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
F5.630
30
30
(A)(B)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
291
Manual Exposure Assist
When ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist
(example: ) will be displayed on the recording screen.
You can check the difference between the current exposure value and the
standard exposure (±0) measured by the camera.
•
Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide.
We recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
292
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.)
•
[MECH.]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/8000
•
[EFC]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/2000
•
[ELEC.]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 to 1/32000
•
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (Preview Mode:
294)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect to
constantly operate in [M] mode to check the depth of field and movement of the
subject while recording:
([Constant Preview]: 576)
•
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
•
When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
•
Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording
using a flash. (Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes: 347)
•
You can customize dial operations:
([Dial Set.]: 573)
•
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
([Expo.Meter]: 582)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
293
[B] (Bulb)
If you set the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb), the shutter stays open while the
shutter button is pressed fully. (up to approx. 30 minutes)
The shutter closes when the shutter button is released.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record
images of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky.
•
We recommend using a tripod or the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2:
optional) during bulb recording.
•
Bulb recording may create noticeable noise.
If you are concerned about noise, we recommend that you set [Long Exposure
NR] ([Long Exposure NR]: 263) to [ON] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu
before recording.
•
Bulb is not available when using the following functions:
– SH burst recording
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when set to [Auto Shooting])
– High Resolution mode
– [Bracketing]
– [Live View Composite]
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode
294
Preview Mode
You can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by physically
closing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set for actual
recording.
In addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter
speed at the same time.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Preview]. (Fn Buttons: 527)
Press the preview button.
•
Each press of the button switches between the effect preview screens.
Aperture effect: OFF
Shutter speed effect: OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect: OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect: ON
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode
295
•
It is possible to record in preview mode.
•
Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/32000 of a second.
•
Depending on the [Constant Preview] setting, there are preview screens that
cannot be displayed.
•
You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in
[A]/[M] mode:
([Constant Preview]: 576)
•
You can assign the function that enables you to view the aperture effect just while
the button is being pressed to an Fn button:
([Preview Aperture Effect]: 537)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
296
Exposure Compensation
≥ [i.Dynamic Range]: 299
You can compensate the exposure when the standard exposure
determined by the camera is too bright or too dark.
You can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of ±5 EV.
When recording videos, the range changes to ±3 EV.
1
Press [ ].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
297
2
Compensate the exposure.
≥Rotate , , or .
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
+
+
1
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
298
•
In [M] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO sensitivity to
[AUTO].
•
When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds ±3 EV, the
brightness of the recording screen will no longer change.
Press the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the
recording screen.
•
The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the camera.
•
The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:
([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 560)
•
You can set the exposure compensation value to be reset when the camera is
turned off:
([Exposure Comp. Reset]: 562)
•
You can change the operation of the [ ] button:
([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 572)
•
Exposure Bracket can be set and flash output can be adjusted on the exposure
compensation screen:
([Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 572)
•
You can assign the function that matches the aperture value and shutter speed to
the standard exposure to an Fn button:
([One Push AE]: 533)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
299
[i.Dynamic Range]
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference
between the background and subject is great.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [i.Dynamic Range]
Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
•
Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording
conditions.
•
When the following functions are being used, [i.Dynamic Range] is not available:
– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT]/[Hybrid Log Gamma] ([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live View Composite]
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
300
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same
focus and exposure settings while changing the composition.
This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or
there is a backlight, for example.
1
Register [AE LOCK], [AF LOCK], or [AF/AE LOCK] to the
Fn button. (Fn Buttons: 527)
•
These cannot be registered to [Fn4] to [Fn8].
[AE LOCK]
The exposure is locked.
[AF LOCK]
The focus is locked.
[AF/AE LOCK]
Both focus and exposure are locked.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
301
2
Lock focus and exposure.
≥Press and hold the Fn button.
≥If focus is locked, then the AF lock icon (A) will be displayed.
≥If exposure is locked, then the AE lock icon (B) will be displayed.
3
Hold the Fn button to decide on the composition and
then perform recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
•
Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
•
You can maintain lock even without pressing and holding the Fn button:
([AF/AE Lock Hold]: 564)
•
You can make fine manual adjustments to the focus during AF Lock:
([AF+MF]: 565)
AFLAFL
AELAEL
(A)
(B)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
302
ISO Sensitivity
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 306
You can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity).
With the default settings, you can set in the range between 100 and 25600
(between 100 and 12800 in [ ]/[S&Q] mode) in 1/3 EV increments.
1
Press [ISO].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
303
2
Select ISO sensitivity.
≥Rotate , , or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ISO].
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Characteristics of the ISO Sensitivity
By increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in dark places
to prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO sensitivities also
increase the amount of noise in the recorded images.
1
00
1
00
2
00
2
00
4
0
4
0
AUTO
AUTO
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
304
Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity)
[AUTO]
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the brightness.
•
Taking picture: Maximum [3200]
*1
•
Video recording:
Maximum [6400]
*2
(sensor output 60 fps or lower)
Maximum [3200]
*2
(sensor output 61 fps or higher)
[100]
*3
to [25600]
In [ ]/[S&Q] mode:
[100]
*3
to [12800] (sensor output 60 fps or lower)
[100]
*3
to [3200]
*4
(sensor output 61 fps or higher)
The ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value.
*1 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (photo)].
*2 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
*3 By setting [Extended ISO] ([Extended ISO]: 559) to [ON] in the [Custom] ([Image
Quality]) menu, the ISO sensitivity can be extended to a lower limit of [50].
*4 By setting [Extended ISO] ([Extended ISO]: 559) to [ON] in the [Custom] ([Image
Quality]) menu, the ISO sensitivity can be extended to a upper limit of [12800].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
305
•
When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is
restricted.
– High Resolution mode: Up to an upper limit of [1600]
– [Filter Settings]: Up to an upper limit of [3200]
– [Like709] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [100]
– [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style]):
Picture: Down to a lower limit of [500], up to an upper limit of [12800]
(The lower limit changes to [125] when [Extended ISO] is set.)
Video: Down to a lower limit of [500] (sensor output 60 fps or lower)/[250] (sensor
output 61 fps or higher)
(The lower limit changes to [125] when [Extended ISO] is set.)
– [Hybrid Log Gamma] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [250]
– [Live View Composite]: Up to an upper limit of [1600]
•
You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto:
([ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 306, [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 378)
•
You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values:
([ISO Increments]: 559)
•
The setting range of ISO sensitivity can be extended:
([Extended ISO]: 559)
•
You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto:
([Min. Shutter Speed]: 264)
•
You can change the operation of the [ISO] button:
([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 572)
•
You can set the upper limit for ISO Auto on the ISO sensitivity settings screen:
([ISO Displayed Setting]: 572)
•
You can change the units for sensitivity to dB when recording video:
([SS/Gain Operation]: 407)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
306
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
[] [] Select [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]
Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
•
Set in the range between [100] and [12800].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
•
Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and [25600].
•
When the following function is being used, [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is not
available:
– [Live View Composite]
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
308
White Balance (WB)
≥ Adjusting the White Balance: 314
White balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by
the light illuminating the subject.
It corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the
overall color closer to what is seen by the eye.
Normally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the
optimal white balance.
Set this function when the coloring of the image is different from what you
expected, or you want to change the coloring to capture the ambience.
1
Press [WB].
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
309
2
Select the white balance.
≥Rotate , or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [WB].
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
AWBc
AWBc
AWBw
AWBw
WB
WBWBWB
WBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWB
AWB
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
310
Setting Items (White Balance)
[AWB]
Auto
[AWBc]
Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)
[AWBw]
Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)
[]
Clear sky
[]
Cloudy sky
[]
Shade under a clear sky
[]
Incandescent light
[]
*
Flash
[] to []
Set mode 1 to 4 (Registering the White Set: 313)
[] to []
Color temperatures 1 to 4 (Color Temperature Setting: 313)
* It operates as [AWB] during video recording.
1
4
1
4
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
311
(1) [AWB] will work within this range.
(2) Blue sky
(3) Cloudy sky (Rain)
(4) Shade
(5) Sunlight
(6) White fluorescent light
(7) Incandescent light bulb
(8) Sunrise and sunset
(9) Candlelight
K=Kelvin Color Temperature
(1)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(4)
(3)
(2)
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
312
•
Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white balance
will vary depending on the lighting type.
Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [ ] to [ ].
•
The white balance is fixed to [AWB] while [Filter Settings] is being used.
•
It is possible to temporarily lock auto white balance:
([AWB Lock Setting]: 561)
•
You can change the operation of the [WB] button:
([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 572)
1
4
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
313
Registering the White Set
Take pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording
location to adjust the white balance until it appears white.
1 Press [WB] and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
2 Press 3.
3 Aim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at the center
of the screen and then press or .
•
This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.
Color Temperature Setting
Set the numeric value for the white balance color temperature.
1 Press [WB] and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
2 Press 3.
•
The color temperature setting screen is displayed.
3 Press 34 to select the color temperature and then press or .
•
You can set the White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) by rotating ,
or . ([More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)):
252)
•
You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
•
In [ ]/[S&Q] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] in the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu is set to [ON], the kelvin values are displayed on the
recording screen.
1
4
1
4
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
314
Adjusting the White Balance
You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is not
produced by the selected white balance.
1
Press [WB].
2
Select the white balance and then press 4.
≥The adjustment screen is displayed.
3
Adjust the coloring.
2: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)
3: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)
1: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)
4: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
•
You can also make adjustments in diagonal directions by using the joystick.
•
You can also touch the graph to make adjustments.
•
Press [DISP.] to return to the unadjusted state.
•
You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating , or .
([More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 252)
GGGGGG
MMMMMM
AAAAAABBBBBBB
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
315
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
•
When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon
changes to the adjusted color.
Adjusting toward the [G] side will display [+], while adjusting toward the [M] side
will display [−].
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
316
[Photo Style]
You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and
expression styles.
The image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style.
You can also apply the LUT file you have loaded in the camera and record
pictures and videos.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Photo Style]
[Standard]
The standard setting.
[Vivid]
A setting that produces a more vivid quality with higher saturation and contrast.
[Natural]
A setting that produces a softer quality with lower contrast.
[L.ClassicNeo]
A setting for a film-like effect that has a nostalgic, soft coloring.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
317
[Flat]
A setting that produces a flatter image quality with lower saturation and contrast.
[Landscape]
A setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
[Portrait]
A setting suited for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
[Monochrome]
A monochrome setting with no color shades.
[L.Monochrome]
A monochrome setting with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
[L.Monochrome D]
A monochrome setting that creates a dynamic impression with enhanced highlights
and shadows.
[L.Monochrome S]
A setting for a monochrome effect with a gentle touch suited to portraits.
[LEICA Monochrome]
A setting mode that realizes Leica monochrome mode, featuring deep contrasts
between black and white.
[Cinelike D2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma curve and gives priority
to the dynamic range.
•
This function is suitable for video editing processes.
[Cinelike V2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma curve that gives priority
to the contrast.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
318
[Like709]
A setting that minimizes overexposure by applying a gamma curve correction
equivalent to Rec.709 to perform compression (knee adjustment) of high-luminance
areas. (Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 376)
•
Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709”, a standard for
high-definition broadcasting.
[V-Log]
A gamma curve setting intended for post-production processing. (Log Recording:
437)
•
It allows you to add rich gradation to images during post-production editing.
[REAL TIME LUT]
A setting for recording images with a LUT file applied to the [V-Log] Photo Style.
•
You can apply the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]:
335)
•
[Vlog_709] is applied in the default setting.
•
[ ] is displayed on the recording screen when a LUT file has not been applied.
Selecting the LUT file to apply
1 Press 34 to select [LUT] and then press [ ].
2 Press 34 to select the LUT file to apply, then press or .
3 Press the shutter button or video rec. button to start recording.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
319
[Hybrid Log Gamma]
*1
A setting used to record HLG format video. (HLG Videos: 442)
[MY PHOTO STYLE 1]
*2
to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10]
*2
Adjusts the image quality of Photo Style items to your preferred settings and registers
these as My Photo Style items. (Registering Settings in My Photo Style: 328)
•
Effects up to [MY PHOTO STYLE 4] are displayed with the default settings.
Applying a LUT file
With image quality adjustments, you can apply a LUT file registered in [LUT Library].
([LUT Library]: 335)
•
With My Photo Style, you can also apply LUT files to [Photo Style] other than [V-Log].
When applying a LUT file created with image editing software, select the [Photo
Style] that is the same as the Photo Style used as the base when creating it.
When you select a different [Photo Style], the images may not be displayed or
recorded correctly.
•
[ ] switches to [ ] when [LUT] is applied in the [Photo Style] image quality
adjustments.
*1 Can only be selected when in the [ ] mode and set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality].
([Rec Quality]: 133)
*2 You can set the items to display in the menu with [Show/Hide Photo Style] in
[Photo Style Settings]. ([Photo Style Settings]: 558)
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
320
•
In [iA] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes.
– [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another
recording mode or it is turned off.
– Image quality cannot be adjusted.
•
The range of available ISO sensitivities is different when [Photo Style] is set to
the following (Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity): 304):
– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT]/[Hybrid Log Gamma]
•
You can set the knee mode with [Like709]. (Recording While Controlling
Overexposure (Knee): 376)
•
When [LUT] is set to [OFF] in the image quality adjustments of [REAL TIME
LUT], the [Photo Style] will operate the same as [V-Log].
•
When [Filter Settings] is being used, [Photo Style] is not available.
•
You can make detailed Photo Style settings:
([My Photo Style Settings]: 558)
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
321
Adjusting Image Quality
1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
•
Adjusted items are indicated with [¢].
3 Press or .
•
When the image quality is adjusted, the Photo Style icon on the recording
screen is indicated with [¢].
Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)
[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast in the image.
[Highlight]
Adjusts the brightness of bright areas.
[Shadow]
Adjusts the brightness of dark areas.
[Saturation]
Adjusts the vividness of colors.
[Color Tone]
Adjusts blue and yellow tints.
-
5
-
500
+5+5
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
6WDQGDUG
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
322
[Hue]
Assuming that the reference point is red, this rotates the hue toward violet/magenta or
yellow/green to adjust the coloring of the entire image.
[Filter Effect]
[Yellow]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak) Records the sky with a clear blue.
[Orange]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium) Records the sky with a darker
blue.
[Red]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong) Records the sky with a much darker
blue.
[Green]: Skin and lips of people appear in natural tones. Green leaves appear brighter
and more enhanced.
[Off]
[Grain Effect]
[Low]/[Standard]/[High]: Sets the grain effect level.
[Off]
[Color Noise]
[On]: Adds color to the grain effect.
[Off]
[Sharpness]
Adjusts the outlines in the image.
[Noise Reduction]
Adjusts the noise reduction effect.
•
Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in picture resolution.
S
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
323
[Sensitivity]
*3
Sets the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
[White Balance]
*3
Sets the white balance. (White Balance (WB): 308)
•
While [WB] is selected, press [ ] to display the white balance setting screen.
Press [ ] again to return to the original screen.
[LUT]
Applies the preset ([Vlog_709]) or the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library].
([LUT Library]: 335)
1 Select either [REAL TIME LUT] or one of [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10] in [Photo Style].
2 Press 34 to select [LUT] and then press [ ].
3 Press 34 to select the LUT file to apply, then press or .
*3 Available when the following is set while [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10] are selected:
[] [] [Photo Style Settings] [My Photo Style Settings] [Add
Effects] [Sensitivity]/[White Balance] [ON]
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
324
•
The items that you can adjust the image quality for depend on the Photo Style type.
*4 Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
*5 Can be set when [Photo Style] is My Photo Style.
([Saturation])
([Color Tone])
*4
*5
*5
*5
*5
*5
S
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
325
•
The effects of [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] cannot be checked on the
recording screen.
•
[LUT] cannot be applied to RAW images. When [Picture Quality] is set to [RAW]
for recording, a LUT file can be applied only to the live view and thumbnail
displays in the playback screen.
•
[Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] are not available when using the following
function:
– Video recording
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
326
Range Properties When Recording with a LUT File
Applied
The following table shows the range properties for videos recorded with
LUT files applied in Photo Style:
[Photo Style]
LUT file
applied
[Luminance Level] Range property
[REAL TIME LUT]/
when [V-Log] is
selected in My
Photo Style
[Vlog_709]
Fixed to [16-255]
([64-1023])
Video range
Other than
[Vlog_709]
Fixed to [0-255]
([0-1023])
Full range
When other than
[V-Log] is selected
in My Photo Style
[Vlog_709]
[0-255] ([0-1023]) Full range
[16-235] ([64-940])/
[16-255] ([64-1023])
Video range
Other than
[Vlog_709]
[0-255] ([0-1023]) Full range
[16-235] ([64-940])/
[16-255] ([64-1023])
Video range
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
327
•
When editing video with image editing software, we recommend using LUT files
for full range.
•
When recording video with a LUT file applied with My Photo Style, we
recommend setting [Luminance Level] to [0-255] ([0-1023]).
•
Use LUT files for full range when recording pictures.
If you record with a LUT file for video range applied, it may not be possible to
properly display or record the images.
•
If there is a difference between the range property of the applied LUT file and the
range property of the video file, it may not be possible to generate the images
properly in the image editing software.
When loading the video files into the image editing software, select the correct
range setting for each video file.
•
The results of recording images with LUT files applied with this camera and the
results of applying LUT files with image editing software will not match
completely.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
328
Registering Settings in My Photo Style
1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Adjust the image quality.
•
My Photo Style displays the types of Photo Style at the top of image quality
adjustment.
Select the base Photo Style.
3 Press [DISP.].
4 (When [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] is selected)
Press 34 to select [Save Current Setting] and then press or .
5 Press 34 to select the registration destination number and then press or
.
•
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
On the confirmation screen, press [DISP.] to change the My Photo Style name.
Up to 22 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2
characters.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
Changing the Registered Contents of My Photo Style
1 Select any value from [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10].
2 Press [DISP.] and then set the item.
[Load Preset Setting]
[Save Current Setting]
[Edit Title]
[Restore to Default]
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
329
[Filter Settings]
≥ [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]: 334
This mode records with additional image effects (filters).
You can adjust the effect for each filter.
In addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects.
1
Set the [Filter Effect].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Filter Settings] [Filter Effect]
[SET]
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
330
2
Select the filter.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press or .
≥You can also select the image effect (filter) by touching the sample
picture.
•
Press [DISP.] to switch the screen in the order of normal display and guide
display.
The guide display shows the description of each filter.
1/3
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
331
Adjusting the Filter Effect
You can adjust the filter effect.
1 Select the filter.
2 On the recording screen, press [WB].
3 Rotate , or to set.
•
To return to the recording screen, press [WB] again.
•
When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter icon on the recording screen is
indicated with [¢].
Filter Items that can be adjusted
[Expressive] Vividness
[Retro] Coloring
[Old Days] Contrast
[High Key] Coloring
[Low Key] Coloring
[Sepia] Contrast
[Cross Process] Coloring
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
332
Setting a Filter with Touch Operation
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item to set.
[ ]: Filter on/off
[ ]: Filter
[ ]: Filter effect adjustment
•
The default settings are for the Touch Tab to not be displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
([Touch Settings]: 570)
EXPSEXPSEXPS
EXPSEXPSEXPS
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
333
•
White balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be fixed to [ ] (Forced
Flash Off).
•
The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [3200].
•
Depending on the filter, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
•
[Filter Effect] is not available when using the following function:
– High Resolution mode
– [Live View Composite]
•
When displaying the [Filter Effect] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing
[DISP.] displays the filter selection screen.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
334
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
You can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects.
[ ]/[ ] [] [Filter Settings] Select
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following
functions:
– Burst recording
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Bracketing]
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
335
[LUT Library]
Register LUT files to the camera to use with Photo Style and LUT View
Assist.
•
The following LUT file can be used:
– The “.vlt” format, which meets the requirements specified in the “VARICAM
3DLUT REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”
– The “.cube” format
•
The “.cube” format LUT files are compatible with 2-point to 33-point 3D LUT.
•
We recommend loading LUT files for full range onto the camera. If the range
property is different, the images may not be displayed or recorded correctly.
•
The number of characters that can be used in a file name differs depending on
the file system of the card.
(Use alphanumeric characters for the file name)
FAT32 (SD memory card/SDHC memory card): Up to 8 characters (excluding
extension).
exFAT (SDXC memory card): Up to 255 characters (including extension).
•
Save the LUT file with a file extension of “.vlt” or “.cube” in the root directory of
the card (the folder opened when the card is opened on a PC).
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
336
1
Insert a card on which a LUT file is saved into the
camera.
2
Select [LUT Library].
≥ [] [] [LUT Library]
3
Select the registration destination.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press or .
≥If you select a registered item, the LUT file will be registered by
overwriting.
4
Select [Load].
≥Press or .
≥The registered LUT file is deleted when you select [Delete].
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
337
5
Select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2].
≥Press or .
6
Select the LUT file to load.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press or .
•
[Vlog_709] is registered in the default setting.
•
Up to 10 LUT files can be registered.
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
338
Lens Compensation
≥ [Vignetting Comp.]: 338
≥ [Diffraction Compensation]: 339
[Vignetting Comp.]
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics,
you can record pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery
corrected.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Vignetting Comp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording
conditions.
•
Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
339
[Diffraction Compensation]
The camera raises the image resolution by correcting the blurriness
caused by diffraction when the aperture is closed.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Diffraction Compensation]
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
•
Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording
conditions.
•
Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
340
Flash
If you attach the Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) to the hot shoe, you can record using the flash.
Furthermore, by attaching an external flash that supports wireless flash
recording, you can wirelessly control an external flash that is in a position
separate from the camera.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the Flash.
≥ Using an External Flash (Optional): 341
≥ Setting Flash: 344
≥ Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 353
Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional)
341
Using an External Flash (Optional)
≥ Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 342
•
Remove the lens hood to prevent vignetting.
•
Flash recording is not possible when the following functions are being used:
– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]
– High Resolution mode
– [Filter Settings]
– SH burst recording
Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional)
342
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover
Before attaching the Flash (optional), remove the hot shoe cover.
Refer to the operating instructions for the Flash for details about how to
attach it.
Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction
indicated by arrow.
Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional)
343
Notes on Flash Recording
•
Do not bring any object near the flash. Heat or light may cause the object to
deform or discolor.
•
If you record repeatedly, time may be needed to charge the flash.
While the flash is charging, images will be recorded without the flash firing.
•
When an external flash is attached, do not carry the camera by holding only the
external flash. It may become detached.
•
When using a commercially available external flash, do not use one with
reversed polarity or function for communicating with a camera.
It may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.
•
Refer to the operating instructions for the external flash for details.
Flash – Setting Flash
345
[Flash Mode]
Sets the flash mode.
[] [] Select [Flash Mode]
[ ] (Forced Flash On)/[ ] (Forced On/Red-Eye)
The flash fires every time regardless of the recording conditions.
This is suitable for recording when there is backlighting or under lighting such as
fluorescent lighting.
[ ] (Slow Sync.)/[ ] (Slow Sync./Red-Eye)
When recording images against a nightscape, this will slow the shutter speed when
the flash fires to make not only the subject but also the nightscape appear brighter.
•
Slower shutter speeds may result in blurry images. To avoid this, we recommend
using a tripod.
[ ] (Forced Flash Off)
The flash does not fire.
Flash – Setting Flash
346
•
The flash fires twice.
The interval between the first and second firings is longer when [ ] or [ ]
is set. The subject should not move until the second firing has finished.
•
[ ] and [ ] cannot be used when the following are set:
– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]
– [Flash Synchro]: [2ND]
– [Wireless]: [ON]
•
Some flash modes may not be available depending on the settings on the
external flash.
•
The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies from person to person.
The effect, which is influenced by factors such as distance to the subject and
whether the subject is looking at the camera when the preliminary flash is fired,
may not be very noticeable in some cases.
Flash – Setting Flash
347
Available Flash Settings by Recording Mode
The available flash settings depend on the recording mode.
(: Available, —: Not available)
Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes
[ ]/[ ]: 1/60 of a second
*
to 1/250 of a second
[ ]/[ ]: 1 second to 1/250 of a second
* In [S] mode, this will be 60 seconds and in [M] mode it will be [B] (Bulb).
Recording
mode
[] [] [] [] []
[P]/[A]
[S]/[M] ——
•
[ ] and [ ] can be set in [iA] mode. In [ ], the flash mode switches to one
suited to the recording situation.
Flash – Setting Flash
348
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]
You can select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.
1
Set the [Firing Mode].
≥ [] [] [Firing Mode]
[TTL]
Sets flash output to be set automatically by the camera.
[MANUAL]
Sets the flash output manually.
•
With [TTL], you can record the images you want even when recording dark
scenes where the flash output tends to become greater.
•
The flash output ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on the flash icon of the recording
screen.
•
The settings made here are enabled when some flashes from other
manufacturers are attached.
Set on the flash when a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) is attached.
Flash – Setting Flash
349
2
(When set to [MANUAL]) Select [Manual Flash Adjust.]
and then press or .
3
Press 21 to set the flash output and then press or
.
•
It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
Flash – Setting Flash
350
[Flash Adjust.]
You can adjust the flash output when taking pictures with the flash in TTL
output mode.
1
Select [Flash Adjust.].
≥ [] [] [Flash Adjust.]
2
Press 21 to adjust the flash output and then press
or .
•
It can be adjusted within the range of [−3 EV] to [+3 EV] in 1/3 EV steps.
•
[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
•
For information about adjusting the flash output when recording using a wireless
flash ([Flash Adjust.]: 357)
•
[Flash Adjust.] cannot be used when the following are set:
– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]
– [Wireless]: [ON]
Flash – Setting Flash
351
[Flash Synchro]
When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash,
a trail of light may appear in front of the subject.
If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with a
trail of light appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately
before the shutter closes.
[] [] Select [Flash Synchro]
[1ST]
This is the normal method for recording with the Flash.
[2ND]
The light source appears behind the subject and the picture becomes dynamic.
•
When [2ND] is set, [2nd] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording screen.
•
When the following functions are being used, the setting is fixed to [1ST]:
– [Wireless]
– [Live View Composite]
•
The effect may not be adequately achieved at faster shutter speeds.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
353
Recording Using a Wireless Flash
You can use a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) to record using a wireless flash.
You can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash
attached to the hot shoe of the camera.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
354
Placing a Wireless Flash
Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.
Placement example
When (C) is placed to erase the shadow in the background of the subject that the flash
groups (A) and (B) will create
Placement range
When DMW-FL360L is attached
(D) 5 m (16 feet)
(E) 7 m (23 feet)
(A)
(B)
(C)
50°50°
50°50°
30°30°
30°30°
(D)
(D)
(E)
(E)
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
355
1
Attach an external flash to the camera. (Removing the
Hot Shoe Cover: 342)
2
Set the wireless flashes to [RC] mode and then place
them.
•
Set the channel and group for the wireless flashes.
•
The placement range serves as a guide for when recording with the camera held
horizontally. The range differs depending on the surrounding environment.
•
We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group.
•
If the subject is too close, communication light may affect the exposure.
You can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lowering
the output with a diffuser or similar device. ([Communication Light]: 359)
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
356
3
Enable the wireless flash function of the camera.
≥ [] [] [Wireless] [ON]
4
Set [Wireless Channel].
•
Select the same channel as on the wireless flash side.
5
Set [Wireless Setup].
•
Set the firing mode and flash output.
•
When [Wireless] is set, [WL] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording
screen.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
357
Setting Items ([Wireless Setup])
•
To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].
[External
Flash]
*1
[Firing Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the
flash output.
[AUTO]
*2
: Sets the flash output on the
external flash side.
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the
external flash manually.
[OFF]: The external flash outputs only
communication light.
[Flash Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output of the external flash
manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual Flash
Adjust.]
Sets the flash output of the external flash
when [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
•
It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full
flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
358
*1 This cannot be selected when [Wireless FP] is set.
*2 This cannot be set when using the Flash (DMW-FL200L: optional).
[A Group]/
[B Group]/
[C Group]
[Firing Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the
flash output.
[AUTO]
*1
: Sets the flash output on the
wireless flash side.
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the
wireless flash manually.
[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified
group will not fire.
[Flash Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash
manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual Flash
Adjust.]
Sets the flash output of the wireless flash
when [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
•
It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full
flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
359
[Wireless FP]
The external flash performs FP firing (repeated high-speed firing of the
flash) during wireless recording, enabling recording using the Flash even
at fast shutter speeds.
[] [] Select [Wireless FP]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Communication Light]
Set the strength of communication light.
[] [] Select [Communication Light]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
360
Video Settings
This chapter describes recording modes especially for videos, such as the
Creative Video mode and the Slow & Quick mode, and settings available
when recording videos.
≥ Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q): 361
≥ Using AF (Video): 369
≥ Video Brightness and Coloring: 374
≥ Audio Settings: 379
≥ External Microphones (Optional): 389
≥ XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 394
≥ Headphones: 397
≥ Time Code: 401
≥ Main Assist Functions: 405
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
361
Recording Modes Specifically for Video
(Creative Video/S&Q)
≥ Displays Suited to Video Recording: 362
≥ Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 363
≥ Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 367
[ ] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode)
are recording modes specifically for video.
In the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick
motion video by changing the frame rate.
In the recording modes specifically for video, you can start and stop video
recording with the shutter button.
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
Settings such as exposure and white balance can be changed
independent of picture taking settings.
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
362
Displays Suited to Video Recording
In the recording screen, the following parts switch to displays suited to
video recording.
(1) Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 131)
(2) Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 133)/Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick
Video: 422)
(3) Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
(4) Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 771)
•
Examples of displays at the time of purchase.
For information about the icons other than those described here (Monitor/
Viewfinder Displays: 713)
•
Even in the [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, as with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode, you can
switch to the display suited to video recording:
([Video-Priority Display]: 590)
24m59s
100
F
2.860
±
0
AFSAFS
FULLFULLMP4MP4 4K4K 420/8-L420/8-L
29.97
p
29.97
p
(4)
(1) (3)
(2)
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
363
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Set the exposure mode.
≥ [] [] [Exposure Mode] [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
•
You can perform the same exposure operations as the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button (A) or video rec. button (B).
5
Stop recording.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button again.
(A)
(B)
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
364
•
For information about recording slow motion video and quick motion video
(Slow & Quick Video: 422)
•
You can disable the recording start/stop operations using the shutter button:
([Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 568)
•
You can assign the function that starts/ends video recording only in the [ ]
mode to an Fn button:
([Video Record(Creative Video)]: 536)
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
365
Operations During Video Recording
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
1 Touch [ ] or [ ].
2 Touch an icon.
Zoom
Aperture value
Shutter speed
Exposure compensation
ISO sensitivity/Gain (dB)
Sound recording level adjustment
([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 383)
•
This setting is available only in [ ] mode.
Slow & Quick setting
(Slow & Quick Video: 422)
•
This setting is available only in [S&Q] mode. (The setting cannot be changed
during recording)
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
([Touch Settings]: 570)
F
SS
ISO
GAIN
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
366
3 Drag the slide bar to set the item.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.
•
If you touch icon (C), the screen of Step 2 is redisplayed.
(C)
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
367
Separating Settings for Recording Video and
Pictures
In default settings, settings such as exposure and white balance changed
in [ ]/[S&Q] mode are also reflected in picture recording in [P]/[A]/[S]/
[M] modes.
From the [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] menu, you can separate settings
for video recording and for picture recording.
[] [] Select [CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.]/[White Balance]/[Photo Style]/[Metering Mode]/[AF
Mode]
[ ]: The recording settings are linked across recording modes.
[ ]: Recording settings can be separated by the [ ]/[S&Q] mode and the [P]/[A]/
[S]/[M] mode.
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
368
•
The [iA] mode uses the optimum recording settings for the camera automatically,
so the recording settings will be independent, irrespective of the settings made
with this function.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
369
Using AF (Video)
≥ [Continuous AF]: 369
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 371
≥ [Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 372
[Continuous AF]
You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.
[] [] Select [Continuous AF]
[MODE1]
The camera continues to automatically focus only during recording.
[MODE2]
The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording standby and
during recording.
•
This is available in [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
[OFF]
The camera maintains the focus point at the start of recording.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
370
•
In the [iA] mode, the camera automatically keeps focusing during recording
standby, irrespective of the [Continuous AF] setting.
•
Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound
may be recorded during video recording.
If the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with [Continuous
AF] set to [OFF].
•
If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while to
come into focus.
•
[MODE1] switches to [MODE2] when outputting via HDMI in the [ ]/[S&Q]
mode.
•
When set to [MODE2], the battery drains faster.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
371
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using
[Continuous AF].
[] [] Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)]
•
A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.].
[ON] Enables the following settings.
[OFF] Disables the following settings.
[SET]
[AF Speed]
[+] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.
[−] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.
[AF Sensitivity]
[+] side: When the distance to the subject
changes significantly, the camera
immediately readjusts the focus.
[−] side: When the distance to the subject
changes significantly, the camera waits for a
little before readjusting the focus.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
372
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]
When the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ], or when recording with MF, the
focus point can be enlarged for display.
(When the AF mode is [ ] or [ ], the center of the screen is enlarged
for display.)
The focus point can also be enlarged for checking when recording videos.
1
Register [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] to the Fn button.
(Fn Buttons: 527)
2
Enlarge display of the focus point.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
•
The operations on the enlarged display screen are the same as the MF Assist
screen operations. (Operations on the MF Assist Screen: 199)
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
373
•
Depending on the lens used, the video enlarged display of live view screen may
not be displayed.
•
During video recording using the following functions, the video enlarged display
of live view screen cannot be displayed:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
•
You can change the display method of the enlarged display screen:
([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 569)
•
You can set whether to output the enlarged display to an external device
connected via HDMI:
(Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: 471)
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
374
Video Brightness and Coloring
≥ [Luminance Level]: 374
≥ [Master Pedestal Level]: 375
≥ Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 376
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 378
[Luminance Level]
You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.
You can set to [16-235] or [16-255], the standard for video, or to [0-255],
which covers the entire range of luminance, the same as pictures.
[] [] Select [Luminance Level]
Settings: [0-255]/[16-235]/[16-255]
•
When set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality], the setting items change to [0-1023], [64-940],
and [64-1023].
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT], this is fixed to [0-255]
([0-1023]).
However, even if [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT] or Photo Style is set to
[V-Log] in My Photo Style, if the [Vlog_709] LUT file has been applied, this is
fixed to [16-255] ([64-1023]).
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [Hybrid Log Gamma], this is fixed to [64-940].
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
375
[Master Pedestal Level]
You can adjust the black level, which serves as the reference for images.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Select [Master Pedestal Level].
≥ [] [] [Master Pedestal Level]
3
Adjust master pedestal.
≥Rotate , or .
•
Set in the range between −15 and +15.
•
[Master Pedestal Level] is not available when using the following function:
– [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style])
101055
-
15
-
15
-
5
-
5
-
10
-
10 00
1515
MPL
MPLMPLMPL
MPLMPLMPLMPLMPLMPLMPL
+4
+4
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
376
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709], you can adjust the knee so that
recording can be performed with minimal overexposure.
1
Set [Photo Style] to [Like709].
≥ [] [] [Photo Style] [Like709]
2
Press [Q].
3
Select a knee setting.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item.
$872
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
377
[AUTO]
Adjusts the compression levels of high-luminance areas automatically.
[MANUAL]
You can set the luminance where compression starts (knee master point) and
the intensity of compression (knee master slope).
Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
[POINT]: Master knee point
[SLOPE]: Master knee slope
•
Rotate to adjust the knee master point, and to adjust the knee
master slope.
•
Values within the following ranges can be set:
– Master knee point: 80.0 to 107.0
– Master knee slope: 0 to 99
[Off]
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press or .
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
378
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Set [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
≥ [] [] [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Setting Items ([ISO Sensitivity (video)])
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]
Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
•
Sensor output 60 fps or lower: Set in the range between [100] and [6400].
•
Sensor output 61 fps or higher: Set in the range between [100] and [1600].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
•
Sensor output 60 fps or lower: Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and
[12800].
•
Sensor output 61 fps or higher: Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and
[3200].
Video Settings – Audio Settings
380
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
The sound recording level is displayed on the recording screen.
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[ON] Sound recording level displayed on the recording screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
Sets the display size of sound recording level.
[Displaying
Size]
[LARGE]/[SMALL]
•
When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is fixed
to [ON].
Video Settings – Audio Settings
381
[Mute Sound Input]
This mutes audio input.
[] [] Select [Mute Sound Input]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
Video Settings – Audio Settings
382
[Sound Rec Gain Level]
This switches the gain of audio input.
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Gain Level]
[STANDARD]
This is the standard input gain setting. (0 dB)
[LOW]
Audio input is reduced for recording in environments with loud noises. (−12 dB)
•
When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], the sound recording gain of CH3/CH4 can be
adjusted. ([4ch Mic Input]: 396)
•
[Sound Rec Gain Level] is not available when [Mic Socket] is set to [ ] and
an external audio device is connected.
Video Settings – Audio Settings
383
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
Manually adjust the sound recording level.
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Level Adj.]
•
Press 21 to adjust the sound recording level and then press or .
Settings: [MUTE]/[−18dB] to [+12dB]
•
You can adjust by 1 dB increments.
•
This can also be set during video recording.
•
Displayed dB values are approximate.
•
When set to [MUTE], [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
•
When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], the sound recording level of CH3/CH4 can
be adjusted. ([4ch Mic Input]: 396)
Video Settings – Audio Settings
384
[Sound Rec Quality]
Sound quality for video can be set when the [Rec. File Format] is [MOV] or
[Apple ProRes].
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Quality]
[96kHz/24bit]
Audio is recorded using 96kHz/24bit high resolution audio.
•
This can be set when an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), Stereo
Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), or Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10:
optional) is connected. (XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 394, External
Microphones (Optional): 389)
[48kHz/24bit]
Audio is recorded using 48kHz/24bit high quality audio.
•
The setting is fixed to [48kHz/16bit] in the following case:
– When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MP4]
Video Settings – Audio Settings
385
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
The sound recording level is adjusted automatically to minimize sound
distortion (crackling noise).
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Level Limiter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Video Settings – Audio Settings
386
[Wind Noise Canceller]
This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while
maintaining sound quality.
[] [] Select [Wind Noise Canceller]
[HIGH]
This effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the low-pitched sound when a
strong wind is detected.
[STANDARD]
This reduces wind noise without loss of sound quality by filtering out only wind noise.
[OFF]
Turns the function off.
•
You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
•
This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.
(Reduction of Wind Noise: 393)
Video Settings – Audio Settings
387
[Lens Noise Cut]
When using a lens compatible with power zoom, this reduces the sounds
made by the zoom when it operates during video recording.
[] [] Select [Lens Noise Cut]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during normal
operation.
Video Settings – Audio Settings
388
[Audio Information]
This screen enables you to view audio settings and the status of recording
all at once.
You can also touch the screen to change the settings.
•
The operations on the audio information display screen are the same as the control
panel operations. (Control Panel: 91)
1
Register [Audio Information] to the Fn button. (Fn
Buttons: 527)
2
Display the audio information.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
•
You can also display it by touching the audio display area on the control panel
(Creative Video mode/Slow & Quick mode).
•
For information about the screen (Audio Information Display: 727)
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
389
External Microphones (Optional)
≥ Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional): 392
≥ Reduction of Wind Noise: 393
With a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or Stereo
Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional), you can record higher-quality high
resolution audio compared to the built-in microphone.
•
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
1
Set the [Mic Socket] that suits the device to be
connected.
≥ [] [] [Mic Socket]
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
390
([Mic Input (Plug-in Power)])
When connecting an external microphone that requires a power supply from the
camera [MIC] socket.
([Mic Input])
When connecting an external microphone that does not require a power supply
from the camera [MIC] socket.
([Line Input])
When connecting an external audio device for line output.
•
The setting will be fixed to [ ] when a Stereo Shotgun Microphone
(DMW-MS2: optional) is connected.
•
When using [ ], if you connect an external microphone that does not
require power supply, the connected external microphone may malfunction.
Check the device before connecting.
2
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
391
3
Connect the external microphone to the camera and
then turn on the camera.
•
If mounting the external microphone on the camera hot shoe (A), remove the
hot shoe cover. (Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 342)
4
Make settings for the sound quality of the audio to be
recorded in [Sound Rec Quality] (
[Sound Rec Quality]:
384).
•
Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or
more.
•
While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
•
When an external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
•
When the external microphone is attached, do not carry the camera by holding
the external microphone. It may become detached.
•
If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
•
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the external microphone.
(A)
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
392
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2:
Optional)
When using the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you
can set the microphone sound pickup range.
[] [] Select [Special Mic.]
[STEREO]
Picks up sound over a wide area.
[SHOTGUN]
Helps prevent picking up background noise, and records sound from a specific
direction.
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
393
Reduction of Wind Noise
This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.
[] [] Select [Wind Cut]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
•
Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
Video Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
394
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
≥ [4ch Mic Input]: 396
By attaching an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), you can
use a commercially available XLR microphone to enable the recording of
superior-quality high-res audio and 4-channel audio. ([4ch Mic Input]:
396)
(A) Hot shoe
(B) Commercially available XLR microphone
Getting started:
•
Turn off the camera, and remove the hot shoe cover. (Removing the Hot Shoe
Cover: 342)
(B)
(A)
Video Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
395
1
Attach the XLR Microphone Adaptor to the hot shoe,
and then turn on the camera.
≥ [] [] [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
•
When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
automatically turns [ON].
[ON]
Records audio using the XLR microphone.
[OFF]
Records audio using the built-in microphone of the camera.
2
Make settings for the sound quality of the audio to be
recorded in [Sound Rec Quality] (
[Sound Rec Quality]:
384).
•
While an XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
•
When [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to [ON] and [4ch Mic Input] is [OFF], the
following settings are fixed:
– [Sound Rec Level Limiter]: [OFF]
– [Wind Noise Canceller]: [OFF]
– [Sound Output]: [REC SOUND]
•
When [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to [ON] and [4ch Mic Input] is [OFF],
[Sound Rec Gain Level] and [Sound Rec Level Adj.] are not available.
•
When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
•
When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, do not carry the camera by
holding the XLR Microphone Adaptor. It may become detached.
•
If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
•
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the XLR Microphone Adaptor.
Video Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
396
[4ch Mic Input]
To record 4-channel audio, use a commercially available XLR microphone
connected to an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) together
with the built-in microphone.
By combining a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or a
Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) instead of using the built-in
microphone, it is also possible to record 4-channel 96 kHz/24-bit
high-resolution audio. (External Microphones (Optional): 389)
[] [] Select [4ch Mic Input]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], it is displayed as [4ch] on the screen.
•
The audio from the XLR microphone is recorded to CH1/CH2, and the audio from
the built-in microphone or external microphone is recorded to CH3/CH4.
•
4-channel audio is output to external devices connected via HDMI when [4ch Mic
Input] is set to [ON].
•
This cannot be set when [Rec. File Format] is [MP4].
•
This cannot be set when [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is [OFF].
Video Settings – Headphones
397
Headphones
≥ [Sound Monitoring Channel]: 399
You can record videos while monitoring their sound by connecting
commercially available headphones to the camera.
•
Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
•
When headphones are connected, beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter
sounds are muted.
Video Settings – Headphones
398
Switching the Sound Output Method
[] [] Select [Sound Output]
[REALTIME]
Audio without time lag.
It may differ from the sound recorded in videos.
[REC SOUND]
Audio to be recorded in videos.
Output sound may be delayed from actual sound.
Adjusting the Headphone Volume
Connect the headphones and rotate .
: Reduces the volume.
: Increases the volume.
To adjust the volume using the menu:
1 Select [Headphone Volume].
•
[] [] [Headphone Volume]
2 Press 34 to adjust the headphone volume and then press or .
•
It can be adjusted in a range of [0] to [LEVEL15].
•
The setting is fixed to [REC SOUND] in the following case:
– When using an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional)
(When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF])
Video Settings – Headphones
399
[Sound Monitoring Channel]
You can set the audio channel output to the headphones when recording.
For information about the audio channel settings during playback
([Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]: 608)
[] [] Select [Sound Monitoring Channel]
[CH1/CH2]
Outputs CH1 (L)/CH2 (R).
[CH3/CH4]
Outputs CH3 (L)/CH4 (R).
[CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4]
Outputs CH1+CH2 (L)/CH3+CH4 (R).
[CH1]
Outputs CH1.
[CH2]
Outputs CH2.
[CH3]
Outputs CH3.
[CH4]
Outputs CH4.
[CH1+CH2]
Outputs a mix of CH1 and CH2.
[CH3+CH4]
Outputs a mix of CH3 and CH4.
[CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4]
Outputs a mix of CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4.
Video Settings – Headphones
400
•
This can also be set during video recording.
Video Settings – Time Code
402
Setting the Time Code
Sets the recording, display, and output of the time code.
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes].
≥ [] [] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]/[Apple
ProRes]
2
Select [Time Code].
≥ [] [] [Time Code]
[Time Code Display]
Displays the time code on the recording screen/playback screen.
•
During video recording using the following function, the time code count
cannot be displayed on the recording screen:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate
of 60.00p
•
While you are using the following functions, the time code count cannot be
displayed on the recording screen:
– HDMI output
– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone
– Tethered recording
[Count Up]
[REC RUN]: Counts the time code only when recording videos.
[FREE RUN]: Counts the time code also when video recording is stopped and
when the camera is turned off.
•
When the following function is being used, [Count Up] is fixed to [REC RUN]:
– [S&Q] mode
Video Settings – Time Code
403
[Time Code Value]
[Reset]: Sets to 00:00:00:00 (hour: minute: second: frame)
[Manual Input]: Manually input hour, minute, second and frame.
[Current Time]: Sets hour, minute and second to current time and sets frame to
00.
[Time Code Mode]
[DF]: Drop Frame. The camera modifies the difference between recorded time
and time code.
•
Seconds and frames are separated by “.”. (Example: 00:00:00.00)
[NDF]: Non-Drop Frame. Records the time code without drop frame.
•
Seconds and frames are separated by “:”. (Example: 00:00:00:00)
•
When the following functions are being used, [Time Code Mode] is fixed to
[NDF]:
– [50.00Hz (PAL)]/[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] ([Synchro Scan])
– 47.95p or 23.98p [Rec Quality]
[HDMI Time Code Output]
Time code information is added to images output via HDMI when recording with
the [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
•
The time code can also be output via HDMI by setting the mode dial to
[ ]/[S&Q] during playback. In the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, set [Output
Resolution(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] to [AUTO]. ([Output
Resolution(Playback)]: 610)
•
The device screen may go dark depending on the connected device.
Video Settings – Time Code
404
•
When using the following functions, updating of the information display on the
screen may get slower due to the load being placed on the internal processing in
the camera, but this is not a malfunction and there will be no change to the
images recorded:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
– HDMI output
– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone
– Tethered recording
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
405
Main Assist Functions
≥ [Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 406
≥ [SS/Gain Operation]: 407
≥ [WFM/Vector Scope]: 409
≥ [Luminance Spot Meter]: 413
≥ [Zebra Pattern]: 415
≥ [Frame Marker]: 417
≥ Color Bars/Test Tone: 419
•
The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu has display assist functions
such as the center marker and safety zone marker:
([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 587)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
406
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the video.
[] [] Select [Flicker Decrease (Video)]
[1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]
[OFF]
•
This can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is [ON]. ([Auto Exposure in
P/A/S/M]: 562)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
407
[SS/Gain Operation]
You can switch the units of shutter speed values and gain (sensitivity)
values.
[] [] Select [SS/Gain Operation]
[SEC/ISO]
Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in ISO.
[ANGLE/ISO]
Displays the shutter speed in degrees and the gain in ISO.
•
The angle can be set in a range between 11° and 357°.
(when [Synchro Scan] is set to [OFF])
[SEC/dB]
Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in dB.
•
The setting items for gain are as follows:
– Normal: [AUTO], [0dB] to [42dB]
– When [Extended Gain Setting] is set: [−6dB] to [42dB]
•
0 dB corresponds to either of the following ISO sensitivity values.
– Normal: 100
– When [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] is set in [Photo Style]: 500 (sensor output 60 fps
or lower)/250 (sensor output 61 fps or higher)
– When [Hybrid Log Gamma] is set in [Photo Style]: 250
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
408
•
When [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], menu names change as shown
below:
– [ISO Sensitivity (video)] [Gain Setting]
– [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [Auto Gain Lower Limit Setting]
– [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [Auto Gain Upper Limit Setting]
– [Extended ISO] [Extended Gain Setting]
– [ISO Displayed Setting] [Gain Displayed Setting]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
409
[WFM/Vector Scope]
This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording
screen. You can change the size of the waveform display.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Set [WFM/Vector Scope].
≥ [] [] [WFM/Vector Scope]
[WAVE]
Displays a waveform.
[VECTOR]
Displays the vector scope.
[OFF]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
410
3
Select the position to display.
≥Press 3421 to select and then press or .
•
Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.
•
You can also move using touch operations.
•
You can rotate to change the size of the waveform.
•
To return the waveform or vector scope position back to the center, press
[DISP.]. With waveform, pressing [DISP.] once again returns the size to the
default setting.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
411
Screen Displays
Waveform
•
The waveform displayed on the camera indicates the luminance as values based on
the conversions below:
0% (IRE
*
): Luminance value 16 (8 bit)
100 % (IRE
*
): Luminance value 235 (8 bit)
* IRE: Institute of Radio Engineers
(A) 109 % (IRE) (Dotted line)
(B) 100 % (IRE)
(C) 50 % (IRE)
(D) 0 % (IRE)
(E) −4 % (IRE) (Dotted line)
(F) The range between 0 % and 100 % shows dotted lines at intervals of 10 %.
Display example)
(A)
(F)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
412
Vector scope
(G) R (Red)
(H) YL (Yellow)
(I) G (Green)
(J) MG (Magenta)
(K) B (Blue)
(L) CY (Cyan)
Display example)
•
When you assign the function to an Fn button, you can switch between
displaying and hiding these during recording of video. (Fn Buttons: 527)
•
You can also change the position by dragging on the recording screen.
•
The waveform and vector scope are not output through HDMI.
(J)
(K)
(L)
(G)
(H)
(I)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
413
[Luminance Spot Meter]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small
area.
1
Set [Luminance Spot Meter].
≥ [] [] [Luminance Spot Meter] [ON]
2
Select the position where you want to measure the
luminance.
≥Press 3421 to select and then press or .
•
Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.
•
You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording
screen.
•
To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
(M) Luminance value
65%
65%
65%
(M)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
414
Measurement Range
Measuring is possible in the range −7 % to 109 % (IRE).
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log] or when a LUT file has not been applied in
[REAL TIME LUT], this is measured with “Stop” units.
(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
415
[Zebra Pattern]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.
You can also set the base value and the breadth of the range so that the
stripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of brightness you
specify.
[ZEBRA1]
[ZEBRA2]
[ZEBRA1+2]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
416
[] [] Select [Zebra Pattern]
When [BASE/RANGE] Was Selected with [SET]
Centered on the brightness set with [Base Level], parts with the brightness
in the range set in [Range] are displayed with the stripes.
≥ [Base Level] can be set in the range between 0 % and 109 % (IRE).
≥ [Range] can be set in the range between ±1 % and ±10 % (IRE).
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log] or when a LUT file has not been applied in
[REAL TIME LUT], this is measured with “Stop” units.
(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))
[ZEBRA1]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with
[ZEBRA1] stripes.
[ZEBRA2]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with
[ZEBRA2] stripes.
[ZEBRA1+2] Both [ZEBRA1] and [ZEBRA2] are displayed.
[OFF] —
[SET]
Sets the base brightness.
[Zebra 1] [50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]
[Zebra 2] [50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]
•
[ZEBRA1+2] cannot be selected while you are setting [BASE/RANGE].
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
417
[Frame Marker]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen. This
allows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be achieved
with trimming (cropping) in post-processing.
[] [] Select [Frame Marker]
[ON] Displays the Video Frame Marker on the recording screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Frame Aspect]
Sets the aspect ratio of the Video Frame
Marker.
[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/
[4:3]/[5:4]/[1:1]/[4:5]/[9:16]/[CUSTOM]
[Frame Color] Sets the color of the Video Frame Marker.
[Frame Mask]
Sets the opacity of the outside of the Video
Frame Marker.
[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
418
When [CUSTOM] Is Selected with [Frame Aspect] in [SET]
You can freely set the aspect ratio of the frame.
≥ Press
3421
to move the center position.
•
Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.
•
You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording screen.
≥ Set the height of the frame with [ ], and the width with [ ].
•
You can also pinch out/pinch in the frame to change the size.
(N) Center coordinates (0 being the center of the screen)
(O) Height and width of the frame
•
The aspect ratio can be set in the range between 1 % to 100 %.
•
The first press of [DISP.] returns the frame position to the center.
The second press returns the frame size to the default.
X,Y=(±0,±0)
13%
13%
(N) (O)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
419
Color Bars/Test Tone
The color bars are displayed on the recording screen.
A test tone is output while the color bars are being displayed.
[] [] Select [Color Bars]
Settings: [SMPTE]/[EBU]/[ARIB]
•
To end the display, press .
[SMPTE]
[EBU]
[ARIB]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
420
Adjusting the Test Tone
There are 4 levels ([−12dB], [−18dB], [−20dB], and [MUTE]) of test tone to
select.
Rotate , or to select the test tone level.
•
The color bars and test tone will be recorded on the video if video recording is
started while the color bars are being displayed.
•
The brightness and coloring that appear on the camera’s monitor or viewfinder
may differ from those that appear on another device such as an external monitor.
421
Special Video Recording
This chapter describes advanced video recording applications such as
slow motion/quick motion video and Log recording.
≥ Slow & Quick Video: 422
≥ High Frame Rate Video: 429
≥ [Focus Transition]: 432
≥ Log Recording: 437
≥ HLG Videos: 442
≥ Anamorphic Recording: 446
≥ [Synchro Scan]: 450
≥ [Segmented File Recording]: 452
≥ List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded:
453
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
422
Slow & Quick Video
In the [S&Q] mode, the camera records at a different frame rate to the
recording frame rate, enabling the creation of slow motion video and quick
motion video in the MOV format.
Slow Motion Video (Overcrank Recording)
Set a number of frames that is higher than the recording frame rate of the [Rec
Quality].
For example: When recording at 60 fps when set to a 29.97p [Rec Quality], the speed
is halved.
Quick Motion Video (Undercrank Recording)
Set a number of frames that is lower than the recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality].
For example: When recording at 15 fps when set to a 29.97p [Rec Quality], the speed
is doubled.
•
Slow & Quick video with a recording quality with the ALL-Intra image
compression system cannot be recorded to SD cards. You will need a
commercially available external SSD for recording. (Using an External SSD
(Commercially Available): 472)
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
423
1
Set the recording mode to [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
•
[Rec. File Format] changes to [MOV].
2
Select a recording quality with which you can record
Slow & Quick video.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
Items available for recording with Slow & Quick video are indicated as [S&Q
available].
•
Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video ( List of
Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 453)
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
424
3
Set the frame rate.
≥ [] [] [Slow & Quick Setting]
≥Rotate , or to select a numeric value, then press
or .
•
You can set a frame rate in the following ranges:
– C4K/4K video: 1 fps to 120 fps (When the image compression system is
ALL-Intra: 1 fps to 60 fps)
– FHD video: 1 fps to 300 fps (When the image compression system is
ALL-Intra: 1 fps to 240 fps)
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
425
Frame Rate Combinations and Playback Speeds
Frame
rate
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
C4K/59.94p
4K/59.94p
C4K/29.97p
4K/29.97p
C4K/23.98p
4K/23.98p
FHD/59.94p FHD/29.97p FHD/23.98p
1fps
60× Quick 30× Quick 24× Quick 60× Quick 30× Quick 24× Quick
2fps
30× Quick 15× Quick 12× Quick 30× Quick 15× Quick 12× Quick
5fps
12× Quick 6× Quick 4.8× Quick 12× Quick 6× Quick 4.8× Quick
10 fps
6× Quick 3× Quick 2.4× Quick 6× Quick 3× Quick 2.4× Quick
15 fps
4× Quick 2× Quick 1.6× Quick 4× Quick 2× Quick 1.6× Quick
30 fps
2× Quick 1× Normal 1.25× Slow 2× Quick 1× Normal 1.25× Slow
60 fps
1× Normal 2× Slow 2.5× Slow 1× Normal 2× Slow 2.5× Slow
100 fps
1.67× Slow 3.33× Slow 4.17× Slow 1.67× Slow 3.33× Slow 4.17× Slow
120 fps
2× Slow 4× Slow 5× Slow 2× Slow 4× Slow 5× Slow
150 fps
2.5× Slow 5× Slow 6.25× Slow
180 fps
3× Slow 6× Slow 7.5× Slow
200 fps
3.33× Slow 6.67× Slow 8.33× Slow
240 fps
4× Slow 8× Slow 10× Slow
300 fps
5× Slow 10× Slow 12.5× Slow
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
426
Frame
rate
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
C4K/50.00p
4K/50.00p
C4K/25.00p
4K/25.00p
FHD/50.00p FHD/25.00p
1fps 50× Quick 25× Quick 50× Quick 25× Quick
2fps 25× Quick 12.5× Quick 25× Quick 12.5× Quick
5fps 10× Quick 5× Quick 10× Quick 5× Quick
10 fps 5× Quick 2.5× Quick 5× Quick 2.5× Quick
15 fps 3.33× Quick 1.67× Quick 3.33× Quick 1.67× Quick
30 fps 1.67× Quick 1.2× Slow 1.67× Quick 1.2× Slow
60 fps 1.2× Slow 2.4× Slow 1.2× Slow 2.4× Slow
100 fps 2× Slow 4× Slow 2× Slow 4× Slow
120 fps 2.4× Slow 4.8× Slow 2.4× Slow 4.8× Slow
150 fps 3× Slow 6× Slow
180 fps 3.6× Slow 7.2× Slow
200 fps 4× Slow 8× Slow
240 fps 4.8× Slow 9.6× Slow
300 fps 6× Slow 12× Slow
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
427
Frame
rate
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
C4K/24.00p
4K/24.00p
FHD/24.00p
1fps 24× Quick 24× Quick
2fps 12× Quick 12× Quick
5fps 4.8× Quick 4.8× Quick
10 fps 2.4× Quick 2.4× Quick
15 fps 1.6× Quick 1.6× Quick
30 fps 1.25× Slow 1.25× Slow
60 fps 2.5× Slow 2.5× Slow
100 fps 4.17× Slow 4.17× Slow
120 fps 5× Slow 5× Slow
150 fps 6.25× Slow
180 fps 7.5× Slow
200 fps 8.33× Slow
240 fps 10× Slow
300 fps 12.5× Slow
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
428
Shutter Speeds When Recording Slow & Quick Video
When recording Slow & Quick video, the minimum shutter speed changes
depending on the frame rate of [Slow & Quick Setting].
Frame rate
Minimum shutter speed
[AFS]/[AFC] [MF]
1fps
1/30 of a second
1/8 of a second
2fps
5fps
10 fps 1/10 of a second
15 fps 1/15 of a second
30 fps 1/30 of a second
60 fps 1/60 of a second 1/60 of a second
100 fps 1/100 of a second 1/100 of a second
120 fps 1/125 of a second 1/125 of a second
150 fps 1/160 of a second
180 fps
1/200 of a second
200 fps
240 fps 1/250 of a second
300 fps 1/320 of a second
•
Audio will not be recorded during Slow & Quick recording.
•
When [Image Area of Video] is [PIXEL/PIXEL], you cannot set to a frame rate
that exceeds 120 fps.
•
The mode switches to MF when you set to a frame rate of 150 fps or more.
(The camera automatically focuses when [AF ON] is pressed, but only before
starting recording.)
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video
429
High Frame Rate Video
[MOV] video with high frame rates can be recorded to cards. By converting
it with the compatible software, it is possible to produce slow motion video.
Audio recording, not possible in the Slow & Quick mode, also becomes
possible.
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [] [] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
2
Select a recording quality for high frame rate video.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
The following recording qualities are available in [ ] mode:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate
of 60.00p
•
By filtering the [Rec Quality] by the frame rate, you can display just those
recording qualities that match the frame rate conditions. ([Filtering]: 145)
•
Recording Qualities for High Frame Rate Video (List of Recording Qualities
That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 453)
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video
430
Shutter Speeds When Recording High Frame Rate Video
When recording high frame rate video, the minimum shutter speed
changes depending on the recording frame rate of the video.
* Can be set in [M] mode ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is set to [OFF]) or [ ] mode
([Exposure Mode] is set to [M])
Recording frame rate of the video
Minimum shutter speed
[AFS]/[AFC] [MF]
47.95p 1/30 of a second
1/8 of a second
*
48.00p 1/25 of a second
100.00p 1/100 of a second
119.88p/120.00p 1/125 of a second
200.00p 1/200 of a second
239.76p 1/250 of a second
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video
431
•
When outputting via HDMI, the resolution and frame rate may be
down-converted for output.
Notice regarding AF when recording high frame rate video
•
When set to a [Rec Quality] where the recording frame rate is 200.00p or more,
there is a limitation on the lenses on which AF is possible.
You can confirm which lenses are supported by this camera in “Compatible
products which comply with Four-Thirds standard”. Refer to the “AF and AE in
Motion picture recording” item.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
•
When set to a [Rec Quality] where the recording frame rate is 200.00p or more,
AF operation will be as follows:
– AF mode is fixed to [ ]. By pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing
[AF ON], focusing is in the AF area of [ ].
– Automatic detection is not available.
– [Continuous AF] is not available.
– [Quick AF] is not available.
– [Eye Sensor AF] is not available.
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
432
[Focus Transition]
Smoothly transitions the focus position from the current position to a
position registered in advance.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Select [Focus Transition].
≥ [] [] [Focus Transition]
•
If the [Please set the focus position.] message is displayed, press either
or .
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
433
3
Set focus positions.
≥Check the focus using the same procedure as MF (Record
Using MF: 197), and then press [WB], [ISO], and [ ] to set focus
positions.
≥You can also touch [POS1] to [POS3] to set focus positions.
4
Register the focus positions.
≥Press or to register the focus positions.
5
Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
•
The advanced setting screen is displayed when you press [DISP.] before
recording. (Setting Items ([Focus Transition]): 435)
•
If you have enabled [Focus Transition Rec], Focus Transition will start when
you start recording a video.
∞
(m) 10.50.3
1 2
3
POS1
POS2
POS3
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
434
6
Start Focus Transition.
≥Press 21 to select [1], [2], or [3], and then press or .
•
When [Focus Transition Wait] is set, Focus Transition starts after the set time
has elapsed.
(A) Current focus position
(B) Registered focus position
7
End Focus Transition.
≥Press [Q].
8
Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button once again.
∞
(m) 10.50.3
1 23
1
(A) (B)
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
435
Setting Items ([Focus Transition])
[Focus Position Setting]
Registers focus positions.
[Focus Transition Speed]
Sets the moving speed of focus.
•
Moving speed: [SH] (fast) to [SL] (slow)
[Focus Transition Rec]
Starts Focus Transition when recording starts.
•
Select the position registered with [Focus Position Setting].
[Focus Transition Wait]
Sets the wait time before the start of Focus Transition.
•
The recording screen is displayed when you press [ ].
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
436
•
Maintain the same distance to the subject after setting focus positions.
•
The moving speed of focus varies depending on the lens being used.
•
The moving speed of focus slows as it approaches the closest focusing distance
of the lens or infinity.
•
While using [Focus Transition], it is not possible to focus on anything other than
one of the registered focus positions.
•
Any of the operations below will clear the focus position settings.
– Operating the camera on/off switch
– Zoom operation
– Switching the focus mode
– Switching the recording mode
– Replacing the lens
•
[Focus Transition] cannot be used when using an interchangeable lens that does
not support the focus mode [AFC].
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
437
Log Recording
≥ [V-Log View Assist]: 441
Setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log] enables Log recording.
Images finished with rich gradation can be created through post-production
processing.
[] [] [Photo Style] Select [V-Log]
•
Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).
You can download LUT file from the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html
(English only)
9/RJ
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
438
ISO Sensitivity When [V-Log] Is Set
ISO sensitivity can be set in the range between [500] and [12800] (sensor
output 60 fps or lower) or between [250] and [3200] (sensor output 61 fps
or higher). You can set between [125] and [12800] when [Extended ISO] is
set.
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
439
Exposure When [V-Log] Is Set
The [V-Log] curve characteristics comply with “V-Log/V-Gamut
REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”. When set to [V-Log], the standard
exposure when gray with a reflectance ratio of 18 % is imaged is IRE 42 %.
•
When luminance is to be displayed by “Stop” units, this camera calculates IRE 42 %
to “0 Stop”.
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]
Reflectance ratio
(%)
IRE (%) Stop
10 bit code
value
12 bit code
value
0 7.3 — 128 512
(1) 18 42 0.0 433 1732
(2) 90 61 2.3 602 2408
-
8
-
8
-
7
-
7
-
6
-
6
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
1001122334455667788
（Stop）（Stop）
（10bitcodevalue）（10bitcodevalue）
00
6464
128128
192192
256256
320320
384384
448448
512512
576576
640640
704704
768768
832832
896896
960960
10241024
(1)
(2)
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
441
[V-Log View Assist]
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], the recording screen and images
output via HDMI will darken. Using [V-Log View Assist] means you can
show images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder and output
them via HDMI.
[] [] Select [V-Log View Assist]
[LUT Select]
Selects the LUT file to apply from a preset ([Vlog_709]) or LUT files registered in [LUT
Library]. ([LUT Library]: 335)
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]
Displays the images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder of the camera.
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]
Applies LUT file to images output over HDMI.
•
When applying the LUT file, [LUT] is displayed on the recording screen.
•
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]/[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] are not available when
[LUT] is applied in the [Photo Style] image quality adjustments.
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
442
HLG Videos
≥ [HLG View Assist]: 445
Record videos with the wide dynamic range of the HLG format. You can
record in very bright light where overexposure can occur or in dark areas
where underexposure can occur, maintaining the rich yet subtle colors you
can see with your naked eye.
You can view the video that you record by outputting via HDMI to devices
(TVs, etc.) that support the HLG format, or playing back directly on
supporting devices.
•
“HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma)” is an international standard (ITU-R BT.2100) HDR
format.
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
443
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Select a recording quality with which you can record
HLG video.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
Items available for recording with HLG video are indicated as [HLG available].
•
Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video (List of
Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 453)
3
Set [Photo Style] to [Hybrid Log Gamma].
≥ [] [] [Photo Style] [Hybrid Log Gamma]
+\EULG/RJ*DPPD
±0
±0
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
444
ISO Sensitivity When [Hybrid Log Gamma] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivities will become [250].
•
The monitor and viewfinder on this camera do not support display of HLG format
images.
With [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can display the images converted for monitoring on the monitor/
viewfinder of this camera. ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
•
HLG images are shown dark on devices that do not support the HLG format.
With [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can set the conversion method for images displayed for monitoring.
([HLG View Assist]: 445)
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
445
[HLG View Assist]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted
color gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs
these over HDMI.
[] [] [HLG View Assist] [Monitor] or
[HDMI]
[AUTO]
*
Converts images before outputting them via HDMI while applying the effect of
[MODE2]. This conversion setting works only when the camera is connected to a
device that does not support HDR (HLG format).
[MODE1]
Converts with an emphasis on bright areas such as sky.
•
[MODE1] is displayed on the recording screen.
[MODE2]
Converts with an emphasis on the brightness of a main subject.
•
[MODE2] is displayed on the recording screen.
[OFF]
Displays without converting color gamut and brightness.
•
HLG images appear darker on devices that do not support the HLG format.
* Can only be set while [HDMI] is selected.
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording
446
Anamorphic Recording
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 448
From a variety of different video formats (recording qualities), you can
select and record with a recording quality that suits anamorphic recording.
During anamorphic recording, it is also possible to display desqueezed
images and the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing. It is
also possible to switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic
recording.
•
For information about image stabilizers suited to anamorphic recording
([Anamorphic (Video)]: 273)
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording
447
1
Set [Rec. File Format].
≥ [] [] [Rec. File Format]
2
Select a recording quality suited to anamorphic
recording.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
The following recording qualities are available in [ ] mode:
– [Rec Quality] exceeding a resolution of C4K
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate
of 60.00p
•
When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes], by filtering [Rec
Quality] by the number of pixels, you can display just those recording qualities
with resolutions and aspect ratios that meet the conditions. ([Filtering]: 145)
•
This camera is not compatible with desqueeze editing of video recorded with
anamorphic recording. Use compatible software.
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording
448
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
Display the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the
anamorphic lens on this camera.
Using the [Frame Marker], it is also possible to superimpose on display the
frame of the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Set [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display].
≥ [] [] [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
[ ] ([2.0×])
[ ] ([1.8×])
[ ] ([1.5×])
[ ] ([1.33×])
[ ] ([1.30×])
[OFF]
•
Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
Special Video Recording – [Synchro Scan]
450
[Synchro Scan]
Fine-adjust the shutter speed to reduce flickering and horizontal stripes.
The shutter speed set in Synchro Scan is saved separately from the
shutter speed used for normal recording.
In the Synchro Scan setting screen you can call up the current shutter
speed for normal recording and adjust it.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Set the exposure mode to [S] or [M].
≥ [] [] [Exposure Mode] [S]/[M]
3
Set [Synchro Scan].
≥ [] [] [Synchro Scan] [ON]
Special Video Recording – [Synchro Scan]
451
4
Set the shutter speed.
≥Rotate , or to select a numeric value, then press
or .
•
You can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording by pressing
[DISP.].
•
Adjust the shutter speed while looking at the screen so that flickering and
horizontal stripes will be minimized.
•
When you set [Synchro Scan] to [ON], the available shutter speed range
becomes narrower.
&XUUHQWVKXWWHUVSHHG
ュリヴヱハ
60.160.1
Special Video Recording – [Segmented File Recording]
452
[Segmented File Recording]
To avoid video loss due to unforeseen interruptions to the power supply,
recorded video is segmented at set intervals while being recorded.
•
The segmented videos are saved as one group image. (Group Images: 498)
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes].
≥ [] [] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]/[Apple
ProRes]
2
Set [Segmented File Recording].
≥ [] [] [Segmented File Recording] [10MIN.]/
[5MIN.]/[3MIN.]/[1MIN.]
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
453
List of Recording Qualities That Enable
Special Videos to be Recorded
: Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video
: Recording qualities for High Frame Rate video
: Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]
[Rec Quality]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
[4K/10bit/72M/25p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]
S&Q
HFR
HLG
S&Q
HFR
HLG
S&Q
HFR
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
454
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[5.8K/30p/420/10-L]
[5.8K/24p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/60p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/48p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/30p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/24p/420/10-L]
[4.4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4.4K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/120p/420/10-L]
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]
[C4K/60p/422/10-L]
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/30p/422/10-I]
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]
[C4K/30p/420/10-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/120p/420/10-L]
[4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]
[4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]
S&Q
HFR
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
455
[4K/60p/422/10-L]
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
[4K/30p/422/10-I]
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/240p/422/10-I]
[FHD/240p/422/10-L]
[FHD/240p/420/10-L]
[FHD/120p/422/10-I]
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]
[FHD/60p/422/10-I]
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]
[FHD/48p/422/10-I]
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/30p/422/10-I]
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
456
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[5.8K/25p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/50p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/25p/420/10-L]
[4.4K/50p/420/10-L]
[C4K/100p/420/10-L]
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]
[C4K/50p/422/10-L]
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]
[C4K/25p/422/10-I]
[C4K/25p/422/10-L]
[C4K/25p/420/10-L]
[4K/100p/420/10-L]
[4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]
[4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]
[4K/50p/422/10-L]
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/422/10-I]
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
S&Q
HFR
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
457
[FHD/200p/422/10-I]
[FHD/200p/422/10-L]
[FHD/200p/420/10-L]
[FHD/100p/422/10-I]
[FHD/100p/422/10-L]
[FHD/100p/420/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-I]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]
[FHD/25p/422/10-I]
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
458
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
[5.8K/24p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/48p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/24p/420/10-L]
[4.4K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/120p/420/10-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/120p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/120p/422/10-I]
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
S&Q
HFR
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
459
[Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[5.7K/30p/422 HQ]
[5.7K/30p/422]
[5.7K/24p/422 HQ]
[5.7K/24p/422]
[C4K/60p/422 HQ]
[C4K/60p/422]
[C4K/30p/422 HQ]
[C4K/30p/422]
[C4K/24p/422 HQ]
[C4K/24p/422]
[FHD/60p/422 HQ]
[FHD/60p/422]
[FHD/30p/422 HQ]
[FHD/30p/422]
[FHD/24p/422 HQ]
[FHD/24p/422]
S&Q
HFR
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
460
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
[5.7K/25p/422 HQ]
[5.7K/25p/422]
[C4K/50p/422 HQ]
[C4K/50p/422]
[C4K/25p/422 HQ]
[C4K/25p/422]
[FHD/50p/422 HQ]
[FHD/50p/422]
[FHD/25p/422 HQ]
[FHD/25p/422]
[Rec Quality]
[5.7K/24p/422 HQ]
[5.7K/24p/422]
[C4K/24p/422 HQ]
[C4K/24p/422]
[FHD/24p/422 HQ]
[FHD/24p/422]
S&Q
HFR
HLG
S&Q
HFR
HLG
461
HDMI Output (Video)
You can record while outputting the camera images to an external monitor
or external recorder connected with an HDMI cable.
•
HDMI output control differs between during recording and during playback.
For HDMI output settings during playback ([HDMI Connection]: 610)
≥ Connecting HDMI Devices: 462
≥ HDMI Output Image Quality: 463
≥ HDMI Output Settings: 468
HDMI Output (Video) – Connecting HDMI Devices
462
Connecting HDMI Devices
Getting started:
•
Turn off the camera and the external monitor/external recorder.
Connect the camera and an external monitor or external
recorder with a commercially available HDMI cable.
(A) HDMI socket (Type A)
(B) External monitor
(C) External recorder
•
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet)
long).
•
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.)
•
Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
(B)
(C)
(A)
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
463
HDMI Output Image Quality
≥ Images Output via HDMI: 463
Images Output via HDMI
The images output via HDMI during recording differ depending on the
recording mode.
[ ]/[S&Q] Mode
Aspect ratio, resolution, and frame rate output is according to the [Rec
Quality] settings in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu.
The YUV and bit value are output with YUV changed to 4:2:2 as shown
below.
If the connected device is not compatible with the output system, output
changes to match the connected device.
•
Video with a resolution exceeding 4K is output as C4K/4K resolution.
•
When set to a [Rec Quality] for high frame rate video, the resolution and frame rate
may be down-converted for output.
•
For details (Image Quality When Outputting via HDMI: 466)
Recording to card HDMI output
4:2:2 10 bit 4:2:2 10 bit
4:2:0 10 bit 4:2:2 10 bit
4:2:0 8 bit 4:2:2 8 bit
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
464
[iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] Mode
Output is the same as [ ]/[S&Q] mode during video recording.
Output is with a 16:9 aspect ratio during recording standby. Resolution,
frame rate, YUV, and bit value output matches the connected device.
•
When set to a [Rec Quality] other than 16:9 or 17:9, bands are added to the
images and they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.
•
When the video frame rate is 200p or more, using the following functions will stop
HDMI output:
– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone
– Tethered recording
•
When set to any [Aspect Ratio] other than 16:9, bands are added to the images
and they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
465
Notice Regarding HDMI Output
•
It may take some time for the output method to change.
•
When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a
time lag.
•
Beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds are muted during HDMI
output.
•
When you check the image and audio from the TV connected to the camera, the
microphone of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV,
producing an abnormal sound (audio feedback).
If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the volume on the TV.
•
Certain setting screens are not output via HDMI.
•
For information about the high temperature display (For information about
the high temperature display: 127)
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
466
Image Quality When Outputting via HDMI
Output is with the resolution and frame rate according to the [Rec Quality].
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
5.8K/29.97p
4K/29.97p
5.8K/23.98p
4.4K/47.95p
4K/47.95p
4K/23.98p
4.4K/59.94p
4K/59.94p
5.7K/59.94p
C4K/59.94p
HDMI output 4K/29.97p 4K/23.98p 4K/59.94p C4K/59.94p
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
5.7K/47.95p
5.7K/23.98p
C4K/47.95p
C4K/23.98p
5.7K/29.97p
C4K/29.97p
C4K/119.88p 4K/119.88p
HDMI output C4K/23.98p C4K/29.97p 1080/59.94p 1080/59.94p
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
1080/239.76p
1080/119.88p
1080/59.94p
HDMI output 1080/119.88p 1080/59.94p
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
1080/47.95p
1080/23.98p
1080/29.97p
HDMI output 1080/23.98p 1080/29.97p
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
467
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
5.8K/25.00p
4K/25.00p
4.4K/50.00p
4K/50.00p
5.7K/50.00p
C4K/50.00p
5.7K/25.00p
C4K/25.00p
HDMI output 4K/25.00p 4K/50.00p C4K/50.00p C4K/25.00p
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
C4K/100.00p 4K/100.00p
1080/200.00p
1080/100.00p
HDMI output 1080/50.00p 1080/50.00p 1080/100.00p
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p
HDMI output 1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
5.8K/24.00p
4.4K/48.00p
5.7K/48.00p
5.7K/24.00p
C4K/24.00p
C4K/120.00p
HDMI output 4K/24.00p C4K/24.00p 1080/24.00p
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
4K/120.00p 4K/24.00p
HDMI output 1080/24.00p 4K/24.00p
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
1080/120.00p 1080/24.00p
HDMI output 1080/120.00p 1080/24.00p
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
469
Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI
Output the camera information display to an external device connected by
HDMI.
[] [] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Info
Display]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
There are the following restrictions when connected via HDMI and [Info Display]
is set to [ON]:
– Information is not displayed on the recording screen of the camera.
– [Touch Tab] is not available.
•
There are the following restrictions when connected via HDMI and [Info Display]
is set to [ON] and then a Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone or tethered
recording is attempted:
– Information is not displayed on the recording screen of the camera.
– Some information is not displayed on the recording screens output to external
devices.
– [Sound Rec Level Disp.]/[Touch Tab]/[Histogram]/[Luminance Spot Meter]/
[WFM/Vector Scope] are not available.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
470
Outputting Control Information to an External
Recorder
Recording start and stop control information is output to an external
recorder connected by HDMI.
[] [] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [HDMI
Recording Control]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
[HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to [ON]
in [ ]/[S&Q] mode. ([HDMI Time Code Output]: 403)
•
Control information is output when pressing the video rec. button or shutter button,
even if the video cannot be recorded (such as when there is no card inserted into the
camera).
•
Only compatible external devices can be controlled.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
471
Outputting Audio via HDMI
Output audio to an external device connected by HDMI.
[] [] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Sound
Output (HDMI)]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via
HDMI
Output the enlarged screens from [MF Assist] or [Enlarged Live
Display(Video)] to an external device connected by HDMI.
[] [] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Enlarged
Live Display]
[MODE1]
Enlarged display of live view is output during standby for video recording.
[MODE2]
Enlarged display of live view is output during standby for video recording and during
video recording.
•
The resolution and frame rate of the video output via HDMI will be FHD/60p or less.
[OFF]
Enlarged display of live view is not output.
•
When the monitor/viewfinder of the camera is displaying the enlarged display, the
camera information display is not output via HDMI.
472
Using an External SSD
(Commercially Available)
Pictures and videos can be recorded and played back with a commercially
available external SSD connected to the USB port of the camera.
There are recording qualities that can only be recorded to an external SSD.
≥ Compatible External SSDs: 473
≥ Connecting the External SSD: 474
≥ Formatting the External SSD: 477
≥ Notes About External SSDs: 478
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Compatible External SSDs
473
Compatible External SSDs
This section describes the external SSDs that can be used with this
camera. (As of September 2023)
•
This camera is compatible with SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2 Gen 2).
•
We recommend using an external SSD whose operation has been confirmed by
Panasonic.
Note beforehand that this is not a guarantee of operation on all devices.
•
For the latest information about external SSDs, check the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
•
This does not guarantee all of the capabilities that the external SSD whose operation
has been verified may have.
•
Perform trial recording in advance to check that operation is correct.
•
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the external SSD.
External SSD compatible with USB Type-C
®
(no more than 2 TB in size)
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Connecting the External SSD
474
Connecting the External SSD
Be sure to follow the below steps when connecting and removing the
external SSD.
If you do not perform the steps as shown, the external SSD may not be
recognized or the external SSD or recording data may be corrupted.
1
Set [USB-SSD] to [ON].
≥ [] [] [USB-SSD] [ON]
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Connecting the External SSD
475
2
Connect the camera and external SSD with the USB
connection cable.
•
Use the USB connection cable supplied with the external SSD.
≥The USB-SSD icon is displayed on the screen when the camera
recognizes the external SSD.
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Connecting the External SSD
476
Removing the External SSD
1 Set [USB-SSD] to [OFF].
•
[] [] [USB-SSD] [OFF]
2 Confirm that the USB-SSD icon on the screen changes to the card icon, then
unplug the USB connection cable from the camera.
•
It may take a while for the external SSD to be recognized.
•
When [USB-SSD] is set to [ON], you cannot use a card even if a card has been
inserted. To use a card, set [USB-SSD] to [OFF].
•
[ ] is displayed on the screen while writing to the external SSD.
•
While the USB-SSD icon is being displayed on the screen, do not perform any of
the following operations.
The camera may operate incorrectly or the external SSD and recorded images
may be damaged.
– Disconnect the USB connection cable.
– Remove the battery or disconnect the power plug.
– Subject the camera or external SSD to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Formatting the External SSD
477
Formatting the External SSD
Format the external SSD with this camera before use.
[] [] [USB-SSD Format]
•
When an external SSD is formatted, all of the data stored in the external
SSD is erased and cannot be restored.
Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the external SSD.
•
Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.
•
Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
•
If the external SSD has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again
with the camera.
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Notes About External SSDs
478
Notes About External SSDs
•
A Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler (DMW-DCC17:
optional) are required to record the following types of video. However, when using
the Battery Grip, the following types of video cannot be recorded even if the AC
Adaptor and DC Coupler are mounted.
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
– [S&Q] video with a frame rate exceeding 60 fps
•
When [USB-SSD] is set to [ON], the following functions are not available:
– Recording to cards, playing back pictures/videos recorded to cards
– [Double Card Slot Function]
– [USB]
– [Firmware Update] ([Firmware Version])
– [Copy]
•
If you want to automatically transfer pictures to a smartphone as they are taken while
using an external SSD, set [USB-SSD] to [ON], then set [Auto Transfer] in
[Bluetooth] to [ON]. ([Auto Transfer]: 661)
•
When an external SSD is connected, power is supplied from the camera, so the
battery will be consumed faster. It is recommended to either have a backup battery
ready, or to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional).
•
When not using the external SSD, turn [USB-SSD] [OFF].
When set to [ON], power is supplied from the battery of this camera to the connected
device, so the battery will be consumed faster.
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Notes About External SSDs
479
•
Depending on the external SSD connected, a message indicating that it cannot be
used may be displayed on the screen due to insufficient power and it may not
operate.
– We recommend using an external SSD whose operation has been confirmed by
Panasonic.
– Perform trial recording in advance to check that operation is correct.
•
When the temperature of the camera rises when recording over long periods to an
external SSD, for example, [ ] appears blinking on the screen. If you continue to
use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot be used is displayed
on the screen and some functions, such as recording and HDMI output, will be
stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the message indicating that the
camera can be used again. When the message indicating that it can be used again
is displayed, turn the camera off then on again.
•
The camera cannot access the external SSD if the external SSD is protected by a
password, etc. Check the settings of the external SSD before use.
•
Do not use USB extension cables, USB conversion adaptors, or USB hubs.
480
Playing Back and Editing of Images
This chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos.
You can also develop pictures recorded in the RAW format and repair
video files that cannot be played back.
•
Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or edited
correctly on this camera.
≥ Playing Back Pictures: 481
≥ Playing Back Videos: 483
≥ Switching the Display Mode: 492
≥ Group Images: 498
≥ Deleting Images: 500
≥ [RAW Processing]: 502
≥ [Video Repair]: 511
≥ [Playback] Menu: 514
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures
481
Playing Back Pictures
1
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
2
Select a picture.
≥Select the pictures by pressing 21.
≥You can move continuously through images by pressing and
holding 21.
≥You can also select by rotating or .
≥You can also move through images by dragging the screen
horizontally.
(A) Card slot
(A)
1/999
1/999
1/999
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures
482
3
Stop playback.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also stop playback by pressing [ ].
Switching the Card to Display
You can switch the card displayed just by pressing [ ] during playback.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Card Slot Change]. (Fn Buttons: 527)
1 Press [ ].
2 Press 34 to select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2] and then press or .
•
This camera complies with the “Design rule for Camera File system” (DCF) and
“Exchangeable Image File Format” (Exif) standards established by “Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” (JEITA).
The camera cannot play back files that do not comply with the DCF standard.
Exif is a file format for pictures which allows recording information, etc. to be
added.
•
You can assign switching of the recording screen/playback screen to an Fn
button:
([Rec / Playback Switch]: 536, [Rec / Playback Switch]: 539)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
483
Playing Back Videos
≥ Video Repeat Playback: 487
≥ Extracting a Picture: 489
≥ [Video Divide]: 490
1
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
2
Select a video.
•
For information about how to select images (Playing Back Pictures: 481)
•
The [ ] video icon is displayed for a video.
•
The video recording time is displayed on the screen.
Example) When 8 minutes 30 seconds: 8m30s
•
h: hour, m: minute, s: second
(A) Video recording time
8m30s
8m30s
8m30s
(A)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
484
3
Play back the video.
≥Press 3.
≥You can also start playback by touching [ ] at the center of the
screen.
(B) Elapsed playback time
(C) Playback bar
4
Stop playback.
≥Press 4.
00:05:50
00:05:50
00:05:50
00:08:30
00:08:30
00:08:30
(B) (C)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
485
Operations During Video Playback
Button
operations
Touch
operations
Description of operation
3
/
Plays/pauses.
4 — Stops.
2 —
Performs fast-rewind playback.
•
If you press 2 again, the fast-rewind speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame rewinding (while
paused).
1 —
Performs fast-forward playback.
•
If you press 1 again, the fast-forward speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame forwarding (while
paused).
— Selects the frame to display.
/
Extracts a picture (while paused). (Extracting a
Picture: 489)
—
Reduces the volume.
Increases the volume.
6DYH
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
486
•
The camera can play back videos in MP4, MOV, and Apple ProRes formats.
•
Video recorded with a [System Frequency] setting that is different to the current
one cannot be played back.
•
If the reading speed of the card is slow, playback may pause or it may not be
possible to play back smoothly.
•
You may be able to repair video files that cannot be played back.
([Video Repair]: 511)
•
You can set the operation for when playback of video finishes:
([Behavior After Video Playback]: 518)
•
You can assign switching of the recording screen/playback screen to an Fn
button:
([Rec / Playback Switch]: 536, [Rec / Playback Switch]: 539)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
487
Video Repeat Playback
You can play back a part of a video repeatedly.
1
Display the screen for setting the part to repeat.
≥Press [Q] while paused.
≥The screen for setting the part to repeat is also displayed when you
touch [Repeat Playback] while paused.
2
Set the position to start the repeat.
≥Press 21 to select the start position and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating , or .
≥You can also select the start position by touching the playback bar.
3
Set the position to end the repeat.
≥Set using the same procedure as
2
.
•
The position cannot be set if the position to start the repeat and the position to
end the repeat are too close.
00:05:50
00:05:50
00:05:50
00:08:30
00:08:30
00:08:30
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
488
4
Start playback.
•
The operations during repeat playback are the same as “Operations During
Video Playback”. (Operations During Video Playback: 485)
•
End repeat playback by pressing 4 to stop playback or by pressing [Q] while
paused.
•
Repeat playback is not possible if the recording time is short.
•
The positions set for the repeated part may shift from the position where the
video is paused.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
489
Extracting a Picture
Extract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image.
1
Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a
picture.
≥Press 3.
•
To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward
frame-by-frame).
2
Save the picture.
≥Press or .
≥You can also save the picture by touching [Save].
•
The picture created from the video is saved with a [FINE] picture quality.
The picture is saved with a size according to the resolution of the [Rec Quality].
•
The image quality of a picture created from a video may be coarser than normal.
•
[ ] is displayed on the detailed information display screen for a picture
created from a video.
00:06:10
00:06:10
00:06:10 00:08:30
00:08:30
00:08:30
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
490
[Video Divide]
Divide a recorded video into two.
1
Select [Video Divide].
≥ [] [] [Video Divide]
2
Select and play the image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and then press or .
3
Pause playback at the position you wish to divide.
≥Press 3.
•
To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (frame-by-frame rewind or
frame-by-frame forward).
•
Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been divided.
Carefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation.
•
Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide process.
The images may be lost.
00:06:1000:06:1000:06:10 00:08:3000:08:3000:08:30
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
491
4
Divide the video.
≥Press or .
≥You can also divide the video by touching [Divide].
•
It is not possible to divide video that was recorded when [Rec. File Format] was
[Apple ProRes].
•
Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible.
•
Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided.
•
[Video Divide] cannot be used on images recorded using [Segmented File
Recording].
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
492
Switching the Display Mode
≥ Enlarged Display: 493
≥ Thumbnail Screen: 495
≥ Calendar Playback: 497
You can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display
and switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once
(multi-playback).
You can also switch to calendar display to show images of a selected
recording date.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
493
Enlarged Display
Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).
Enlarging the playback screen.
≥ Rotate to the right.
≥ The playback screen is enlarged in the order of 2× 4× 8×
16×.
•
Rotating to the left returns to the previous display size.
•
Enlarged display to 16× is not possible with FHD video or with pictures extracted
from FHD video.
2.0X2.0X2.0X
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
494
Operations During Enlarged Display
Button
operations
Touch
operations
Description of operation
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
—
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
3421 Drag
Moves the enlarged display position.
Positions can be moved to the diagonal
directions using the joystick.
/
—
Forwards or rewinds images while maintaining
the same zoom magnification and zoom position.
•
You can display the point focused with AF. You can enlarge the display from that
point:
([Magnify from AF Point]: 517)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
495
Thumbnail Screen
1
Switch to thumbnail display.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order of 12-image screen
30-image screen.
•
Rotating to the left during 30-image screen display switches to calendar
display. (Calendar Playback: 497)
•
Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
•
You can also switch the display by touching an icon.
[ ]: 1-image screen
[ ]: 12-image screen
[ ]: 30-image screen
[ ]: Calendar (Calendar Playback: 497)
(A) Card slot
2
Select an image.
≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press or .
CAL
(A)
1/999
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
496
•
When you press [ ] while a thumbnail is being displayed, you can switch to
the card being displayed.
•
You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down.
•
Images indicated with [ ] cannot be played back.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
497
Calendar Playback
1
Switch to calendar playback.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order of thumbnail screen
(12 images) Thumbnail screen (30 images) Calendar
playback.
•
Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
2
Select the recording date.
≥Press 3421 to select a date and then press or .
3
Select an image.
≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press or .
•
Rotating to the left returns to calendar playback.
•
The card to display cannot be switched during calendar display.
•
The range that the calendar can be displayed is January 2000 to December
2099.
21
1
9876543
16151413121110
2322212019
26
1817
SUN SATFRITHUWEDTUEMON
2524
31
2023
12
292827 30
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images
498
Group Images
Images recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Shooting are
handled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted and edited on
a group basis.
(For example, if you delete a group image, all images in the group are
deleted.)
You can also delete and edit each image in a group individually.
Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera
Group images recorded with SH burst recording.
Group images recorded with Focus Bracket.
Group images recorded with Time Lapse Shot.
Group images recorded with Stop Motion Shooting.
Group images recorded with [Segmented File Recording].
1/9991/9991/999
SLFSLFSLF
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images
499
Playing and Editing the Images in a Group One by One
Operations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are
available with images in groups just as with normal playback.
1 Select the group image in the playback state. (Playing Back Pictures: 481)
2 Press 4 to display the images in the group.
•
You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.
3 Press 21 to select an image.
•
To return to the normal playback screen, press 4 or touch [ ] again.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images
500
Deleting Images
1
Press [ ] in playback state.
•
Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the
images before deletion.
•
You can only delete the images in the card of the selected card slot.
•
If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images
501
2
Press 34 to select the deletion method and then press
or .
[Delete Single]
Deletes the selected image.
[Delete Multi]
Selecting and deleting multiple images.
1 Press 3421 to select the image to delete and then press or .
•
[ ] is displayed for the selected image.
•
If you press or again, the selection is canceled.
•
Up to 100 images can be selected.
2 Press [DISP.] to delete the selected image.
•
To switch the card selected for deleting images, press [ ] and then select the
card slot.
•
Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time to
delete them.
•
You can set which of [Yes] and [No] is selected initially in the confirmation screen
when deleting:
([Delete Confirmation]: 525)
•
All images on the card can be deleted:
([Delete All Images]: 525)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
502
[RAW Processing]
This processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves
them in JPEG format.
1
Select [RAW Processing].
≥ [] [] [RAW Processing]
2
Select the RAW image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and then press or .
•
When group images are selected, press 4 and then select an image in the
group.
Press 4 again to return to the normal selection screen.
•
The settings from the time of recording are reflected in displayed images.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
503
3
Select a setting item.
≥Press 34 to select an item and then press or .
4
Change the setting.
≥Rotate , , or .
•
The image can be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen.
5
Confirm the setting.
≥Press or .
≥The screen of Step
3
reappears.
To set another item, repeat Steps
3
to
5
.
+1+1 +2+2
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
DISP.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
504
6
Save the image.
≥Press 34 to select [Begin Processing] and then press or
.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
505
Setting Items ([RAW Processing])
[Begin Processing]
Saves the image.
[White Balance]
Selects and adjusts the white balance.
Selecting the item with [ ] enables processing with the same setting as at the time
of recording.
•
If you press 4 in the [White Balance] selection screen, the white balance adjustment
screen appears. (Adjusting the White Balance: 314)
•
If you press 3 while [ ] to [ ] is selected, the color temperature setting
screen appears. (Color Temperature Setting: 313)
[Brightness correction]
Corrects the brightness.
•
The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the effect of exposure compensation
during recording.
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 316)
Selects a Photo Style.
•
If you press [Q] while [Like709] is selected, the knee setting screen appears.
(Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 376)
•
You cannot select a Photo Style for images recorded with [V-Log]. You cannot select
[V-Log] for images not recorded with [V-Log].
•
You cannot select a Photo Style other than [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2] for images
recorded with [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2]. You cannot select [Cinelike D2] or
[Cinelike V2] for images not recorded with Photo Style [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2].
•
[REAL TIME LUT] cannot be selected. The Photo Style is fixed to [V-Log] for images
recorded with [REAL TIME LUT].
1
4
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
506
[i.Dynamic Range]
Selects the setting of [i.Dynamic Range].
[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast.
[Highlight]
Adjusts the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow]
Adjusts the brightness of dark portions.
[Saturation]/[Color Tone]
Adjusts the saturation or color tone.
[Hue]
Adjusts the hue.
[Filter Effect]
Selects filter effects.
[Grain Effect]
Selects a grain effect setting.
[Color Noise]
Adds color to the grain effect.
[Noise Reduction]
Sets noise reduction.
[Sharpness]
Adjusts the sharpness.
S
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
507
[LUT]
Selects the LUT file registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]: 335)
[More Settings]
[Revert To Original]: Returns the settings to the ones from the time of recording.
[Color Space]: Selects a Color Space setting from [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]. ([Color
Space]: 562)
[Picture Size]: Selects the size for storing images.
[Destination Card Slot]: You can select the card slot to which to save images
processed with RAW. When [AUTO] is selected, the image is saved to the same card
slot as the RAW format image to be processed.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
508
•
The items that can be adjusted depend on the selected [Photo Style].
* Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
([Saturation])
([Color Tone])
*
S
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
509
Displaying a Comparison Screen
You can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images
with the applied setting value side by side.
1 Press [DISP.] in the screen of Step
4
.
•
The image with the current setting (A) is displayed at the center.
•
Touching the image with the current setting enlarges it.
Touching [ ] returns to the original display.
•
A comparison screen cannot be displayed while [Noise Reduction] or
[Sharpness] is selected.
2 Rotate , , or to change the setting.
3 Press or to confirm the setting.
DISP.
0
(A)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
510
•
It may take a while for the comparison screen to be displayed.
•
RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [L] size of
[4:3].
(However, RAW images recorded in High Resolution mode are recorded in the
[XL] size of [4:3])
•
With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle of
view of [Ex. Tele Conv.] from the time of recording.
•
[Picture Quality] is processed as [FINE] with this function.
•
The results of RAW processing with this function and with the “SILKYPIX
Developer Studio” software do not completely match.
•
RAW processing is not possible while you are using the following function:
– HDMI output
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Repair]
511
[Video Repair]
When the recording of a video could not be completed normally, a video file
that cannot be played back may be generated (extension “.mdt”).
You can repair the “.mdt” file with this function to make it playable.
•
Possible causes for the generation of “.mdt” files are:
– Power turns off during video recording (battery is removed, AC cable is unplugged,
power outage while using the AC adaptor, etc.)
– Card removed during video recording
– Card removed while writing to card after video recording
– When an unexpected freeze occurs during video recording/while writing to the
card
1
Select [Video Repair].
≥ [] [] [Video Repair]
•
Videos that can be repaired are those videos recorded with the [Rec. File
Format] being either [MOV] or [Apple ProRes].
Video recorded in [MP4] cannot be repaired.
•
As repairs can take some time, use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10:
optional) and DC Coupler (DMW-DCC17: optional) or supply with power during
the operation. (Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying
Power/Charging): 49)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Repair]
512
2
Select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2].
≥Press 34 to select, and then press or .
•
Video files that can be repaired are filtered.
3
Select the video file to repair.
≥Press 21 to select a file and then press or .
•
Refer to the recording date and time (A), folder/file number (B), and video
recording time (C) to help with selecting the video file.
4
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
•
Video repair starts. Repair takes some time.
•
The video file after repair is saved in the same folder as the file before repair.
Canceling Video Repair
Even if you cancel video repair, the file is not deleted, so the procedure can
be done over again later if required.
1 Press either or in the video repair progress screen.
2 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
(B)(A) (C)
2023.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/2
8m30s
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Repair]
513
•
It may not be possible to repair videos with a short recording time.
•
It may not be possible to repair videos in some cases due to the state of the data.
•
Video repair cannot be started if there is very limited free space on the card.
•
Do not turn off the power or remove the card during repair.
Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
•
Do not perform other operations during the repair.
•
You cannot repair videos recorded with devices other than this camera.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
514
[Playback] Menu
≥ How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 514
≥ [Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 516
≥ [Playback] ([Process Image]): 519
≥ [Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 520
≥ [Playback] ([Edit Image]): 521
≥ [Playback] ([Others]): 525
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu
Follow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed.
•
Images are displayed separately by card slot.
•
You can only select images on one card at a time.
When [Single] Has Been Selected
1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press or .
•
If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the screen, the setting is
canceled when or is pressed again.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
515
When [Multi] Has Been Selected
When you press [ ], the card that is displayed is switched.
1 Press 3421 to select the image and then press or (repeat).
•
The setting is canceled when or is pressed again.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
When [Protect] is selected
Press 3421 to select the image, and then press or to set (repeat).
•
The setting is canceled when or is pressed again.
321
654
2.
ュリヴヱハ
321
654
6HW&DQFHO
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
516
[Playback] ([Playback Mode])
[Playback Mode]
[Slide Show]
: Default settings
[Normal Play] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating]
Filters the type of images to play back.
•
When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to
display, then press [DISP.].
[All] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating]
Selects image types and plays them back at regular intervals in order.
•
When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to
display, then press [DISP.].
[Start]: Starts slide show playback.
[Duration]: Sets repeat playback.
[Repeat]: Sets repeat playback.
Operations during slide show
3: Plays/pauses (You can also perform the same operation by touching [ ] or
[])
2: Move to the previous image
1: Move to the next image
4: Ends the slide show
: Adjusts the volume
•
When [Video Only] is set, [Duration] is not available.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
517
[Rotate Disp.]
[Picture Sort]
[Magnify from AF Point]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]
[ON] / [OFF]
Automatically displays pictures vertically if they were recorded when holding the
camera vertically.
[FILE NAME] / [DATE/TIME]
This sets the order in which the camera displays images during playback.
[FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name.
[DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.
•
If you insert another card, it may take some time to read all data, therefore pictures
may not be displayed in the set order.
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the point focused with AF.
Enlarges the AF focus location when enlarging the image.
•
The center of the image is enlarged for RAW images recorded in the High
Resolution mode or when the image is not focused.
[ON] / [OFF]
When playing back images recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log], this displays
the images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder.
•
This functions in tandem with [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] in [V-Log View Assist] in
the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([V-Log View Assist]: 441)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
518
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
[Behavior After Video Playback]
[MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and
brightness for display.
•
This functions in tandem with [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom]
([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
This displays the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens on this camera.
•
This is linked with [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] under the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu. ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 448)
[End Playback] / [Pause At Last Frame]
Sets the operation for when playback of video finishes.
[End Playback]: Ends video playback and returns to the image selection screen.
[Pause At Last Frame]: Does not end video playback, but pauses on the final
frame. To end video playback, press 4.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
519
[Playback] ([Process Image])
[RAW Processing]
[Time Lapse Video]
[Stop Motion Video]
Processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves them in JPEG
format.
([RAW Processing]: 502)
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Time Lapse Shot].
1 Press 21 to select a [Time Lapse Shot] group and then press or .
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video.
(Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 239)
•
When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Time Lapse Video] is
not available.
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Stop Motion Animation].
1 Press 21 to select the Stop Motion Animation group and then press or
.
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video.
(Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 239)
•
When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Stop Motion Video] is
not available.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
520
[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.])
[Protect]
[Rating]
[Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel]
You can set protection for images so that they will not be deleted by mistake.
However, if you format the card, the protected images will also be deleted.
•
For information about how to select images (How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] Menu: 514)
•
Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled on a device other than
this camera.
[Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel]
If you set any of the five different rating levels for images, you can do the following:
•
Deleting all images except for those with ratings.
•
Use the file details view on a PC, etc., to check the rating level. (JPEG images
only)
1 Select an image. (How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 514)
2 Press 21 to select a rating level (1 to 5) and then press or .
•
When [Multi] is selected, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
•
To cancel the setting, set the rating level to [OFF].
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
521
[Playback] ([Edit Image])
[Resize]
: Default settings
[Single] / [Multi]
Reduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as different images to
enable them to be easily used for web pages or sent as email attachments.
•
For information about how to select images (How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] Menu: 514)
– When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image, press 34 to select the
size, then press or .
– When [Multi] is selected, before choosing the images, press 34 to select the
size, then press or .
•
You can set up to 100 images at once with [Multi].
•
The image quality of the resized image becomes lower.
•
[Resize] is not available for images recorded using the following functions:
– Video recording
– Group images
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– Pictures created from [C4K] video
– [S] ([Picture Size])
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
522
[Rotate]
[Video Divide]
Rotate images manually in 90o steps.
[]: Rotates 90o clockwise.
[]: Rotates 90o counter-clockwise.
•
For information about how to select images (How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] Menu: 514)
•
When [Rotate Disp.] is [OFF], [Rotate] is not available.
Divide a recorded video into two.
([Video Divide]: 490)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
523
[Copy]
[Copy Direction] []/ []
[Select Copy] / [Copy All in Folder] / [Copy All in Card]
You can copy the images in one of the cards to the other card.
•
Copied images will be saved in a new folder.
[Select Copy]: Copies selected images.
1 Select the folder containing the images to copy.
2 Select the images. (How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 514)
[Copy All in Folder]: Copies all images in a folder.
1 Select the folder to copy.
2 Check the images to be copied and then press or to execute
copying.
[Copy All in Card]: Copies all images in the card.
Using the Fn button to copy images
If you press the Fn button with [Copy] assigned while playing back images one at a
time, the image currently being played back will be copied to the other card. (Fn
Buttons: 527)
•
Select the copy destination folder from the following options. In the case of group
images, [Create a New Folder] is selected automatically.
[Same Folder Number as Source]: Copies to a folder with the same name as the
folder of the image to be copied.
[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number
and then copies the image to it.
[Select Folder]: Selects a folder to store the image and then copies the image to
it.
•
You can set up to 100 images at once with [Select Copy].
•
The [Protect] setting is not copied.
•
Copying may take a while.
•
When using the following combinations of cards, video copying is not available:
– Copying from an SDXC memory card to an SD/SDHC memory card
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
525
[Playback] ([Others])
[Delete Confirmation]
[Delete All Images]
: Default settings
["Yes" first] / ["No" first]
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation
screen for deleting an image is displayed.
["Yes" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first.
["No" first]: [No] is highlighted first.
[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]
Deleting all images in a card.
•
Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the
images before deletion.
•
If you select [Delete All Non-rating], all images except those with a rating set are
deleted.
•
[Delete All Images] can be used when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play].
526
Camera Customization
This chapter describes the customization function with which you can
configure the camera to your preferred settings.
It also describes the [Custom] menu where you can make advanced
settings for the camera operations and screen displays, and the [Setup]
menu where you can make basic settings for the camera.
≥ Fn Buttons: 527
≥ [Dial Operation Switch]: 542
≥ Quick Menu Customization: 545
≥ Custom Mode: 552
≥ [Custom] Menu: 557
≥ [Setup] Menu: 596
≥ My Menu: 618
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
527
Fn Buttons
≥ Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 530
≥ Use the Fn Buttons: 541
You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons. Additionally, you
can register other functions to specialized buttons such as [WB] button, in
the same way as with the Fn buttons.
Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.
Fn Button Default Settings
(2)
(11)(10)
(3)(4)(5) (8)(7) (9)(6)(1)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
528
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
(1) [Fn2] [AF-Point Scope] [No Setting]
(2) [Fn3] [Preview] [No Setting]
(3) [WB] [White Balance] [No Setting]
(4) [ISO] [Sensitivity] [No Setting]
(5) [] [Exposure Comp.] [No Setting]
(6)
Video rec.
button
[Video Record] [Video Record]
(7) [LVF] [LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/Monitor Switch]
(8) [] [AF Mode] [Card Slot Change]
(9) [AF ON] [AF-ON] [Rating¿3]
(10) [Q] [Q.MENU] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
(11)
[Fn1]/[ ]/
[]
[Level Gauge]
•
Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
529
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
(12)
[Fn4] [Wi-Fi]
•
Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
[Fn5] [Histogram]
[Fn6] [Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Fn7]
[Off (Disable Press and
Hold)]
[Fn8]
[Off (Disable Press and
Hold)]
(13) [No Setting]
(14) [No Setting]
Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn8Fn8Fn8
OFFOFFOFF
Fn7Fn7Fn7
OFFOFFOFF
Fn6Fn6Fn6
(12) (14)(13)
Fn14
Fn16
Fn13
Fn17
Fn15
Fn10
Fn9
Fn11
Fn12
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
530
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons
1
Select [Fn Button Set].
≥ [] [] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode]/
[Setting in PLAY mode]
2
Select the button.
≥Press 34 to select the button and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
•
Press [DISP.] to change the page.
•
With default settings, [Fn13] to [Fn17] on the joystick cannot be used.
When using functions, set the [Joystick Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu to [Fn]. ([Joystick Setting]: 574)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
531
3
Find the function to register.
≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is
categorized (Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC
mode]): 533, Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY
mode]): 539) and then press or .
≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing
34 or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Switch the [1] to [3] tabs by pressing [Q].
4
Register the function.
≥Press 34 to select a function and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
•
Select items with [>] by selecting the item again.
•
Depending on the button, some functions cannot be registered.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
532
•
You can also touch [ ] on the control panel (Control Panel: 721) to display
the screen in Step
2
.
•
You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in
Step
4
.
(This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the
button type.)
•
You can assign a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens:
([Lens Fn Button Setting]: 593)
Fn
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
533
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC mode])
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
•
[Exposure Comp.] (Exposure Compensation: 296)
•
[Sensitivity] (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
•
[White Balance] (White Balance (WB): 308)
•
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 316)
•
[Apply LUT]
– Applies the LUT file that was set in [LUT] with either [REAL TIME LUT] or [MY
PHOTO STYLE]. (Adjusting Image Quality: 321)
•
[Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 277)
•
[Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 116)
•
[Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 119)
•
[Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 117)
•
[1 Shot Spot Metering]
– Records with the metering mode set to [ ] (Spot metering) once only.
([Metering Mode]: 277)
•
[Long Exposure NR] ([Long Exposure NR]: 263)
•
[Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 264)
•
[1 Shot RAW+JPG]
– Records a RAW image and a JPEG image simultaneously once only. ([Picture
Quality]: 119)
•
[i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 299)
•
[Filter Effect] ([Filter Settings]: 329)
•
[One Push AE]
– Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to the settings suited for the standard
exposure determined by the camera. (Exposure Compensation: 296)
•
[Touch AE] (Touch AE: 110)
•
[AWB Lock] ([AWB Lock Setting]: 561)
•
[Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 363)
•
[Synchro Scan] ([Synchro Scan]: 450)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
534
[Focus/Shutter]
•
[AF Mode] (Selecting the AF Mode: 171)
•
[AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 174)
•
[Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 174)
•
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 160)
•
[AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 371)
•
[Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 163)
•
[Focus Limiter Range Set] ([Focus Limiter]: 163)
•
[Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 202)
•
[Focus Peaking Sensitivity] ([Focus Peaking]: 202)
•
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] ([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 166)
•
[Focus Ring Lock] ([Focus Ring Lock]: 566)
•
[AE LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 300)
•
[AF LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 300)
•
[AF/AE LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 300)
•
[AF-ON] ([AF ON] button: 155)
•
[AF-ON : Near Shift]
– AF operates giving priority to close-up subjects. (Using AF: 153)
•
[AF-ON : Far Shift]
– AF operates giving priority to distant subjects. (Using AF: 153)
•
[AF-Point Scope] ([AF-Point Scope]: 158)
•
[Focus Area Set]
– Displays the AF area/MF Assist movement screens. (AF Area Operations: 188,
Operations on the MF Assist Screen: 199)
•
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 372)
[Flash]
•
[Flash Mode] ([Flash Mode]: 345)
•
[Flash Adjust.] ([Flash Adjust.]: 350)
•
[Wireless Flash Setup] (Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 353)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
535
[Others (Photo)]
•
[Drive Mode Setting] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
•
[Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 245)
•
[Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 257)
•
[Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 271)
•
[Shutter Type] ([Shutter Type]: 259)
•
[Ex. Tele Conv.] (Extended Tele Conversion: 206)
•
[Live View Composite] ([Live View Composite]: 253)
[2] tab
[Image Format]
•
[Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 131)
•
[Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 133)
•
[Rec Quality (My List)] (Setting or deleting in My List: 146)
•
[Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
•
[Time Code Display] (Time Code: 401)
[Audio]
•
[Audio Information] ([Audio Information]: 388)
•
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 380)
•
[Mute Sound Input] ([Mute Sound Input]: 381)
•
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 383)
•
[Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 384)
•
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 385)
•
[4ch Mic Input] ([4ch Mic Input]: 396)
•
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 394)
•
[Sound Monitoring Channel] ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 399)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
536
[Others (Video)]
•
[Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 271)
•
[E-Stabilization (Video)] ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 272)
•
[Boost I.S. (Video)] ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 269)
•
[Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
•
[Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 432)
[Operation]
•
[Q.MENU] (Quick Menu: 89)
•
[Rec / Playback Switch]
– Switches to the playback screen. (Playing Back Pictures: 481, Playing Back
Videos: 483)
•
[Video Record] (Basic Video Operations: 122)
•
[Video Record(Creative Video)]
– Video recording is started or stopped only in the [ ] mode. (Setting the
Exposure for Recording Videos: 363)
•
[LVF/Monitor Switch] (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83)
•
[Operation Lock]
– A certain type of operation is disabled. Set the type of operation to be disabled in
[Operation Lock Setup]. ([Operation Lock Setup]: 571)
•
[Dial Operation Switch] (Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 544)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
537
[Monitor / Display]
•
[Preview] (Preview Mode: 294)
•
[Preview Aperture Effect]
– The aperture effect can be previewed while the Fn button is being pressed.
(Preview Mode: 294)
•
[Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 576)
•
[Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 585)
•
[Histogram] ([Histogram]: 577)
•
[Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 413)
•
[Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 417)
•
[Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 578)
•
[Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 578)
•
[Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 588)
•
[Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 579)
•
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
– Switches the displayed monitor or viewfinder display style. ([LVF/Monitor Disp.
Set]: 580)
•
[Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 590)
•
[Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 415)
•
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 441)
•
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([LUT View Assist (HDMI)]: 441)
•
[LUT Select] ([LUT Select]: 441)
•
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
•
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
•
[Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 583)
•
[I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 584)
•
[WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 409)
•
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 448)
•
[Color Bars] (Color Bars/Test Tone: 419)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
538
[3] tab
[Lens / Others]
•
[Focus Ring Control] ([Focus Ring Control]: 594)
•
[AF Micro Adjustment] ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 167)
•
[Zoom Control] (Interchangeable lens that supports power zoom (motorized
zoom): 205)
•
[Step Zoom] ([Step Zoom]: 208)
•
[Zoom Speed] ([Zoom Speed]: 208)
•
[Lens Information] ([Lens Information]: 274)
[Card/File]
•
[Destination Card Slot]
– Changes the priority of cards for recording. This can be used if [Double Card Slot
Function] ([Double Card Slot Function]: 598) is set to [Relay Rec].
[IN/OUT]
•
[Wi-Fi] (Wi-Fi / Bluetooth: 634)
[Setting]
•
[Save to Custom Mode] (Registering Instant Customization: 553)
[Others]
•
[No Setting]
– Set when not using as an Fn button.
•
[Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
•
[Restore to Default]
– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (Fn Button Default Settings: 527)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
539
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY mode])
[1] tab
[Playback Mode]
•
[Magnify from AF Point] ([Magnify from AF Point]: 517)
•
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 517)
•
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 518)
•
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 448)
[Process Image]
•
[RAW Processing] ([RAW Processing]: 502)
[Add/Delete Info.]
•
[Delete Single] (Deleting Images: 500)
•
[Protect] ([Protect]: 520)
•
[Rating¿1] ([Rating]: 520)
•
[Rating¿2] ([Rating]: 520)
•
[Rating¿3] ([Rating]: 520)
•
[Rating¿4] ([Rating]: 520)
•
[Rating¿5] ([Rating]: 520)
[Edit Image]
•
[Copy] ([Copy]: 523)
[Operation]
•
[Rec / Playback Switch]
– Switches to the recording screen. (Basic Picture Operations: 113, Basic Video
Operations: 122)
•
[LVF/Monitor Switch] (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 83)
•
[Video Record] (Basic Video Operations: 122)
•
[Video Record(Creative Video)]
– Video recording is started or stopped only in the [ ] mode. (Setting the
Exposure for Recording Videos: 363)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
540
[Monitor / Display]
•
[Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 579)
[Card/File]
•
[Card Slot Change] (Switching the Card to Display: 482)
[IN/OUT]
•
[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] ([Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]: 608)
•
[Wi-Fi] (Wi-Fi / Bluetooth: 634)
•
[Send Image (Smartphone)] (Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations: 650)
•
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([V-Log View Assist]: 441)
•
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
[2] tab
[Others]
•
[No Setting]
– Set when not using as an Fn button.
•
[Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
•
[Restore to Default]
– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (Fn Button Default Settings: 527)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
541
Use the Fn Buttons
During recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions
registered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, usage of the
functions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode].
1
Press the Fn button.
2
Select a setting item.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating , or .
•
Display and selection methods of a setting item differ depending on the menu
item.
Use [Fn4] to [Fn8] (Touch Icons)
During recording, you can use the Fn buttons within the Touch Tab.
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch one of [Fn4] to [Fn8].
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON]
in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. ([Touch Settings]: 570)
Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn8Fn8Fn8
OFFOFFOFF
Fn7Fn7Fn7
OFFOFFOFF
Fn6Fn6Fn6
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
542
[Dial Operation Switch]
≥ Register Functions to the Dials: 542
≥ Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 544
This temporarily changes the functions operated with (front dial) and
(rear dial).
Register Functions to the Dials
1
Select [Dial Operation Switch Setup].
≥ [] [] [Dial Set.] [Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[ ]/[ ]
2
Register the function.
≥Press 34 to select a function and then press or .
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
543
Functions That Can Be Registered
•
[Exposure Comp.] (Exposure Compensation: 296)
•
[Sensitivity]
*1
(ISO Sensitivity: 302)
•
[White Balance]
*2
(White Balance (WB): 308)
•
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 316)
•
[Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 116)
•
[i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 299)
•
[Filter Effect] ([Filter Settings]: 329)
•
[AF Mode] (Selecting the AF Mode: 171)
•
[Flash Mode] ([Flash Mode]: 345)
•
[Flash Adjust.] ([Flash Adjust.]: 350)
*1 default setting
*2 default setting
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
544
Temporarily Change Dial Operation
1
Set [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (Fn
Buttons: 527)
2
Switch dial operation.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
≥A guide will display the functions registered to and .
•
If no operations are performed, then several seconds later, the guide
disappears.
3
Set the registered function.
≥Rotate or while the guide is displayed.
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
ISOISOISOISO
WBWBWBWB
AWBc
AWBc
AWBw
AWBw
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBAWB
ISOISOISOISO
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
545
Quick Menu Customization
≥ Register to the Quick Menu: 545
You can change Quick menu items depending on the recording mode.
Additionally, you can change the items to display on the Quick menu and
their order to suit your preferences.
For information about Quick menu operation methods (Quick Menu: 89)
Register to the Quick Menu
Change the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.
These can be set separately for [ ]/[S&Q] mode (Video) and for other
recording modes (Photo).
1
Select [Q.MENU Settings].
≥ [] [] [Q.MENU Settings] [Item Customize
(Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]
2
Select the item position (1 to 12).
≥Press 3421 to select the position and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
≥Directions on the diagonal can also be selected using the joystick.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
546
3
Find the function to register.
≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is
categorized (Menu Items That Can Be Registered: 547) and
then press or .
≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing
34 or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Each press of [Q] switches between tabs [1] and [2].
4
Register menu items.
≥Press 34 to select an item and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
•
Select items with [>] by selecting the item again.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
547
Menu Items That Can Be Registered
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
•
[Exposure Comp.] (Exposure Compensation: 296)
•
[Sensitivity] (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
•
[White Balance] (White Balance (WB): 308)
•
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 316)
•
[Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 277)
•
[Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 116)
•
[Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 119)
•
[Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 117)
•
[Long Exposure NR] ([Long Exposure NR]: 263)
•
[Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 264)
•
[i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 299)
•
[Filter Effect] ([Filter Settings]: 329)
•
[Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 363)
•
[Synchro Scan] ([Synchro Scan]: 450)
[Focus/Shutter]
•
[AF Mode] (Selecting the AF Mode: 171)
•
[AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 174)
•
[Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 174)
•
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 160)
•
[AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 371)
•
[Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 202)
•
[Focus Peaking Sensitivity] ([Focus Peaking]: 202)
•
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] ([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 166)
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
548
[Flash]
•
[Flash Mode] ([Flash Mode]: 345)
•
[Flash Adjust.] ([Flash Adjust.]: 350)
•
[Wireless Flash Setup] (Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 353)
[Others (Photo)]
•
[Drive Mode Setting] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
•
[Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 245)
•
[Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 257)
•
[Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 271)
•
[Shutter Type] ([Shutter Type]: 259)
•
[Ex. Tele Conv.] (Extended Tele Conversion: 206)
[Image Format]
•
[Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 131)
•
[Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 133)
•
[Rec Quality (My List)] ([add to list]: 146)
•
[Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
•
[Time Code Display] (Time Code: 401)
[Audio]
•
[Audio Information] ([Audio Information]: 388)
•
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 380)
•
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 383)
•
[Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 384)
•
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 385)
•
[4ch Mic Input] ([4ch Mic Input]: 396)
•
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 394)
•
[Sound Monitoring Channel] ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 399)
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
549
[Others (Video)]
•
[Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 271)
•
[E-Stabilization (Video)] ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 272)
•
[Boost I.S. (Video)] ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 269)
•
[Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
•
[Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 432)
[2] tab
[Monitor / Display]
•
[Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 576)
•
[Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 585)
•
[Histogram] ([Histogram]: 577)
•
[Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 413)
•
[Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 417)
•
[Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 578)
•
[Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 578)
•
[Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 588)
•
[Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 579)
•
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] ([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 580)
•
[Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 590)
•
[Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 415)
•
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 441)
•
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([LUT View Assist (HDMI)]: 441)
•
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
•
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
•
[Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 583)
•
[I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 584)
•
[WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 409)
•
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 448)
•
[Color Bars] (Color Bars/Test Tone: 419)
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
550
[Lens / Others]
•
[Focus Ring Control] ([Focus Ring Control]: 594)
•
[Step Zoom] ([Step Zoom]: 208)
•
[Zoom Speed] ([Zoom Speed]: 208)
•
[Lens Information] ([Lens Information]: 274)
[Card/File]
•
[Destination Card Slot] (Switching the Card to Display: 482)
[IN/OUT]
•
[Wi-Fi] (Wi-Fi / Bluetooth: 634)
[Others]
•
[No Setting]
– Set when not using.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
551
Quick Menu Detailed Settings
Change the appearance of the Quick menu and the operation of
during menu display.
[] [] Select [Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style]
Changes the appearance of the Quick menu.
[MODE1]: Displays the live view and the menu simultaneously.
[MODE2]: Displays the menu in full screen.
[Front Dial Assignment]
Changes the operation of in the Quick menu.
[Item]: Selects menu items.
[Value]: Selects setting values.
[Item Customize (Photo)]
Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial is set to [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M].
[Item Customize (Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial is set to [ ]/[S&Q].
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
552
Custom Mode
≥ Register in Custom Mode: 553
≥ Using Custom Mode: 555
≥ Calling Up Settings: 556
Recording modes and menu settings that match your preferences can be
registered in Custom mode. You can use registered settings by switching
the mode dial to [C1] to [C3] modes.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
553
Register in Custom Mode
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
At the time of purchase, the default settings of the [P] mode menus are
registered with all Custom modes.
1
Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state
you wish to save.
2
Select [Save to Custom Mode].
≥ [] [] [Save to Custom Mode]
3
Register.
≥Select the save-to number and then press or .
•
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Press [DISP.] to change the Custom
mode name.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
Registering Instant Customization
When you press the Fn button registered with [Save to Custom Mode] in
the recording standby screen, you can quickly register the current
recording settings in the Custom mode. (Fn Buttons: 527)
•
You cannot register [iA] mode in Custom mode.
•
List of settings that can be registered in Custom mode (List of Default Settings/
Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 781)
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
554
Custom Mode Detailed Settings
You can create additional Custom mode sets, and how long to retain
temporarily changed settings details.
[] [] Select [Custom Mode Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom Mode]
Sets the number of Custom modes that can be registered in [C3].
A maximum of 10 sets can be registered; 3 sets are available as default settings.
[Edit Title]
Changes the Custom mode name.
A maximum of 22 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two
characters.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
[How to Reload Custom Mode]
Sets the timing at which to return the settings that were changed temporarily while the
Custom mode was being used to their registered settings.
[Change Recording Mode]/[Return from Sleep Mode]/[Turn the Power ON]
[Select Loading Details]
Sets the types of settings to call up with [Load Custom Mode].
[F / SS / ISO Sensitivity]: Enables calling up of aperture value, shutter speed, and
ISO sensitivity settings.
[White Balance]: Enables calling up of white balance settings.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
555
Using Custom Mode
Set the recording mode to [C1] to [C3].
≥ Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
≥ If [C3], the last-used Custom mode will be called up.
[C3] Custom Mode Selection
1 Set the recording mode to [C3].
2 Press .
•
The Custom mode selection menu appears.
3 Press 34 to select the Custom mode and then press or .
•
The selected Custom mode icon will be displayed on the recording screen.
Changing Registered Details
Registered settings do not change even if you change the camera settings
temporarily with the mode dial set to [C1] to [C3].
To change the registered details, overwrite them by using [Save to Custom
Mode] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
556
Calling Up Settings
Call up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode
and overwrite the current settings with these.
1
Set to the recording mode to be used.
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
2
Select [Load Custom Mode].
≥ [] [] [Load Custom Mode]
3
Select the Custom mode to call up.
≥Select the Custom mode and then press or .
•
Calling up of Custom modes is not possible between those created from [P]/[A]/
[S]/[M] modes and those created from [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
557
[Custom] Menu
≥ [Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 558
≥ [Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 564
≥ [Custom] menu ([Operation]): 570
≥ [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]): 576
≥ [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 587
≥ [Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 591
≥ [Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 592
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
558
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])
[Photo Style Settings]
: Default settings
[Show/Hide Photo Style]
[Vivid] / [Natural] / [L.ClassicNeo] /
[Flat] / [Landscape] / [Portrait] /
[L.Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome D] /
[L.Monochrome S] / [LEICA
Monochrome] / [Cinelike D2] / [Cinelike
V2] / [Like709] / [V-Log] / [REAL TIME
LUT] / [Hybrid Log Gamma] / [MY
PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10]
Sets Photo Style items to be displayed on the menu.
[My Photo Style Settings]
[Add Effects]
[Load Preset Setting]
Enables detailed image quality adjustment settings for My Photo Style.
[Add Effects]: Enables [Sensitivity] and [White Balance] settings in image quality
adjustment.
[Load Preset Setting]: Sets the timing at which image quality adjustment values
changed in My Photo Style are returned to their registered state.
[Reset Photo Style]
Returns details changed in [Photo Style] and [Photo Style Settings] to their default
settings.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
559
[LUT Library]
[ISO Increments]
[Extended ISO]
[Vlog_709] / [Set1] to [Set10]
Registers LUT files to the camera.
([LUT Library]: 335)
[1/3 EV] / [1 EV]
Changes the intervals between ISO sensitivity adjustment values.
[ON] / [OFF]
Extends the setting range of ISO sensitivity.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
560
[Exposure Offset Adjust.]
[Face Priority In Multi Metering]
[Multi Metering] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
[Center Weighted] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
[Spot] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
[Highlight Weighted] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
Adjusts the exposure level that is the standard exposure for each setting item of
[Metering Mode].
Adds the adjustment value from this function to the exposure compensation value
(Exposure Compensation: 296) when recording.
•
For video recording, it is not possible to add an adjustment value of a range that
exceeds ±3 EV.
[ON] / [OFF]
When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi-metering), the metering range for
automatic exposure is prioritized on the eyes and face.
When set to [OFF], the change to exposure caused by the [Eye/Face] automatic
detection function can be avoided.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
561
[AWB Lock Setting]
[Operation Syncs With Shutter]
[WHILE PRESSING] / [DURING BURST
SHOOTING] / [OFF]
[Lock Hold With Fn Button] [ON] / [OFF]
Fixes the white balance while you are pressing the shutter button or the Fn button
when white balance is auto ([AWB]/[AWBc]/[AWBw]).
This prevents the white balance from changing unintentionally while pressing the
shutter button halfway, during burst recording, or while recording videos.
[Operation Syncs With Shutter]
[WHILE PRESSING]: Fixes white balance while pressing the shutter button
(including while pressing halfway or during burst recording).
[DURING BURST SHOOTING]: Fixes white balance during burst recording.
[OFF]: White balance is not fixed.
[Lock Hold With Fn Button]
[ON]: When you press the Fn button registered with [AWB Lock], the white balance
is fixed. Press again to cancel the lock.
[OFF]: While you are pressing the Fn button registered with [AWB Lock], the white
balance is fixed.
•
[AWBL] is displayed on the screen while white balance is locked.
•
[Operation Syncs With Shutter] does not work in [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
562
[Color Space]
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
[sRGB] / [AdobeRGB]
This sets the method for correcting the color reproduction of the recorded images on
the screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer.
[sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar devices.
[AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as
professional printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than
sRGB.
•
Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
•
When the following functions are being used, the setting is fixed to [sRGB]:
– Video recording
– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
[ON] / [OFF]
This resets the exposure value when you change the recording mode or turn off the
camera.
[ON] / [OFF]
Selects the setting method for aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity
when recording video in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with the values set in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
563
[CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.] []/ []
[White Balance] []/ []
[Photo Style] []/ []
[Metering Mode] []/ []
[AF Mode] []/ []
Content set in [ ] mode can be separated from when taking pictures.
(Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 367)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
564
[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter])
[Focus/Shutter Priority]
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
: Default settings
[AFS] [FOCUS] / [BALANCE] / [RELEASE]
[AFC] [FOCUS] / [BALANCE] / [RELEASE]
This sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during AF.
[FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved.
[BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing
and shutter release timing.
[RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.
[ON] / [OFF]
This stores separate AF area positions (MF positions for MF Assist) for when the
camera is held vertically and when it is held horizontally.
([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 196)
[ON] / [OFF]
This sets button operations for AF/AE Lock.
Turning this [ON] maintains the lock after releasing the button until it is pressed
again.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
565
[AF+MF]
[MF Assist]
[ON] / [OFF]
When the focus mode is set to [AFS], you can fine-adjust the focus manually during
AF Lock.
•
When the shutter button is pressed halfway
•
When [AF ON] is pressed
•
When locked using the Fn button [AF LOCK] or [AF/AE LOCK]
[Focus Ring]
(When an interchangeable lens with a
focus ring is attached)
[ON] / [OFF]
[AF Mode] [ON] / [OFF]
[Press Joystick] [ON] / [OFF]
[MF Assist Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
This sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
[Focus Ring]: The screen is enlarged by focusing with the lens.
[AF Mode]: The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ].
[Press Joystick]: Press the joystick to enlarge the display. (if [Joystick Setting] is
set to [D.FOCUS Movement]) ([Joystick Setting]: 574)
[MF Assist Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode) of
MF Assist (enlarged screen).
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
566
[MF Guide]
[Focus Ring Lock]
[Show/Hide AF Mode]
[ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
* Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
During MF, MF Guide, which acts as a guide to recording distance, is displayed on
the screen. You can select from meters or feet for the display unit.
[ON] / [OFF]
This disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the focus.
•
[MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus ring is locked.
[Tracking] [ON] / [OFF]
[Full Area AF] [ON] / [OFF]
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] [ON] / [OFF]
[Zone] [ON] / [OFF]
[1-Area+] [ON] / [OFF]
[Pinpoint] [ON] / [OFF]
Sets the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
567
[Pinpoint AF Setting]
[AF-Point Scope Setting]
[Shutter AF]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [LONG] / [MID] / [SHORT]
[Pinpoint AF Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
Changes enlarged screen settings displayed when AF mode is [ ].
[Pinpoint AF Time]: Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
[Pinpoint AF Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode)
of the enlarged screen.
[Keep Enlarged Display] [ON]/[OFF]
[PIP Display] [FULL]/[PIP]
Changes the enlarged screen settings of AF-Point Scope ([AF-Point Scope]: 158).
[Keep Enlarged Display]: Setting this to [ON] maintains the enlarged screen after
pressing the Fn button until it is pressed again.
[PIP Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode
*1
/windowed mode
*2
) of the
enlarged screen.
*1 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 10×.
*2 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.
[ON] / [OFF]
This adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
568
[Human Eye Detection Display]
[Half-Press Shutter]
[Assign REC to Shutter Button]
[Quick AF]
[ON] / [OFF]
When set to [OFF], you can make the cross that appears on human eyes when
focused disappear by pressing the shutter button halfway, etc.
[ON] / [OFF]
You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter button halfway.
[ON] / [OFF]
Use the shutter button for the start/stop operation of video recording in the [ ]
mode.
The start/stop operation of video recording using the shutter button can be disabled
when set to [OFF].
[ON] / [OFF]
When the amount of camera shake becomes small, the camera will automatically
adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is
pressed.
•
The battery will drain faster than usual.
•
This function is not available in the following cases:
– In preview mode
– In low light situations
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
569
[Eye Sensor AF]
[Looped Focus Frame]
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF]
When looking through the viewfinder, if the eye sensor operates, then AF will
function.
•
[Eye Sensor AF] may not work in low light situations.
[ON] / [OFF]
When moving the AF area, MF Assist, or video enlarged display of live view, this
enables looping from one edge to the opposite edge of the screen.
[Keep Enlarged Display] [ON] / [OFF]
[PIP Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
Sets the operation of the function for enlarging the video live view ([Enlarged Live
Display(Video)]: 372).
[Keep Enlarged Display]
[ON]: Enlarges display after releasing the Fn button until the button is pressed
again.
[OFF]: Enlarges display just while the Fn button is being pressed.
[PIP Display]
Sets the way the enlarged screen is displayed (full screen mode/windowed mode).
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
570
[Custom] menu ([Operation])
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Touch Settings]
: Default settings
[Layout Style] [MODE1] / [MODE2]
[Front Dial Assignment] [Item] / [Value]
[Item Customize (Photo)]
[Item Customize (Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu.
(Quick Menu Customization: 545)
[Touch Screen] [ON] / [OFF]
[Touch Tab] [ON] / [OFF]
[Touch AF] [AF] / [AF+AE]
[Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT] / [OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7] /
[OFF]
Enables touch operation on the monitor display.
[Touch Screen]: All touch operations.
[Touch Tab]: Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right side of the screen.
[Touch AF]: Operation to optimize the focus ([AF]) for a touched subject.
Alternatively, operation to optimize both the focus and brightness ([AF+AE]).
(Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 193)
[Touch Pad AF]: Touch pad operation during viewfinder display. (Moving the AF
Area Position with the Touch Pad: 194)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
571
[Operation Lock Setup]
[Fn Button Set]
[Cursor] []/ []
[Joystick] []/ []
[Touch Screen] []/ []
[Dial] []/ []
[DISP. Button] []/ []
This sets the control functions to be disabled with the Fn button [Operation Lock].
(Only for recording screen)
[Cursor]: Cursor buttons, [MENU/SET] button, and
[Joystick]: Joystick
[Touch Screen]: Touch screen
[Dial]: , , and
[DISP. Button]: [DISP.] button
[Setting in REC mode]
[Setting in PLAY mode]
Registers a function to the Fn button.
(Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 530)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
572
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]
[ISO Displayed Setting]
[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]
[WHILE PRESSING] / [AFTER PRESSING1] / [AFTER PRESSING2]
This sets the operation to be performed when [WB] (White balance), [ISO] (ISO
sensitivity) or [ ] (Exposure compensation) is pressed.
[WHILE PRESSING]: Allows you to change the setting while pressing and holding
the button. Release the button to confirm the settings value, and to return to the
recording screen.
[AFTER PRESSING1]: Press the button to change settings. Press the button again
to confirm the settings value, and to return to the recording screen.
[AFTER PRESSING2]: Press the button to change settings. Each press of the
button switches the settings value. (Except that of exposure compensation) To
confirm your selection and return to the recording screen, press the shutter button
halfway.
[Front/Rear Dials]
[ / ] / [ / ] / [OFF/ ] /
[/]/ [/OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the setting screen for ISO sensitivity.
Assigning [ ] lets you change [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting].
[Cursor Buttons (Up/Down)] []/ [OFF]
This sets the operations of the 34 buttons in the exposure compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you set exposure bracketing.
[Front/Rear Dials]
[ / ]/ [ / ]/ [OFF/ ]/
[/ ]/ [/OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the exposure compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you adjust flash output.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
573
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)]
[SET1] / [SET2] / [SET3] / [SET4] /
[SET5]
Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
: Program Shift, F: Aperture value, SS: Shutter speed
[P] [A] [S] [M]
[SET1]
FSSF
FSSSS
[SET2]
—F—F
—SSSS
[SET3]
— — SS SS
F—F
[SET4]
——— F
FSSSS
[SET5]
FSSF
———SS
[Rotation (F/SS)] []/ []
Changes the rotational directions of the dials for aperture value and shutter speed
adjustment.
[Control Dial Assignment]
[ ] ([Headphone Volume]) /
[ / ] ([Exposure / Aperture]) /
[ ] ([Exposure Comp.]) /
[ ] ([Sensitivity]) /
[ ] ([Focus Frame Size])
Sets the function to be assigned to on the recording screen.
[/]: In [M] mode, this assigns the operation to adjust the aperture value. In
other than [M] mode, this assigns the operation of exposure compensation.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
574
[Joystick Setting]
[Exposure Comp.] []/ []/ [OFF]
Assigns exposure compensation to or . (Except in [M] mode)
•
The [Assign Dial (F/SS)] setting takes priority.
[Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[]
[]
In the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the functions to be registerd
temporarily to or . (Register Functions to the Dials: 542)
[Rotation (Menu Operation)]
[]/ []/
[]/ []
Changes the rotational direction of the dials when operating menus.
[D.FOCUS Movement] / [Fn] / [MENU] / [OFF]
Sets the joystick movement on the recording screen.
[D.FOCUS Movement]: Moves the AF area and MF Assist. (AF Area Operations:
188, Record Using MF: 197)
[Fn]: Operates as Fn buttons.
[MENU]: Operates as . Operations that can be performed by moving the
joystick are disabled.
[OFF]: Disables the joystick.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
576
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)])
[Auto Review]
[Constant Preview]
: Default settings
[Duration Time (photo)] [HOLD] / [5SEC] to [0.5SEC] / [OFF]
[Playback Operation Priority] [ON] / [OFF]
This displays an image immediately after it is recorded.
[Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review when taking pictures.
[Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON], you can toggle the
playback screen during Auto Review, or delete pictures.
•
If you set [Duration Time (photo)] to [HOLD], the image recorded stays displayed
until the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Effect]
[Preview While MF Assist]
You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in [A]/
[M] mode.
You can also confirm the shutter speed at the same time when in [M] mode.
•
You can set the combination of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect in
[Effect].
•
Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when [Preview While MF Assist] is
set to [ON].
•
The preview of the shutter speed effect does not work when using a flash.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
577
[Histogram]
[ON] / [OFF]
This displays the histogram.
Turning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen.
Press 3421 to set the position.
Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.
•
You can also move the position by dragging the histogram on the recording
screen.
•
A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis, and the
number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
By looking at the distribution of the graph, you can determine the current
exposure.
(A) Dark
(B) Bright
•
When the recorded image and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange:
– During exposure compensation
– When the flash fires
– When the standard exposure is not achieved, such as in low light situations.
•
When the following function is being used, the [Histogram] is not available:
– [WFM/Vector Scope]
•
The histogram is an approximation in the recording mode.
(A) (B)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
578
[Photo Grid Line]
[Live View Boost]
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
Sets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording screen.
When using [ ], you can press 3421 to set the position.
Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.
•
When using [ ], you can also drag [ ] on the grid lines on the recording
screen to move the position.
[MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
[SET] [P/A/S/M] / [M]
Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check subjects and compositions
even in low-light environment.
[MODE1]: Setting for low brightness, with priority given to a soft display.
[MODE2]: Setting for high brightness, with priority given to image visibility.
•
You can change the recording mode in which [Live View Boost] works by using
[SET].
•
This mode does not affect recorded images.
•
Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the recorded image.
•
This function does not work in the following cases:
– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button is pressed halfway, for
example)
– When recording a video
– When using [Filter Settings]
– When displaying the shutter speed effect of [Constant Preview]
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
579
[Night Mode]
[Monitor] [ON] / [OFF]
[LVF] [ON] / [OFF]
Displays the monitor and viewfinder in red.
In dark environments, this reduces brightness of the screen that can make the
surroundings difficult to see.
You can also set the luminance of the red display.
1 Press 3421 to select [ON] on the monitor or viewfinder (LVF).
2 Press [DISP.] to display the brightness adjustment screen.
•
Display the monitor to adjust the monitor, and display the viewfinder to adjust
the viewfinder.
3 Press 21 to adjust luminance and then press or .
•
This effect is not applied to images output via HDMI.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
580
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
[LVF Disp. Set] []/ []
[Monitor Disp. Set] []/ []
Selects whether to show the live view without covering the information display, or to
display over the entire screen.
[]: Scales down images slightly so you can better review the composition of the
images.
[]: Scales images to fill the entire screen so you can see their details.
•
You can assign the function that switches the currently displayed monitor or
viewfinder display style to an Fn button. ([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 537)
999
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
999
±
0
L
AFSAFS
FINE
ISO
AUTO
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
581
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF]
[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF]
You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of the
monitor during recording.
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips horizontally according to the angle to which
the monitor is opened or closed.
[ON]: The screen is flipped horizontally all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips vertically according to the angle to which the
monitor is rotated.
[ON]: The screen is flipped vertically all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
•
The settings for this function are not reflected in the playback screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
582
[Expo.Meter]
[Focal Length]
[Blinking Highlights]
[ON] / [OFF]
This displays the exposure meter.
•
Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting
aperture, and setting shutter speed.
•
If no operations are performed for a certain period of time, the exposure meter
disappears.
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the focal length on the recording screen during zoom control.
[ON] / [OFF]
Overexposed areas appear blinking in black and white during Auto Review or
playback.
•
The display without the highlights is added to the display shown when [DISP.] is
pressed in the playback screen.
Use this to delete the highlight display. (Playback Screen: 88)
F5.630
SSSS
FF
125 60 30 15 8
5.64.0 8.0 112.8
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
583
[Sheer Overlay]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Transparency]
[Image Select]
[Reset at Power Off]
[Disp. Image (shutter-press)]
A picture that has been recorded or an image extracted from a video is overlayed on
the recording screen.
1 Use [Image Select] and select a picture or video to display.
•
Press 21 to select a picture or video and then press or to
confirm.
2 (When a video is selected) Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a
picture.
•
Press 3 to pause playback.
•
To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward
frame-by-frame).
3 (When a video is selected) Set a picture.
•
Press or .
•
If you set [Disp. Image (shutter-press)] to [OFF], [Sheer Overlay] is canceled while
the shutter button is being pressed halfway or pressed fully.
•
The picture extracted from video is saved.
•
When the following functions are being used, [Sheer Overlay] is not available:
– Video recording
– [Stop Motion Animation]
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
584
[I.S. Status Scope]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays a reference point (C) on the recording screen in order to let you check for
camera shake.
•
[I.S. Status Scope] does not work in the following cases:
– When [Operation Mode] in [Image Stabilizer] is set to [OFF]
– When the O.I.S. switch on the lens is [OFF]
•
When the following functions are being used, [I.S. Status Scope] is not available:
– Video recording
– High Resolution mode (when [Handheld High-Res] is set to [OFF])
(C)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
585
[Level Gauge]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the level gauge which is useful in correcting camera tilt.
(D) Horizontal
(E) Vertical
(F) Green (no tilt)
•
Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approx. ±1o.
•
When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or downwards, the level gauge
may not be displayed correctly.
•
You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted values in [Level Gauge
Adjust.] in the [Setup] ([Monitor / Display]) menu. ([Level Gauge Adjust.]: 606)
(D)
(E)
(F)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
586
[Luminance Spot Meter]
[Framing Outline]
[Show/Hide Monitor Layout]
[ON] / [OFF]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small area.
([Luminance Spot Meter]: 413)
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the outline for the live view.
[Control Panel] [ON] / [OFF]
[Black Screen] [ON] / [OFF]
Displays the control panel and black screen when switching between displays using
[DISP.] button. (Recording Screen: 86)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
587
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
[V-Log View Assist]
[HLG View Assist]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
: Default settings
[LUT Select]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [ON] / [OFF]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON] / [OFF]
You can show images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder, or output them
via HDMI.
([V-Log View Assist]: 441)
[Monitor] [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
[HDMI] [AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted color
gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs these over
HDMI.
([HLG View Assist]: 445)
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
This displays the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens on this camera.
([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 448)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
588
[Monochrome Live View]
[Center Marker]
[Safety Zone Marker]
[ON] / [OFF]
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
•
If you use the HDMI output during recording, the output image will not be
displayed in black and white.
•
[Monochrome Live View] is not available when [Night Mode] is used.
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
The shape of the marker can be changed.
[ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
[SET] [Size]
[95%]
[90%]
[80%]
This displays the safety zone, which shows a guide to the area that would be shown
on a household TV, on the recording screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
589
[Frame Marker]
[Zebra Pattern]
[WFM/Vector Scope]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Frame Aspect]
[Frame Color]
[Frame Mask]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen.
[Frame Aspect] can also be customized.
([Frame Marker]: 417)
[ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] / [ZEBRA1+2] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Zebra 1]
[Zebra 2]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.
([Zebra Pattern]: 415)
[WAVE] / [VECTOR] / [OFF]
This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording screen.
([WFM/Vector Scope]: 409)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
590
[Color Bars]
[Video-Priority Display]
[Red REC Frame Indicator]
[SMPTE] / [EBU] / [ARIB]
The color bars are displayed on the recording screen.
(Color Bars/Test Tone: 419)
[ON] / [OFF]
When in [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, switch the recording screen display and the
control panel to suit video recording, as with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
The playback screen also switches to a display that prioritizes video.
•
When set to a setting where video recording is not available, [Video-Priority
Display] is fixed to [OFF].
•
[Video-Priority Display] works only during video recording when using the following
functions:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
[ON] / [OFF]
A red frame is displayed on the recording screen that indicates that video is being
recorded.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
591
[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])
[HDMI Rec Output]
: Default settings
[Info Display] (Outputting the Camera
Information Display via HDMI: 469)
[ON] / [OFF]
[HDMI Recording Control] (Outputting
Control Information to an External
Recorder: 470)
[ON] / [OFF]
[Sound Output (HDMI)] (Outputting
Audio via HDMI: 471)
[ON] / [OFF]
[Enlarged Live Display] (Outputting the
Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI:
471)
[MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
Sets HDMI output during recording.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
592
[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others])
[Lens Focus Resume]
[Power Zoom Lens]
: Default settings
[ON] / [OFF]
The camera saves the focus position when you turn it off.
When using an interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom, the zoom
position is also saved.
[Step Zoom] [ON] / [OFF]
[Zoom Speed]
[Photo]: [H] / [M] / [L]
[Video]: [H] / [M] / [L]
[Zoom Ring] [ON] / [OFF]
This sets the zoom operation when using a lens that supports power zoom
(motorized zoom).
([Power Zoom Lens]: 208)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
593
[Lens Fn Button Setting]
[Aperture Ring Increment]
[Focus Stop] / [AF Mode] / [AF Detection Setting] / [Detecting Subject] / [Focus
Ring Lock] / [AE LOCK] / [AF LOCK] / [AF/AE LOCK] / [AF-ON] / [AF-ON : Near
Shift] / [AF-ON : Far Shift] / [AF-Point Scope] / [Focus Area Set] / [Enlarged Live
Display(Video)] / [Image Stabilizer] / [Preview] / [Preview Aperture Effect] / [No
Setting] / [Off (Disable Press and Hold)] / [Restore to Default]
Register a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens.
•
When [Focus Stop] is set, focus is fixed while the focus button is being pressed.
[SMOOTH] / [1/3EV]
Stops for setting the aperture value with the aperture ring can be changed.
[SMOOTH]: You can finely adjust the aperture value.
[1/3EV]: You can set the aperture value at 1/3 EV stops.
•
This can be used when a lens compatible with a clickless aperture ring (H-X1025/
H-X2550: optional) is attached. (As of September 2023)
•
When taking pictures, this setting will take effect if the aperture ring is set to a
position other than [A].
•
If the position of the aperture ring is set to [A], the aperture value set by the
camera will take effect and can be adjusted like with [1/3EV].
•
During video recording, fine adjustments can be made like with [SMOOTH].
•
When [SMOOTH] is set, fractions of aperture values are not displayed on the
screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
594
[Focus Ring Control]
[AF Micro Adjustment]
[NON-LINEAR] / [LINEAR]
[SET] [90°] to [1080°] ([300°]) / [Maximum]
Sets the amount of movement for focusing using the focus ring. (When using
supported lenses)
[NON-LINEAR]: Focus responds by accelerating according to rotation speed of the
focus ring.
[LINEAR]: Focus responds at a constant amount according to the rotational angle of
the focus ring.
•
When using lenses equipped with focus clutch mechanisms, set the lens to AF
and the camera to MF.
[SET]: Sets the rotational angle of the focus ring for when [LINEAR] is selected.
•
Angles that cannot be set with the attached lens are not displayed.
•
For information on lenses that support focus ring control, refer to the following
support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
[ALL] / [ADJUST BY LENS] / [OFF]
You can make fine adjustments to the focus point when focusing with phase
detection AF.
([AF Micro Adjustment]: 167)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
595
[Lens Information]
[Lens Info. Confirmation]
[Vertical Position Info (Video)]
[Lens1] to [Lens12] ([Lens1])
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera,
register the lens information in the camera.
•
This is linked with [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer] under the [Photo]
([Others (Photo)]) menu. ([Lens Information]: 274)
[ON] / [OFF]
When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function with
this camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens information is displayed
when you turn on the camera.
[ON] / [OFF]
You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information
during video recording.
[ON]: Records vertical orientation information. Videos recorded with the camera held
vertically will be automatically played back vertically on the PC, smartphone, etc.
during playback.
[OFF]: Does not record vertical orientation information.
•
On the playback screen of the camera, only the thumbnail display is played in
vertical orientation.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
597
[Setup] menu ([Card/File])
[Card Format]
: Default settings
[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]
Formats the card (initialization).
Format the cards with the camera before use.
•
When a card is formatted, all of the data stored in the card is erased and
cannot be restored.
Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the card.
•
Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.
•
Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
•
If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with the
camera.
•
You can format the card while keeping the camera settings information stored on
the card. ([Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 613)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
598
[Double Card Slot Function]
[USB-SSD]
[Recording Method] [ ] / [ ] / [ ]
This sets the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
[Relay Rec]: Selects the priority of card slots for recording.
[Destination Card Slot]: [ ]/[ ]
Relays recording to the card in the other card slot after the first card runs out of free
space.
•
You can assign the function that changes the card which is prioritized for recording
to an Fn button. ([Destination Card Slot]: 538)
[Backup Rec]: Records the same images to both cards simultaneously.
[Allocation Rec]: Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for
different image formats.
[JPEG Destination]/[RAW Destination]/[Video Destination]
Notes about Backup Recording
•
We recommend using cards with the same Speed Class rating and capacity.
If the card Speed Class or capacity is insufficient when video recording, recording
to both cards stops.
•
When using the following combinations of cards, backup recording for videos is
not available:
– SD/SDHC memory cards and SDXC memory cards
[ON] / [OFF]
The commercially available external SSD that is connected to the USB port can be
used when this is set to [ON]. (Using an External SSD (Commercially Available):
472)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
599
[Folder / File Settings]
[Select Folder] / [Create a New Folder] / [File Name Setting]
Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
Folder name
(1) Folder number (3 numeric characters, 100 to 999)
(2) 5-character user-defined segment
File name
(3) Color space ([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)
(4) 3-character user-defined segment
(5) File number (4 numeric characters, 0001 to 9999)
(6) Extension
[Select Folder]: Selects a folder for storing images.
•
When [Double Card Slot Function] is set to [Allocation Rec], [Select Folder (Slot
1)] and [Select Folder (Slot 2)] will be displayed.
[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number.
•
If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for resetting the folder
number is displayed.
[OK]:
Increments the folder number without changing the 5-character user-defined
segment ((2) above).
[Change]:
Changes the 5-character user-defined segment ((2) above). This will also increment
the folder number.
100ABCDE
(1) (2)
PABC0001.JPG
(3) (5) (6)(4)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
600
[File Name Setting]
[Folder Number Link]:
Uses the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above) to set the folder number
((1) above).
[User Setting]:
Changes the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above).
•
Follow the steps on “Entering Characters” when the character entry screen is
displayed. (Entering Characters: 100)
Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ]
•
Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
•
File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of
recording.
If you change the storage folder, a number continuing on from the last file number
will be assigned.
•
In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be
created automatically when the next file is saved:
– The number of files in the current folder reaches 1000.
– The file number reaches 9999.
•
New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the
way up to 999.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
•
[Select Folder] is not available when [Backup Rec] in [Double Card Slot Function]
is being used.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
601
[File Number Reset]
[Copyright Information]
[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]
Refresh the folder number within the DCIM folder and reset the file number to 0001.
•
When the folder number reaches 999, the file number cannot be reset.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
•
To reset the folder number to 100:
1 Perform [Card Format] to format the card. ([Card Format]: 597)
2 Perform [File Number Reset] to reset the file number.
3 Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.
[Artist] [ON] / [OFF] / [SET]
[Copyright Holder] [ON] / [OFF] / [SET]
[Display Copyright Info.]
Records the names of the artist and the copyright holder in the image Exif data.
•
You can register names from [SET] in [Artist] and [Copyright Holder].
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
•
Up to 63 characters may be entered.
•
You can confirm registered copyright information in [Display Copyright Info.].
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
602
[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display])
[Power Save Mode]
: Default settings
[Sleep Mode]
[10MIN.] / [5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] /
[OFF]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON] / [OFF]
[Auto LVF/Monitor Off] [5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / [OFF]
[Power Save LVF Shooting]
[Time to Sleep]
[Method of Activation]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or
turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a set time.
([Power Save Mode]: 53)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
603
[Thermal Management]
[Monitor Frame Rate]
[Recording Max Temperature] [HIGH] / [STANDARD]
This sets the temperature during video recording at which the camera automatically
stops recording.
When set to [HIGH], recording continues even if the camera temperature rises.
[Recording Max Temperature]
[HIGH]: Sets the temperature at which recording is stopped due to the camera
temperature rising to a higher temperature.
•
You can record for a longer time, but the camera body will become hot.
Use a tripod, etc., because recording with a handheld camera for long periods can
cause low temperature burns.
[STANDARD]: Recording stops when the camera temperature rises.
•
Set to [STANDARD] when recording with a handheld camera.
[30fps] / [60fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the monitor when recording pictures.
[30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.
[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
•
When the following function is being used, [Monitor Frame Rate] is not available:
– HDMI output
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
604
[LVF Frame Rate]
[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]
[60fps] / [120fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the viewfinder when recording pictures.
[60fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.
[120fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
•
[LVF120] is displayed on the viewfinder when it is displayed at [120fps].
•
When set to [120fps], the images in the viewfinder will not be as smooth as with
[60fps], but there will be no change to the images recorded.
•
When the following functions are being used, [LVF Frame Rate] is not available:
– HDMI output
– While connected to Wi-Fi
[Brightness] / [Contrast] / [Saturation] / [Red Tint] / [Blue Tint]
This adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of the monitor/viewfinder.
1 Press 34 to select the setting item, and press 21 to adjust.
2 Press or to confirm the setting.
•
It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the
viewfinder is in use.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
605
[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance]
[AUTO] / [−3] to [+3]
Adjusts monitor/viewfinder luminance.
[AUTO]: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is
around the camera.
•
Adjusts the monitor luminance when displaying the monitor, and the viewfinder
luminance when displaying the viewfinder.
•
When either [AUTO] is set, or the adjusted value is set to positive side, the usage
period will shorten.
•
When [Night Mode] is being used, [Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] are not
available.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
606
[Eye Sensor]
[Level Gauge Adjust.]
[Sensitivity] [HIGH] / [LOW]
This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[LVF/Monitor Switch]
[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic
viewfinder/monitor switching) / [LVF]
(viewfinder) / [MON] (monitor)
This will set the method for switching between the viewfinder and monitor.
•
If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will also
switch.
[Adjust.]
Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press or . The level gauge
will be adjusted.
[Level Gauge Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
607
[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT])
[Beep]
[Headphone Volume]
: Default settings
[Beep Volume] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)
[AF Beep Volume] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)
[AF Beep Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 1) / [ ] (Pattern 2) /
[ ] (Pattern 3)
[E-Shutter Vol] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)
[E-Shutter Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 1) / [ ] (Pattern 2) /
[ ] (Pattern 3)
Sets the beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds.
[0] to [LEVEL15] ([LEVEL3])
Adjusts the volume when headphones are connected.
(Adjusting the Headphone Volume: 398)
•
This functions in tandem with [Headphone Volume] in the [Video] ([Audio]) menu.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
608
[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]
[Wi-Fi]
[Bluetooth]
[COMBINED WITH REC] / [CH1/CH2] / [CH3/CH4] / [CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4] /
[CH1] / [CH2] / [CH3] / [CH4] / [CH1+CH2] / [CH3+CH4] / [CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4]
During video playback, this selects the audio channel output to the speaker on the
camera or the headphones.
For information about output audio ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 399)
[COMBINED WITH REC]: Outputs audio with the same settings as [Sound
Monitoring Channel] in the [Video] ([Audio]) menu.
•
You cannot change settings during video playback.
•
The L channel and R channel are mixed for audio output from the camera’s
speaker.
[Wi-Fi Function] (Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 644, Wi-Fi
Connections: 673)
[Wi-Fi Setup] ([Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 685)
[Bluetooth] (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 638)
[Send Image (Smartphone)] (Using the menu to transfer easily: 651)
[Remote Wakeup] ([Remote Wakeup]: 665)
[Returning from Sleep Mode] (Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]:
658)
[Auto Transfer] ([Auto Transfer]: 661)
[Location Logging] ([Location Logging]: 663)
[Auto Clock Set] ([Auto Clock Set]: 667)
[Wi-Fi network settings]
[Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi access point. Wireless access points
used to connect the camera to Wi-Fi networks will be registered automatically.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
609
[USB]
[Battery Use Priority]
[USB Mode]
[ ] [Select on connection] / [ ]
[PC(Storage)] / [ ] [PC(Tether)]
This sets the communication method to be used when the USB connection cable is
connected.
[ ] [Select on connection]: Select this setting to select the USB communication
system when connecting to another device. (USB port: 689)
[ ] [PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
(Importing Images to a PC: 694)
[ ] [PC(Tether)]: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with
“LUMIX Tether”. (Tethered Recording: 700)
[USB Power Supply] [ON] / [OFF]
Provides power from the USB connection cable.
•
Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied when the AC adaptor is
connected.
[BODY] / [BG]
Selects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both the camera
and the Battery Grip.
(Selecting Battery Usage Priority: 707)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
610
[HDMI Connection]
[Output Resolution(Playback)]
[AUTO] / [C4K/60p] / [C4K/50p] / [C4K/
30p] / [C4K/25p] / [C4K/24p] / [4K/60p] /
[4K/50p] / [4K/30p] / [4K/25p] / [4K/24p] /
[1080/120p] / [1080/100p] / [1080p] /
[1080i] / [720p] / [576p] / [480p]
Sets the HDMI output resolution for playback.
[AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected external device. When
playing back pictures, output is at a maximum resolution of 8K.
•
The items you can select depend on the [System Frequency] setting.
•
When playing back video recorded at C4K/120p, 4K/120p, C4K/100p, or 4K/100p,
according to the playback image quality and playback environment, the video is
down-converted for output to 4K/60p or less.
•
If no image appears on the external device with [AUTO], switch to a setting other
than [AUTO] to set a format supported by your external device.
(Please also refer to the operating instructions for the external device.)
•
It may not be possible to play back video, depending on the external device
connected.
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON] / [OFF]
Images with LUT (Look-Up Table) file applied are output when you play back videos
recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log].
•
This is linked with [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] in [V-Log View Assist] under the
[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([V-Log View Assist]: 441)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
611
[Network Connection Light]
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and
brightness for display.
•
This is linked with [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] under the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu. ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [ON] / [OFF]
You can use the device remote control to operate the camera when it is connected to
a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI cable.
(Using VIERA Link: 692)
[Background Color(Playback)] []/ []
Sets the color of the bands displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of
images output on an external device.
•
We recommend setting to [ ] to prevent burn-in on the screen of the output
destination.
[Photo Luminance Level] [0-255] / [16-255]
Sets the level of luminance when outputting pictures to external devices.
[ON] / [OFF]
This will turn on the network connection light.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
612
[Setup] menu ([Setting])
[Save to Custom Mode]
[Load Custom Mode]
[Custom Mode Settings]
[C1] / [C2] / [C3-1] to [C3-10]
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
(Register in Custom Mode: 553)
[C1] / [C2] / [C3-1] to [C3-10]
Calls up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode and
overwrites the current settings with these.
(Calling Up Settings: 556)
[Limit No. of Custom Mode]
[Edit Title]
[How to Reload Custom Mode]
[Select Loading Details]
Sets the ease of use of Custom mode.
(Custom Mode Detailed Settings: 554)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
613
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Reset]
[Save] / [Load] / [Delete] / [Keep Settings While Format]
Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the same
settings on multiple cameras.
[Save]: Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
•
If saving new data, then select [New File], and if overwriting an existing file, select
that existing file.
•
When [New File] is selected, a screen to select the file name to save as is
displayed.
[OK]:
Saves using the file name on the screen.
[Change the file name]:
Changes the file name and saves the file.
•
Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, up to
8 characters
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
[Load]: Loads the settings information on the card and copies it to the camera.
[Delete]: Deletes settings information on the card.
[Keep Settings While Format]: When formatting the card, formats the card while
keeping camera settings information stored on the card.
•
Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.
•
Up to 10 instances of settings information can be saved on one card.
•
List of functions for which saving of settings information is possible (List of
Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 781)
Returns the camera to its default settings.
([Reset]: 99)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
614
[Setup] menu ([Others])
[Clock Set]
[Time Zone]
Sets the date and time.
(Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): 68)
Sets the time zone.
Press 21 to select the time zone and then press or to confirm.
(A) Current time
(B) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
•
If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move forward
by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
(A)
(B)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
615
[System Frequency]
[Pixel Refresh]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] / [50.00Hz (PAL)] / [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
* Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played back
with the camera.
([System Frequency]: 129)
This optimizes the image sensor and image processing.
•
The image sensor and image processing are optimized when the camera is
purchased. Use this function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get
recorded.
•
Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
616
[Sensor Cleaning]
[Language]
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the
image sensor is performed.
•
You can use this function when the dust is particularly noticeable.
•
Turn the camera off and on when finished.
This set the language displayed on the screen.
•
If you set a different language by mistake, select [ ] from the menu icons to set
the desired language.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
617
[Firmware Version]
[Approved Regulations]
[Firmware Update] / [Software info]
You can check the firmware versions of the camera and lens.
In addition, you can update the firmware, and display information about the camera
software.
[Firmware Update]: Updates firmware.
1 Download the firmware. (Firmware of Your Camera/Lens: 18)
2 Save the firmware to the root directory of the card (the first folder that appears
when you access the card on your PC), and then insert the card into the
camera.
3 Select [Firmware Update], press or , and then select [Yes] to update
the firmware.
[Software info]: Displays information about the camera software.
•
When a supported optional item (XLR Microphone Adaptor, etc.) is attached to the
camera, you can also check its firmware version.
Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
* Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
displayed due to differences in specifications.
Camera Customization – My Menu
618
My Menu
≥ Registration in My Menu: 618
≥ Edit My Menu: 619
Register frequently-used menus in My Menu.
A maximum of 23 items can be registered.
Registered menus can be called up from [ ] to [ ].
Registration in My Menu
1
Select [Add].
≥ [] [] [Add]
2
Register.
≥Select the menu to register and then press or .
Calling up My Menu
Call up the menus registered in My Menu.
[] [ ]/[ ]/[ ] Registered menus
Camera Customization – My Menu
619
Edit My Menu
You can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary
menus.
[] Select [ ]
[Add]
Selects and registers the menus to be displayed in My Menu.
[Sorting]
Changes the order of My Menu.
Select the menu to change, then set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes menus that are registered to My Menu.
[Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes.
[Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.
[Display from My Menu]
Displays My Menu first when displaying a menu.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
620
List of Menu
Camera customization and many function settings are performed with
menus on this camera.
This chapter introduces all of the menu items in a list format.
≥ [Photo] menu: 621
≥ [Video] menu: 623
≥ [Custom] menu: 626
≥ [Setup] menu: 630
≥ [My Menu]: 632
≥ [Playback] menu: 633
•
For information about menu operation methods (Menu Operation Methods: 94)
•
Refer to the “Materials” chapter for the following lists:
– List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 781
– List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 805
List of Menu – [Photo] menu
621
[Photo] menu
[Image Quality]
≥ [Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 316)
≥ [Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 277)
≥ [Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 116)
≥ [Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 119)
≥ [Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 117)
≥ [High Resolution Mode Setting] (High Resolution mode: 223)
≥ [Long Exposure NR] ([Long Exposure NR]: 263)
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] ([ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 306)
≥ [Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 264)
≥ [i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 299)
≥ [Vignetting Comp.] ([Vignetting Comp.]: 338)
≥ [Diffraction Compensation] ([Diffraction Compensation]: 339)
≥ [Filter Settings] ([Filter Settings]: 329)
[Focus]
≥ [AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 174)
≥ [Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 174)
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 160)
≥ [Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 163)
≥ [AF Assist Light] ([AF Assist Light]: 165)
≥ [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 202)
≥ [Focus Frame Moving Speed] ([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 166)
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings
are synchronized.
List of Menu – [Photo] menu
622
[Flash]
≥ [Flash Mode] ([Flash Mode]: 345)
≥ [Firing Mode] ([Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 348)
≥ [Flash Adjust.] ([Flash Adjust.]: 350)
≥ [Flash Synchro] ([Flash Synchro]: 351)
≥ [Manual Flash Adjust.] ([Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 348)
≥ [Auto Exposure Comp.] ([Auto Exposure Comp.]: 352)
≥ [Wireless] (Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 353)
≥ [Wireless Channel] (Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 353)
≥ [Wireless FP] ([Wireless FP]: 359)
≥ [Communication Light] ([Communication Light]: 359)
≥ [Wireless Setup] (Setting Items ([Wireless Setup]): 357)
[Others (Photo)]
≥ [Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 245)
≥ [Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 257)
≥ [Image Stabilizer] (Image Stabilizer: 266)
≥ [Burst Shot Setting] (Taking Burst Pictures: 212)
≥ [Shutter Type] ([Shutter Type]: 259)
≥ [Shutter Delay] ([Shutter Delay]: 265)
≥ [Ex. Tele Conv.] (Extended Tele Conversion: 206)
≥ [Time Lapse/Animation] (Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 228,
Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 235)
≥ [Live View Composite] ([
Live View Composite]: 253)
≥ [Self Timer] (Recording Using the Self-timer: 241)
List of Menu – [Video] menu
623
[Video] menu
[Image Quality]
≥ [Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 363)
≥ [Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 316)
≥ [Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 277)
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (video)] ([ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 378)
≥ [Synchro Scan] ([Synchro Scan]: 450)
≥ [Flicker Decrease (Video)] ([Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 406)
≥ [Master Pedestal Level] ([Master Pedestal Level]: 375)
≥ [SS/Gain Operation] ([SS/Gain Operation]: 407)
≥ [i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 299)
≥ [Vignetting Comp.] ([Vignetting Comp.]: 338)
≥ [Diffraction Compensation] ([Diffraction Compensation]: 339)
≥ [Filter Settings] ([Filter Settings]: 329)
[Image Format]
≥ [Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 131)
≥ [Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
≥ [Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 133)
≥ [Rec Quality (My List)] ([add to list]: 146)
≥ [Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
≥ [Time Code] (Setting the Time Code: 402)
≥ [Luminance Level] ([Luminance Level]: 374)
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings
are synchronized.
List of Menu – [Video] menu
624
[Focus]
≥ [AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 174)
≥ [Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 174)
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 371)
≥ [Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 163)
≥ [Continuous AF] ([Continuous AF]: 369)
≥ [AF Assist Light] ([AF Assist Light]: 165)
≥ [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 202)
≥ [Focus Frame Moving Speed] ([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 166)
[Audio]
≥ [Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 380)
≥ [Mute Sound Input] ([Mute Sound Input]: 381)
≥ [Sound Rec Gain Level] ([Sound Rec Gain Level]: 382)
≥ [Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 383)
≥ [Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 384)
≥ [Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 385)
≥ [Wind Noise Canceller] ([Wind Noise Canceller]: 386)
≥ [Wind Cut] (Reduction of Wind Noise: 393)
≥ [Lens Noise Cut] ([Lens Noise Cut]: 387)
≥ [Mic Socket] (External Microphones (Optional): 389)
≥ [Special Mic.] (Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2:
Optional): 392)
≥ [4ch Mic Input] ([
4ch Mic Input]: 396)
≥ [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 394)
≥ [Sound Output] (Switching the Sound Output Method: 398)
≥ [Headphone Volume] (Adjusting the Headphone Volume: 398)
≥ [Sound Monitoring Channel] ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 399)
List of Menu – [Video] menu
625
[Others (Video)]
≥ [Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 257)
≥ [Image Stabilizer] (Image Stabilizer: 266)
≥ [Self Timer Setting] (Recording Using the Self-timer: 241)
≥ [Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 432)
≥ [Segmented File Recording] ([Segmented File Recording]: 452)
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
626
[Custom] menu
[Image Quality] ([Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 558)
≥ [Photo Style Settings] ([Photo Style Settings]: 558)
≥ [LUT Library] ([LUT Library]: 335)
≥ [ISO Increments] ([ISO Increments]: 559)
≥ [Extended ISO] ([Extended ISO]: 559)
≥ [Exposure Offset Adjust.] ([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 560)
≥ [Face Priority In Multi Metering] ([Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 560)
≥ [AWB Lock Setting] ([AWB Lock Setting]: 561)
≥ [Color Space] ([Color Space]: 562)
≥ [Exposure Comp. Reset] ([Exposure Comp. Reset]: 562)
≥ [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 562)
≥ [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] ([CreativeVideo Combined Set.]: 563)
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
627
[Focus/Shutter] ([Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 564)
≥ [Focus/Shutter Priority] ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 564)
≥ [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] ([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 564)
≥ [AF/AE Lock Hold] ([AF/AE Lock Hold]: 564)
≥ [AF+MF] ([AF+MF]: 565)
≥ [MF Assist] ([MF Assist]: 565)
≥ [MF Guide] ([MF Guide]: 566)
≥ [Focus Ring Lock] ([Focus Ring Lock]: 566)
≥ [Show/Hide AF Mode] ([Show/Hide AF Mode]: 566)
≥ [Pinpoint AF Setting] ([Pinpoint AF Setting]: 567)
≥ [AF-Point Scope Setting] ([AF-Point Scope Setting]: 567)
≥ [Shutter AF] ([Shutter AF]: 567)
≥ [Human Eye Detection Display] ([Human Eye Detection Display]: 568)
≥ [Half-Press Shutter] ([Half-Press Shutter]: 568)
≥ [Assign REC to Shutter Button] ([Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 568)
≥ [Quick AF] ([Quick AF]: 568)
≥ [Eye Sensor AF] ([Eye Sensor AF]: 569)
≥ [Looped Focus Frame] ([Looped Focus Frame]: 569)
≥ [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 569)
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
628
[Operation] ([Custom] menu ([Operation]): 570)
≥ [Q.MENU Settings] ([Q.MENU Settings]: 570)
≥ [Touch Settings] ([Touch Settings]: 570)
≥ [Operation Lock Setup] ([Operation Lock Setup]: 571)
≥ [Fn Button Set] ([Fn Button Set]: 571)
≥ [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] ([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 572)
≥ [ISO Displayed Setting] ([ISO Displayed Setting]: 572)
≥ [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] ([Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 572)
≥ [Dial Set.] ([Dial Set.]: 573)
≥ [Joystick Setting] ([Joystick Setting]: 574)
≥ [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] ([Video Rec. Button (Remote)]: 575)
[Monitor / Display (Photo)] ([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display
(Photo)]): 576)
≥ [Auto Review] ([Auto Review]: 576)
≥ [Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 576)
≥ [Histogram] ([Histogram]: 577)
≥ [Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 578)
≥ [Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 578)
≥ [Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 579)
≥ [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] ([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 580)
≥ [Expo.Meter] ([Expo.Meter]: 582)
≥ [Focal Length] ([F
ocal Length]: 582)
≥ [Blinking Highlights] ([Blinking Highlights]: 582)
≥ [Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 583)
≥ [I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 584)
≥ [Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 585)
≥ [Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 586)
≥ [Framing Outline] ([Framing Outline]: 586)
≥ [Show/Hide Monitor Layout] ([Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 586)
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
629
[Monitor / Display (Video)] ([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display
(Video)]): 587)
≥ [V-Log View Assist] ([V-Log View Assist]: 587)
≥ [HLG View Assist] ([HLG View Assist]: 587)
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]:
587)
≥ [Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 588)
≥ [Center Marker] ([Center Marker]: 588)
≥ [Safety Zone Marker] ([Safety Zone Marker]: 588)
≥ [Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 589)
≥ [Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 589)
≥ [WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 589)
≥ [Color Bars] ([Color Bars]: 590)
≥ [Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 590)
≥ [Red REC Frame Indicator] ([Red REC Frame Indicator]: 590)
[IN/OUT] ([Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 591)
≥ [HDMI Rec Output] ([HDMI Rec Output]: 591)
[Lens / Others] ([Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 592)
≥ [Lens Focus Resume] ([Lens Focus Resume]: 592)
≥ [Power Zoom Lens] ([Power Zoom Lens]: 592)
≥ [Lens Fn Button Setting] ([Lens Fn Button Setting]: 593)
≥ [Aperture Ring Increment] ([Aperture Ring Increment]: 593)
≥ [Focus Ring Control] ([
Focus Ring Control]: 594)
≥ [AF Micro Adjustment] ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 167)
≥ [Lens Information] ([Lens Information]: 595)
≥ [Lens Info. Confirmation] ([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 595)
≥ [Vertical Position Info (Video)] ([Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 595)
List of Menu – [Setup] menu
630
[Setup] menu
[Card/File] ([Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 597)
≥ [Card Format] ([Card Format]: 597)
≥ [Double Card Slot Function] ([Double Card Slot Function]: 598)
≥ [USB-SSD] ([USB-SSD]: 598)
≥ [Folder / File Settings] ([Folder / File Settings]: 599)
≥ [File Number Reset] ([File Number Reset]: 601)
≥ [Copyright Information] ([Copyright Information]: 601)
[Monitor / Display] ([Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 602)
≥ [Power Save Mode] ([Power Save Mode]: 602)
≥ [Thermal Management] ([Thermal Management]: 603)
≥ [Monitor Frame Rate] ([Monitor Frame Rate]: 603)
≥ [LVF Frame Rate] ([LVF Frame Rate]: 604)
≥ [Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder] ([Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]: 604)
≥ [Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] ([Monitor Backlight]/[LVF
Luminance]: 605)
≥ [Eye Sensor] ([Eye Sensor]: 606)
≥ [Level Gauge Adjust.] ([Level Gauge Adjust.]: 606)
[IN/OUT] ([Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 607)
≥ [Beep] ([Beep]: 607)
≥ [Headphone Volume] ([Headphone Volume]: 607)
≥ [Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] ([Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]:
608)
≥ [Wi-Fi] ([W
i-Fi]: 608)
≥ [Bluetooth] ([Bluetooth]: 608)
≥ [USB] ([USB]: 609)
≥ [Battery Use Priority] ([Battery Use Priority]: 609)
≥ [HDMI Connection] ([HDMI Connection]: 610)
≥ [Network Connection Light] ([Network Connection Light]: 611)
List of Menu – [Setup] menu
631
[Setting] ([Setup] menu ([Setting]): 612)
≥ [Save to Custom Mode] ([Save to Custom Mode]: 612)
≥ [Load Custom Mode] ([Load Custom Mode]: 612)
≥ [Custom Mode Settings] ([Custom Mode Settings]: 612)
≥ [Save/Restore Camera Setting] ([Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 613)
≥ [Reset] ([Reset]: 613)
[Others] ([Setup] menu ([Others]): 614)
≥ [Clock Set] ([Clock Set]: 614)
≥ [Time Zone] ([Time Zone]: 614)
≥ [System Frequency] ([System Frequency]: 615)
≥ [Pixel Refresh] ([Pixel Refresh]: 615)
≥ [Sensor Cleaning] ([Sensor Cleaning]: 616)
≥ [Language] ([Language]: 616)
≥ [Firmware Version] ([Firmware Version]: 617)
≥ [Approved Regulations] ([Approved Regulations]: 617)
*
* Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
displayed due to differences in specifications.
List of Menu – [Playback] menu
633
[Playback] menu
[Playback Mode] ([Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 516)
≥ [Playback Mode] ([Playback Mode]: 516)
≥ [Slide Show] ([Slide Show]: 516)
≥ [Rotate Disp.] ([Rotate Disp.]: 517)
≥ [Picture Sort] ([Picture Sort]: 517)
≥ [Magnify from AF Point] ([Magnify from AF Point]: 517)
≥ [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 517)
≥ [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 518)
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]:
518)
≥ [Behavior After Video Playback] ([Behavior After Video Playback]: 518)
[Process Image] ([Playback] ([Process Image]): 519)
≥ [RAW Processing] ([RAW Processing]: 519)
≥ [Time Lapse Video] ([Time Lapse Video]: 519)
≥ [Stop Motion Video] ([Stop Motion Video]: 519)
[Add/Delete Info.] ([Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 520)
≥ [Protect] ([Protect]: 520)
≥ [Rating] ([Rating]: 520)
[Edit Image] ([Playback] ([Edit Image]): 521)
≥ [Resize] ([Resize]: 521)
≥ [Rotate] ([Rotate]: 522)
≥ [Video Divide] ([Video Divide]: 522)
≥ [C
opy] ([Copy]: 523)
≥ [Video Repair] ([Video Repair]: 524)
[Others] ([Playback] ([Others]): 525)
≥ [Delete Confirmation] ([Delete Confirmation]: 525)
≥ [Delete All Images] ([Delete All Images]: 525)
634
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth
This chapter explains the Wi-Fi
®
and Bluetooth
®
functions of the camera.
•
This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone: 636
≥ Operating the Camera with a Smartphone: 652
≥ Sending Images from the Camera to a PC: 669
≥ Wi-Fi Connections: 673
≥ Send Settings and Selecting Images: 683
≥ [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 685
Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions
(A) Network connection light
Light (blue) Monitor Operation
Lit
The Wi-Fi function is set to on, or there is a
connection.
The Bluetooth function is set to on, or there
is a connection.
Blinking
When image data is sent using a camera
operation.
(A)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth
635
•
Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception while
sending images.
•
The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
•
We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information
security.
•
We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending
images.
•
When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
•
Images may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions.
If the connection is terminated while sending images, images with missing parts
may be sent.
•
You can set so that the network connection light does not turn on:
([Network Connection Light]: 611)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
636
Connecting to a Smartphone
≥ Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 637
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 638
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 644
≥ Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations: 650
Connect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync”
(below: “LUMIX Sync”) smartphone app installed.
Use “LUMIX Sync” for remote recording and image transfers.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
637
Installing “LUMIX Sync”
“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
1
Connect the smartphone to a network.
2
(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3
Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix sync” into the
search box.
4
Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” .
Supported OS
Android™: Android 9 or higher
iOS: iOS 14 or higher
•
Use the latest version.
•
Supported OSs are current as of September 2023 and are subject to change.
•
Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to operate.
•
The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
638
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection)
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a
smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically connects to the
smartphone via Wi-Fi.
•
For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
For information about connecting for the second and subsequent times
(Connecting to a Paired Smartphone: 642)
Supported smartphones
Android™: Android 9 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding those that
do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 14 or higher
•
Turn on the Bluetooth function on the smartphone beforehand.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
639
1
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
≥A message regarding device (camera) registration is displayed.
Select [Next].
•
If you have closed the message, select [ ], then register the camera using
[Camera registration (pairing)].
2
Check the content in the displayed guide and select
[Next] until the screen to register the camera is
displayed.
LUMIX Sync
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
640
Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.
3
Set the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [SET]
[Pairing]
≥The camera enters pairing standby state and the device name (A)
is displayed.
4
On the smartphone, select the camera’s device name.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
(A)
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
641
5
When a message indicating that device registration is
complete, select [OK].
≥A Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone
will be made.
End Bluetooth Connection
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of the
camera.
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] Select [OFF]
•
The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.
•
During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with
the smartphone, [ ] appears translucent.
•
Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information will
be deleted from the oldest first.
•
Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be
deleted.
OK
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
642
Connecting to a Paired Smartphone
Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure.
1 Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera.
•
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [ON]
2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”.
•
If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
3 Select [ ].
4 Select [Bluetooth Setup].
5 Turn Bluetooth ON.
6 From [Registered camera(s)] items, select the camera’s device name.
•
Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect
to one smartphone at a time.
•
When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the
smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the
camera being detected correctly.
LUMIX Sync
Bluetooth
XXXXXXXX
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
643
Canceling Pairing
1 Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
•
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [SET] [Delete]
2 Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
•
Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.
•
When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
644
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])
Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone.
With default settings, simple connection with smartphones is possible
without entering a password.
You can also use password authentication for enhanced connection
security.
•
A third party may be able to intercept your transmissions if you do not use password
authentication. When recording or transmitting important images, we recommend
using password authentication. (Using Password Authentication to Connect: 646)
1
Set the camera to Wi-Fi connection standby status.
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New
Connection] [Control With Smartphone]
≥The SSID (B) of the camera is displayed on the screen.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi]. (Fn Buttons: 527)
2
In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi
function ON.
(B)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
645
3
Select the SSID displayed on the camera.
4
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
5
(At the first connection) Confirm the device name
displayed on the camera and then select [Yes].
•
When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed, the
camera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].
If there are other Wi-Fi connection devices nearby, we recommend using either
QR code or manual password input to connect with password authentication.
(Using Password Authentication to Connect: 646)
•
When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX
i
i
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
646
Using Password Authentication to Connect
You can enhance Wi-Fi connection security by using password
authentication through either QR code or manual input.
Scanning QR code to connect
1 Set [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [ON].
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [Wi-Fi Password] [ON]
2 Display the QR code (C).
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New Connection]
[Control With Smartphone]
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi]. (Fn Buttons: 527)
•
Press or to enlarge the QR code.
3 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”.
•
If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
4 Select [ ].
5 Select [Wi-Fi connection].
6 Select [QR code].
7 Scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera using “ LUMIX Sync”.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
(C)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
647
Manually entering a password to connect
1 Display the screen in Step 2 (Scanning QR code to connect: 646).
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3 On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the SSID (D) displayed on the camera.
4 (At the first connection) Enter the password (D) displayed on the camera.
5 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX
i
i
(D)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
648
Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings
When connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct],
follow the steps below:
1 Display the connection method setting screen for the camera.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New Connection]
[Control With Smartphone]
2 Press [DISP.].
Connecting via network
1 Select [Via Network] and then press or .
•
Connect the camera to a wireless access point. ([Via Network]: 674)
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3 Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point that the camera is
connected to.
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”.
Connecting directly
1 Select [Direct] and then press or .
•
Select [WPS Connection] to connect the camera to a smartphone. ([Direct]:
678)
2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
649
Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection
To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow
the steps below.
1 Press the shutter button halfway to put the camera in recording mode.
2 Terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi]. (Fn Buttons: 527)
3 On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
650
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by
pressing [Q] during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Send Image (Smartphone)]. (Fn Buttons: 527)
Getting started:
•
Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 637)
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
•
Press [ ] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image
1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press [Q].
3 Select [Single Select].
•
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings:
683)
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
•
This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
651
Send multiple images
1 Press [Q].
2 Select [Multi Select].
•
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings:
683)
3 Select the images and then transfer.
21: Select images
or : Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
•
This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Using the menu to transfer easily
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
•
If [Single Select], press 21 to select the image and then press or to
execute.
•
If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”. (Send
multiple images: 651)
•
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
•
Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos, [Apple ProRes] videos
•
When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
•
If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
•
You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
•
When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
652
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
≥ [Remote shooting]: 654
≥ [Shutter Remote Control]: 656
≥ [Import images]: 659
≥ [Auto Transfer]: 661
≥ [Location Logging]: 663
≥ [Remote Wakeup]: 665
≥ [Auto Clock Set]: 667
≥ [Camera settings copy]: 668
This explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone.
Functions described in this document with the ( ) symbol require
a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
653
Home Screen
When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.
(A) : App settings (Connecting to a Paired Smartphone: 642, Using Password
Authentication to Connect: 646, [Remote Wakeup]: 665)
This allows connection settings, camera power operations, and displays Help.
(B) : [Import images] ([Import images]: 659)
(C) : [Remote shooting] ([Remote shooting]: 654)
(D) : [Shutter Remote Control] ([Shutter Remote Control]: 656)
(E) : [Others] ([Camera settings copy]) ([Camera settings copy]: 668)
LUMIX Sync
(A)
(C)
(E)
(B)
(D)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
654
[Remote shooting]
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while
viewing the live view images from the camera.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone. (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection): 638, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 644)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Start recording.
•
The recorded image is saved on the camera.
(F) Takes a picture
(G) Starts/ends the video recording
•
When used in combination with [Auto Transfer], it is possible to automatically
transfer the remotely recorded images to a smartphone. ([Auto Transfer]: 661)
•
Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.
(F) (G)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
655
Operation Method During Remote Recording
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be
used during remote recording.
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] Select [Priority of
Remote Device]
[Camera]
Operation is possible on both the camera and the smartphone.
•
The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
•
The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.
•
To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on the
screen, and select [End].
•
The default setting is [Camera].
•
The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
656
[Shutter Remote Control]
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home
screen.
2
Start recording.
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
•
Bulb Recording: 657
Bluetooth
LOCK
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
657
Bulb Recording
The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is
useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.
Getting started:
•
Set the camera to [M] mode. (Manual Exposure Mode: 289)
•
Set the camera shutter speed to [B] (Bulb). ([B] (Bulb): 293)
1 Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger).
2 Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.
•
Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked
in a fully-pressed state.
(Slide [ ] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to
end recording)
•
During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry
out Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
658
Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]
You can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep
Mode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
•
Set [Remote Wakeup] in [Bluetooth] to [ON]. ([Remote Wakeup]: 665)
[] [] [Bluetooth] Select [Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Import / Remote Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Import images] or [Remote shooting].
[Remote Shutter Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Shutter Remote Control].
•
To use the [Shutter Remote Control] to cancel [Sleep Mode] on the camera, set
[Bluetooth] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu as follows, then connect via Bluetooth:
– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON] ([Remote Wakeup]: 665)
– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF] ([Auto Transfer]: 661)
•
The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
659
[Import images]
Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via
Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone. (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection): 638, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 644)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Select the image to transfer.
•
You can switch the card displayed by touching (H).
(H)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
660
3
Transfer the image.
≥Select [ ].
•
If the image is a video, you can play it back by touching [ ] at the center of
the screen.
•
When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted using
“LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the actual video
recording.
Depending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image quality
may deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture playback.
•
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
•
Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos, [Apple ProRes] videos
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
661
[Auto Transfer]
You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they
are taken.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
1
Enable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] [ON]
•
If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate
the Wi-Fi connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.
2
On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or
[Join] (for iOS devices).
•
The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
3
Check the send settings on the camera and then press
or .
•
To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings: 683)
•
Automatic image transfer is possible when [ ] is displayed on the camera
recording screen.
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
662
4
Record with the camera.
•
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] Select [OFF]
≥ A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
•
If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the camera
automatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth when you turn
on the camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera.
•
Images are not transferred while the recording screen of the camera is displayed
on the smartphone in [Remote shooting].
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.
•
If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is
interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no
longer be possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.
•
Images recorded with the following function cannot be transferred automatically:
– Video recording
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
663
[Location Logging]
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth,
and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location
information.
Getting started:
•
Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
1
Enable [Location Logging] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Location Logging] [ON]
•
The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded
and [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera.
2
Record images with the camera.
•
Location information will be written to the recorded images.
Bluetooth
GPS
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
664
•
When [ ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location information
cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.
Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within a
building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a wide
view of the sky to improve positioning performance.
In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
•
Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
•
Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the
subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
•
The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
GPS
GPS
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
665
[Remote Wakeup]
Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start
the camera and record images, or check the recorded images.
Getting started:
1 Connect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
2 Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.
•
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Remote Wakeup] [ON]
3 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”.
Turning On the Camera
Select [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed,
select [Join].
•
The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.
Turning Off the Camera
1 Select [ ] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2 Select [Turn off the camera].
3 Select [Power OFF].
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
666
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], images recorded while remote operation is
running are automatically transferred to a smartphone.
If [Power OFF] is selected while there are still unsent images, sending is
resumed when the camera is next turned on.
•
When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues to work
even if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will drain.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
667
[Auto Clock Set]
Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those
of a smartphone.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
Enable [Auto Clock Set] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Clock Set] [ON]
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
668
[Camera settings copy]
This saves the camera’s settings information to the smartphone.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the
same settings on multiple cameras.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
1
Select [ ] ([Others]) [ ] ([Camera settings copy])
in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2
Save or load settings information.
•
Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to
operate the “LUMIX Sync ”.
•
Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.
•
When transferring settings information, a Wi-Fi connection is automatically
created.
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
•
You can save or load the settings information of items that are the same as those
in [Save/Restore Camera Setting] under the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu. (List of
Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 781)
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
669
Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
Send recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
•
Turn on the PC.
•
Create a destination folder for images.
•
If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting,
change the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection]. ([PC
Connection]: 685)
Create a Destination Folder for Images
When using Windows (Example for Windows 10)
1 Select the destination folder and then right-click.
2 Select [Properties] and then enable folder sharing.
When using Mac (Example for macOS 10.15)
1 Select the destination folder and then click the items in the following order.
[File] [Get Info]
2 Enable folder sharing.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10, Windows 11
Mac: macOS 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.7, 12.0 to 12.6, 13.0 to 13.4
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
670
1
Select the method for sending images on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New
Connection] [Send Images to PC While Recording]/[Send
Images Stored in the Camera to PC]
2
Connect the camera and PC by Wi-Fi.
≥Select [Via Network] ([Via Network]: 674) or [Direct] ([Direct]:
678), and then connect.
3
Enter the computer name of the PC you want to connect
to (for Mac, the NetBIOS name).
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
•
Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to
32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters.
A destination folder may not be created if the account name includes
non-alphanumeric characters.
•
When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank
character), etc., it may not be recognized.
In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or
less alphanumeric characters.
•
Refer to the operating instructions for your PC or Help on the OS for detailed
setting procedures.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
671
4
Select a folder for storing images.
•
Folders sorted by sent date will be created in the selected folder, and images
will be saved there.
5
Check the send settings and then press or .
•
To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings: 683)
6
(When [Send Images to PC While Recording] is
selected) Take pictures.
•
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
•
To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
(When [Send Images Stored in the Camera to PC] is
selected) Select an image. (Selecting Images: 684)
•
To end the connection, select [Exit].
•
If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you
set on your PC.
•
When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the
PC may not be possible.
•
When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
•
If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
•
You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
•
When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
672
Images That Can be Sent
The images that can be sent depend on the method used for sending
them.
Images that can be sent
[Send Images to PC While Recording]
[Send Images Stored in the Camera to
PC]
JPEG/RAW JPEG/RAW/MP4/MOV/Apple ProRes
•
Depending on the OS version, these may not be displayed correctly.
•
Sending may not be possible depending on your device.
•
It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this
camera, or images edited or processed on a PC.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
673
Wi-Fi Connections
≥ [Via Network]: 674
≥ [Direct]: 678
≥ Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings: 680
≥ Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]: 682
When [New Connection] has been selected in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] of
the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, select the connection method from either [Via
Network] or [Direct] to connect.
On the other hand, when you use [Select a destination from History] or
[Select a destination from Favorite], the camera connects to the selected
device with the previously-used settings.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
674
[Via Network]
Connect the camera and destination device through the wireless access
point.
Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point.
Settings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/[WPS (PIN code)]/[From List] ([WPS
(Push-Button)]: 675, [WPS (PIN code)]: 675, [From List]: 676)
•
After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the
previously-used wireless access point.
To change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.] and
change the connection destination.
•
Check the operating instructions and settings of the wireless access point.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
675
[WPS (Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the wireless access point to set up a connection.
Press the wireless access point WPS button until it switches to WPS
mode.
Example)
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection.
1 On the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are connecting to.
2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless access
point.
3 Press or of the camera.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
676
[From List]
Searches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to this.
1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to.
•
Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point search again.
•
If no wireless access point is found (Connecting by Manual Input: 677)
2 (If network authentication is encrypted) Enter the encryption key.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
•
Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
677
Connecting by Manual Input
1 In the screen in Step 1 of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input]. ([From List]: 676)
2 Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and then
select [Set].
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
3 Select the network authentication.
[WPA3-SAE]/[WPA2-PSK]/[WPA2/WPA-PSK]
Supported encryption: [TKIP], [AES]
[No Encryption]
4 (When other than [No Encryption] is selected) Enter the encryption key and then
select [Set].
•
Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of the
wireless access point you are using.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
678
[Direct]
Directly connect the camera and the destination device.
Select the method for connecting with the destination device.
[WPS Connection]
[WPS (Push-Button)]: Press the WPS button on the destination device to connect.
•
On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend the connection wait time.
[WPS (PIN code)]: Enter the PIN code into the camera, and connect.
[Manual Connection]
Search for the camera on the destination device to connect.
1 Select the network authentication.
[WPA3]/[WPA3/WPA2]
•
If [Wi-Fi Password] in [Wi-Fi Setup] is [OFF], this is not displayed if the
connected device is [Smartphone].
2 Enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera into the device.
•
If [Wi-Fi Password] in [Wi-Fi Setup] is [OFF], the password is not displayed if
the connected device is [Smartphone].
Select the SSID to establish a connection. (Connecting to a Smartphone
([Wi-Fi connection]): 644)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
679
•
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be connected.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
680
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings
Use the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as
previously.
1
Display the Wi-Fi connection history.
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a
destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite]
2
Select the History item to connect to.
•
Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the connection history.
Register to Favorite
You can register the Wi-Fi connection history to Favorite.
1 Display the Wi-Fi connection history.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination
from History]
2 Select the History item to register and then press 1.
3 Enter a registration name and then select [Set].
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
•
A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated
as two characters.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
681
Editing Items Registered in Favorite
1 Display items registered to Favorite.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination
from Favorite]
2 Select the History item to edit in Favorite and then press 1.
[Remove from Favorite]
[Change the Order in Favorite]
Specify the destination location of the desired item to change the display order.
[Change the Registered Name]
Enter characters to change the registered name.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
•
The number of items that can be saved in History is limited. Register
frequently-used connection settings to Favorite.
•
When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the content registered in History and Favorite is deleted.
•
If the device you want to connect to (PC, etc.) is connected to a wireless access
point other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using
[Direct].
Change the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the
access point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select [New
Connection] and reconnect the devices. (Sending Images from the Camera to
a PC: 669)
•
It may be difficult to connect to networks to which many devices are connected.
In these cases, connect using [New Connection].
•
When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
682
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]
You can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button
assigned with [Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi. (Fn Buttons: 527)
[Terminate the Connection]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for Sending Images]
Sets the image size, file format, and other items for sending recorded images.
(Image Send Settings: 683)
[Register the Current Destination to Favorite]
Registers the current connection destination or method so that you can easily connect
with the same connection settings next time.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera. ([Network Address]: 686)
•
Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may
not be able to perform some of these operations.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
683
Send Settings and Selecting Images
≥ Image Send Settings: 683
≥ Selecting Images: 684
Image Send Settings
Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the
destination device.
1
After Wi-Fi connection, the send settings confirmation
screen will be displayed, so press [DISP.].
2
Change the send settings.
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Change] ([L], [M], [S], or [VGA])
[File Format]
Sets the file format of images to send.
[JPG]/[RAW+JPG]/[RAW]
•
This setting is possible when the destination supports the sending of RAW
images from this camera. (Images That Can be Sent: 672)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
684
Selecting Images
When sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera to PC], select the
images using the following procedure.
1
Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
2
Select the image.
[Single Select] setting
1 Press 21 to select an image.
2 Press or .
[Multi Select] setting
1 Press 3421 to select an image and then press or . (Repeat this)
•
To cancel the setting, press or again.
•
Images are displayed separately by card slot.
To switch the card to display, press [ ].
•
Selecting images at once is possible only for the images in a single card.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
321
654
2.
ュリヴヱハ
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
685
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
This configures the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
Displaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu.
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Priority of Remote Device]
This sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used
during remote recording. (Operation Method During Remote Recording: 655)
[Wi-Fi Password]
You can use a password to connect for enhanced security. (Using Password
Authentication to Connect: 646)
[PC Connection]
You can set the workgroup.
To send images to a PC, you need to connect to the same workgroup as the
destination PC.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
•
To change the workgroup name, press or and enter the new workgroup
name.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
•
To return to the default settings, press [DISP.].
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
686
[Device Name/Password]
You can change the camera name (SSID) and password.
•
Press [DISP.] to change the device name and password.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
•
The number of characters you can enter is a maximum of 32 for the device name
and between 8 and 63 for the password.
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to
protect personal information in the camera and included with images, protect the Wi-Fi
function with a password.
[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 100)
[Cancel]: Cancel the password.
•
Once a password is set, you are required to enter it each time you use the Wi-Fi
function.
•
If you forget your password, you can use [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu to
reset the network settings and thereby reset the password.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera.
•
When the following function is being used, [Network Address] is not available:
– Tethered recording
687
Connecting to Other Devices
This chapter describes connections with other devices, for example, HDMI
devices, such as TVs, and PCs.
Connect using either the HDMI socket or the USB port on the camera.
≥ Connecting: 688
≥ Viewing on a TV: 690
≥ Importing Images to a PC: 694
≥ Storing on a Recorder: 699
≥ Tethered Recording: 700
Connecting to Other Devices – Connecting
688
Connecting
HDMI socket
Connect the camera and HDMI device (TV, etc.) with a
commercially available HDMI cable.
•
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet)
long).
•
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
•
Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
Connecting to Other Devices – Connecting
689
USB port
Use a USB connection cable to connect the camera to a PC
or recorder.
•
Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
690
Viewing on a TV
You can connect the camera to a TV or external monitor to view recorded
pictures and videos.
Getting started:
•
Turn off the camera and TV.
1
Connect the camera and TV with a commercially
available HDMI cable. (HDMI socket: 688)
2
Turn on the TV.
3
Switch the TV input to HDMI input.
4
Turn on the camera.
5
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
≥The recorded images are displayed on the camera and TV.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
691
•
With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the
connected TV.
The output resolution can be changed in [Output Resolution(Playback)].
([Output Resolution(Playback)]: 610)
•
Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of images.
You can change the band color in [Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI
Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. ([Background Color(Playback)]:
611)
•
HDMI output is not possible if you connect a USB connection cable at the same
time while [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)].
•
The audio of video recorded with [4ch Mic Input] set to [ON] cannot be output to
an external device connected via HDMI if the device is not compatible with
4-channel audio or high-resolution audio.
•
Change the screen mode on your TV if images are displayed with the top or
bottom cut off.
•
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
692
Using VIERA Link
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your
remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera
has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI
cable for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
1 Connect the camera to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link using a
commercially available HDMI cable. (HDMI socket: 688)
2 Turn on the camera.
3 Turn on the VIERA Link.
•
[] [] [HDMI Connection] [VIERA Link (CEC)] [ON]
4 Display the playback screen.
•
Press [ ].
•
The recorded images are displayed on the TV. (The monitor and viewfinder of
the camera will turn off.)
5 Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Power off link
If you turn off the TV with its remote control, the camera will also turn off.
Automatic input switching
If you turn on the camera and then press [ ], the input of the TV automatically
switches to input to which this camera is connected.
Furthermore, when the TV power is in the standby state, it turns on automatically.
(When “Power on link” on the TV is set to “Set”)
•
To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV.
For the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
693
•
VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function
using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies
are not guaranteed.
•
The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible with
Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.
•
Operation using the buttons on the camera will be limited.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
694
Importing Images to a PC
≥ Copying Images to a PC: 695
≥ Installing Software: 698
If you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to
the PC.
You will need to use software that is compatible with the recorded video
format in order to play back or edit video on the PC.
You can also use software for processing and editing RAW images.
(Installing Software: 698)
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
695
Copying Images to a PC
After connecting to the PC, you can copy the recorded images by dragging
files and folders on this camera to the PC.
Getting started:
•
Turn on the camera and PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable. (USB port: 689)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or
.
≥Windows: The drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in [This PC].
≥Mac: The drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop.
3
Drag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.
•
The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs which
can detect mass storage devices.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10, Windows 11
Mac: macOS 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.7, 12.0 to 12.6, 13.0 to 13.4
•
Mac:
Supported by “Final Cut Pro X”.
For details on “Final Cut Pro X”, please contact Apple Inc.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
696
Folder Structure Inside Card
(A) The camera’s setup information
(B) Images
(C) Folder number
(D) JPG: JPEG format pictures
RW2: RAW format pictures
MP4: MP4 videos
MOV: MOV videos, Apple ProRes videos
(E) File number
(F) Color space
P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
CAMSET
AD_LUMIX
DCIM
(A)
100XXXXX
PXXX0001.JPG
(B)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(C)
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
697
•
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. ([USB Mode]: 609)
•
Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.
•
After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely
remove the USB connection cable on the PC.
•
Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
698
Installing Software
Install the software to process and edit RAW images.
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
This software processes and edits RAW images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be
displayed on a PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
Operating environment
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit), Windows 11
Mac: macOS 10.13 to 10.15, 11, 12, 13
•
For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the
Help or the Adwaa’s support site.
•
To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
•
Supported OSs are current as of September 2023 and are subject to change.
Connecting to Other Devices – Storing on a Recorder
699
Storing on a Recorder
By connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder, you can store the pictures and videos.
Getting started:
•
Turn on the camera and recorder.
•
Insert a card into card slot 1.
1
Connect the camera and recorder with the USB
connection cable. (USB port: 689)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or
.
3
Operate the recorder to store the images.
•
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the recorder without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. ([USB Mode]: 609)
•
Take care not to turn off the camera while storage is in progress.
•
Images such as 4K videos may not be supported depending on your recorder.
•
Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
•
For the storage and playback procedures, refer to the operating instructions for
the recorder.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
700
Tethered Recording
≥ Installing Software: 701
≥ Operating the Camera from a PC: 702
If you install the “LUMIX Tether” camera control software on your PC, you
can connect the camera to the PC via USB and then control the camera
from the PC and record while checking the live view on the PC screen
(tethered recording).
In addition, you can output via HDMI to an external monitor or TV during
tethered recording.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
701
Installing Software
“LUMIX Tether”
This software is for controlling the camera from a PC.
It allows you to change various settings and to record remotely and then
save the images to the PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
(English only)
Operating environment
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit), Windows 11
Mac: macOS 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.7, 12.0 to 12.6, 13.0 to 13.4
≥ Interface
USB port (SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.1))
•
Supported OSs are current as of September 2023 and are subject to change.
•
Use the latest version of “LUMIX Tether”.
•
To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
•
For how to operate the software, refer to the operation guide for “LUMIX Tether”.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
702
Operating the Camera from a PC
Getting started:
•
Turn on the camera and PC.
•
Install “LUMIX Tether ” on PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable. (USB port: 689)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Tether)] and then press or
.
≥[ ] is displayed on the camera’s screen.
3
Use “LUMIX Tether” to operate the camera from the PC.
•
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Tether)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. ([USB Mode]: 609)
•
The Wi-Fi/Bluetooth functions are not available while there is a PC connection
with [PC(Tether)].
703
Materials
This chapter describes procedures to try when there is a problem and
provides information about the specifications for your reference.
≥ Digital Camera Accessory System: 704
≥ Using Optional Accessories: 706
≥ Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 713
≥ Message Displays: 734
≥ Troubleshooting: 738
≥ Cautions for Use: 754
≥ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time
with the Battery: 765
≥ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time
According to Recording Media: 770
≥ List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying:
781
≥ List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 805
≥ Specifications: 812
≥ Trademarks and Licenses: 828
Materials – Digital Camera Accessory System
704
Digital Camera Accessory System
(Product numbers correct as of September 2023.)
*1 Supplied with an AC adaptor, an AC cable/AC mains lead and a USB connection
cable.
*2 The AC Adaptor (optional) can only be used with the designated Panasonic DC
Coupler (optional).
The AC Adaptor (optional) cannot be used by itself.
*3 Use if the attached lens interferes with the tripod head.
Product name Product number
Battery Pack DMW-BLK22
Battery Charger
*1
DMW-BTC15
AC Adaptor
*2
DMW-AC10
DC Coupler
*2
DMW-DCC17
Battery Grip DMW-BG1, DMW-BGS5
Flash
DMW-FL580L, DMW-FL360L,
DMW-FL200L
LED Video Light VW-LED1
Stereo Shotgun Microphone DMW-MS2
Stereo Microphone VW-VMS10
XLR Microphone Adaptor DMW-XLR1
Shutter Remote Control DMW-RS2
Tripod Grip DMW-SHGR1
Tripod Adaptor
*3
DMW-TA1
Body Cap DMW-BDC1
Shoulder Strap DMW-SSTG9
Materials – Digital Camera Accessory System
705
•
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
•
For lens-related optional accessories such as compatible lenses and filters, refer to
our catalogs/website, etc.
•
For the latest information on optional accessories, refer to our catalogs/website, etc.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
706
Using Optional Accessories
≥ Battery Grip (Optional): 707
≥ Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 709
≥ Tripod Grip (Optional): 711
≥ AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 712
•
For information on the external flash (Using an External Flash (Optional): 341)
•
For information on the external microphone (External Microphones (Optional):
389)
•
For information on the XLR Microphone Adaptor (XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 394)
•
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
707
Battery Grip (Optional)
When mounted on the camera, the Battery Grip (DMW-BG1/DMW-BGS5:
optional) improves ease of operation and grip when the camera is held
vertically.
Also, inserting a battery into the Battery Grip provides a stable supply of
power even for long periods of recording.
•
The Battery Grip is dust and splash resistant.
•
The joystick on the Battery Grip (DMW-BGS5) can be moved in only 4 directions (up,
down, left, and right).
Selecting Battery Usage Priority
Selects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both
the camera and the Battery Grip.
Getting started:
•
Turn the camera off, and remove the cover for the battery grip connector.
1 Attach the Battery Grip to the camera.
2 Turn on the camera.
3 Set the battery use priority.
•
[] [] [Battery Use Priority]
[BODY]: The battery in the camera is used first.
[BG]: The battery in the Battery Grip is used first.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
708
•
When the battery in the Battery Grip is used, [ ] is displayed on the
screen.
•
You can register functions of your choice to the [Fn] button on the Battery Grip.
(Fn Buttons: 527)
The [WB] button, [ISO] button, [ ] button, [AF ON] button, and joystick each
work the same as the buttons and joystick on the camera body.
•
Refer to the operating instructions for the Battery Grip for details.
•
Also refer here when using the Battery Grip and external SSD at the same time:
(Notes About External SSDs: 478)
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
709
Shutter Remote Control (Optional)
You can connect the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) to use
the camera as follows:
•
Fully pressing the shutter button without camera shake
•
Securing the shutter button during bulb recording and burst recording
•
Start/end the video recording
•
Using the functions registered in the video rec. button of the Shutter Remote Control
Registering Functions to the Video Rec. Button
You can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter
Remote Control.
The functions that can be registered are the same as the functions that can
be registered to the Fn buttons for recording (Setting Items ([Fn Button
Set]/[Setting in REC mode]): 533).
[Video Record] is registered in the default setting.
[] [] Select [Video Rec. Button (Remote)]
•
Register functions using the same operations as [Fn Button Set]. (Register
Functions to the Fn Buttons: 530)
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
710
•
Always use a genuine Panasonic Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).
•
Refer to the operating instructions for the Shutter Remote Control for details.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
711
Tripod Grip (Optional)
Attach a Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional) to use it as a grip for
recording while walking, a tripod, or a Shutter Remote Control.
•
Connect the grip cable to the [REMOTE] socket on the camera.
•
Always use a genuine Panasonic Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional).
•
The [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] menu does not work with the Tripod Grip.
•
Do not carry just by holding the hand strap when the camera is attached.
•
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Tripod Grip.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
712
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)
With an AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional), you can perform recording and playback without
worrying about the remaining battery charge.
•
Be sure to purchase both an AC Adaptor and a DC Coupler as a set.
They cannot be used independently of one another.
•
When the DC Coupler is being mounted, the DC Coupler cover opens, so the
structure ceases to be dust and splash resistant.
Do not allow sand, dust and water droplets to adhere to or enter the camera.
After use, confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the DC Coupler cover,
then firmly close the cover.
•
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AC Adaptor and DC
Coupler.
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
713
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
≥ Recording Screen: 713
≥ Playback Screen: 729
•
The screen is an monitor display example of when [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] is set to
[].
Recording Screen
(1)
Flash mode ([Flash Mode]: 345)
Flash setting ([Flash Synchro]: 351, Recording Using a
Wireless Flash: 353)
AWBc AWBw
2500K
White balance (White Balance (WB): 308)/
Color Temperature (Color Temperature Setting: 313)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Fn8Fn8
Fn5Fn5
Fn4Fn4
Fn6Fn6
Fn7Fn7
OFFOFF
OFFOFF
ISO
SS
FF
ISO
SS
FF
EXPSEXPS
AWB
BKT
AEL BKT
AFSAFS
999
ISO
100
F
2.860
24m59s24m59s
GPS
L
FINE
RAW
+
+
1
/
3
WL
1
1
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
714
White Balance Bracket, White Balance Bracket (Color
Temperature) ([More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 252)
Adjusting the white balance (Adjusting the White Balance:
314)
AWB lock setting ([AWB Lock Setting]: 561)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 316)
Filter setting ([Filter Settings]: 329)/
Filter effect adjustment (Adjusting the Filter Effect: 331)
LUT View Assist ([V-Log View Assist]: 441)
HLG View Assist ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 119), Picture size ([Picture
Size]: 117)
Extended Tele Conversion (Extended Tele Conversion: 206)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 131)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 133)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 131)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 133)
59.94p
60/59.94p
Recording frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 133)/
Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
Electronic shutter ([Shutter Type]: 259)
Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 151, Record Using
MF: 197)
Focus Limiter ([Focus Limiter]: 163)
Focus Bracket ([More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 251)
AFL AF Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 300)
BKT
AWB
AWB
AWB
AWBL
EXPS
MOV
4K
420/10-L
AFS
AFC MF
AFS
BKT
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
715
MFL Focus ring lock ([Focus Ring Lock]: 566)
Focus Peaking ([Focus Peaking]: 202)
FULL Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 171)
AF detection setting (Automatic Detection: 174)
Drive mode (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
Connected to Wi-Fi (Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth functions: 634)
Connected to Bluetooth (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 638)
GPS Location logging ([Location Logging]: 663)
Image stabilizer (Image Stabilizer: 266)
Camera shake alert (Using the Image Stabilizer: 268)
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
716
(2)
(3)
Self-timer (Recording Using the Self-timer: 241)
Silent mode ([Silent Mode]: 257)
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
Anamorphic Desqueeze Display ([Anamorphic Desqueeze
Display]: 448)
Live View Composite recording ([Live View Composite]: 253)
Overlay indication ([Sheer Overlay]: 583)
LUT View Assist ([V-Log View Assist]: 441)
Built-in microphone, External microphone ([Sound Rec Level
Disp.]: 380, External Microphones (Optional): 389)
Sound recording quality/XLR microphone adaptor setting
([Sound Rec Quality]: 384, XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 394)
4ch microphone input ([4ch Mic Input]: 396)
Sound recording level limiter ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 385)
Mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 381)
Sound recording level ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 380)
Exposure meter ([Expo.Meter]: 582)
LC
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
717
(4)
(5)
Histogram ([Histogram]: 577)
AF area (AF Area Operations: 188)
Spot metering target ([Metering Mode]: 277)
Center marker ([Center Marker]: 588)
Self-timer (Recording Using the Self-timer: 241)
Operation lock ([Operation Lock Setup]: 571)
24m59s Elapsed recording time (Basic Video Operations: 122)
Time code (Time Code: 401)
Image being sent ([Auto Transfer]: 661)
¥
Focus (turns green) (Basic Picture Operations: 113)/
Recording state (turns red) (High Resolution mode: 223,
Basic Video Operations: 122)
Focus (in low light AF situations) (Low illumination AF: 155)
Focus (Starlight AF) (Starlight AF: 155)
Flash adjustment ([Flash Adjust.]: 350)
Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
Program Shift (Program Shift: 281)
LOW
STAR
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
718
Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 277)
AE Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 300)
60 Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 113)
F2.8 Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 113)
Aperture Bracket ([More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 250)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
296)
Exposure Bracket ([More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 249)
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 291)
ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
Card/external SSD access indication (turns red) (Basic Video
Operations: 122, Using an External SSD (Commercially
Available): 472)
Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 56)/
Double card slot function ([Double Card Slot Function]: 598)/
External SSD (Using an External SSD (Commercially
Available): 472)
No card/external SSD
Card/external SSD full
AE
A
E
L
F2.8
BKT
BKT
+
1
/
3
ISO
100
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
719
(6)
Touch Tab ([Touch Settings]: 570)
999
Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures
That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media: 770)
r20
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of
Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 218)
24m59s Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 771)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 51)
Power supply (Using the Camera While Supplying It with
Power (Supplying Power/Charging): 49)
Battery Grip (Battery Grip (Optional): 707)
Temperature rise warning icon (Recording: 740)
Fn button (Use [Fn4] to [Fn8] (Touch Icons): 541)
Touch Zoom (Operations During Video Recording: 365)
Touch AF, Touch Shutter (Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 107)
Exposure compensation (Exposure Compensation: 296)
Touch AE (Touch AE: 110)
Focus Peaking ([Focus Peaking]: 202)
Fn4
AE
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
720
(Setting a Filter with Touch Operation: 332)// (Operations During
Video Recording: 365)
Filter effect adjustment (Adjusting the Filter Effect: 331)
Filter on/off (Setting a Filter with Touch Operation: 332)
EXPS Filter setting ([Filter Settings]: 329)
Zoom (Operations During Video Recording: 365)
F Aperture value (Operations During Video Recording: 365)
SS Shutter speed (Operations During Video Recording: 365)
Exposure compensation (Operations During Video Recording:
365)
ISO ISO sensitivity (Operations During Video Recording: 365)
Sound recording level adjustment (Operations During Video
Recording: 365)
Slow & Quick setting (Operations During Video Recording:
365)
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
721
Control Panel
(1)
(2)
Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 75)
1/60 Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 113)
F2.8 Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 113)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 51)/
Power supply (Power Supply: 48)
Battery indication (battery grip) (Power Indications: 51)
ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
296)/
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 291)
Flash setting ([Flash Adjust.]: 350, [Flash Synchro]: 351,
Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 353)/
Flash mode ([Flash Mode]: 345)
F2.8
1/60
999
999
AWB
Fn
0 0
0
ISO
100
AFS
FINE
4:3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ISO
100
0
0
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
722
(3)
Drive mode (Selecting the Drive Mode: 210)
Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 151, Record Using
MF: 197)
AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 171)
FINE Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 119)
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 148)/
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 131)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 133)
Picture size/Aspect ratio ([Picture Size]: 117)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 634)
Fn button settings (Fn Buttons: 527)
AFS
L
4:3
Fn
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
723
(4)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 316)
AWB White balance (White Balance (WB): 308)
i.Dynamic Range ([i.Dynamic Range]: 299)
Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 277)
Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 56)/
Double card slot function ([Double Card Slot Function]: 598)/
External SSD (Using an External SSD (Commercially
Available): 472)
No card/external SSD
Card/external SSD full
999
Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures
That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media: 770)
r20
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of
Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 218)
R24m59s Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 771)
---- No card
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
724
Control Panel (Creative Video Mode/Slow & Quick Mode)
(1)
(2)
Frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 133)/
Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
Shutter speed (Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 286)
Aperture value (Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 283)
Exposure mode (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos:
363)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
296)/
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 291)
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
Time code (Time Code: 401)
Recording state (Screen Displays While Video Recording:
124)
FULL
FPS
30
F2.8
1/60
100
AWB
IRISSHUTTER
ISO WBPHOTO STYLE
TC
DF
00:00:00:00
REC
1
1
3
4K 29.97
p
420/10-L
MOV
24m59s
24m59s
AUTO
CH1
-2
-36 -12 -6-24 0
CH2
-6
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
OFF
48kHz/24bit
FPS
60
SHUTTER
1/60
IRIS
F2.8
00:00:00:00
TC
DF
REC
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
725
(3)
(4)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 131)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 133)
Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 56)/
Double card slot function ([Double Card Slot Function]: 598)/
External SSD (Using an External SSD (Commercially
Available): 472)
Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 771)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 634)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 51)/
Power supply (Using the Camera While Supplying It with
Power (Supplying Power/Charging): 49)
Battery indication (battery grip) (Power Indications: 51)
Built-in microphone, External microphone ([Sound Rec Level
Disp.]: 380, External Microphones (Optional): 389)
Sound recording quality/XLR microphone adaptor setting
([Sound Rec Quality]: 384, XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 394)
4ch microphone input ([4ch Mic Input]: 396)
Sound recording level limiter ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 385)
Mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 381)
Sound recording level ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 380)
4K 29.97
p
420/10-L
MOV
24
m
59
s
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
727
Audio Information Display
(1)
Built-in microphone, External microphone ([Sound Rec Level
Disp.]: 380, External Microphones (Optional): 389)
Sound recording quality/XLR microphone adaptor setting
([Sound Rec Quality]: 384, XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 394)
4ch microphone input ([4ch Mic Input]: 396)
Sound recording level limiter ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 385)
Mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 381)
Sound recording level ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 380)
EXT. GAIN
96kHz/24bit
OFF
CH1/CH2
Audio QualityMute
4ch MIC Input Monitor CHMonitor
CH1
-2
-36 -12 -6-24 0
CH2
-6
CH3
-2
-36 -12 -6-24 0
CH4
-6
ON
4ch/96kHz/24bit
STD.
REALTIME
(1)
(2)
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
728
(2)
Sound recording gain switch ([Sound Rec Gain Level]: 382)
Sound input mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 381)
Sound recording quality ([Sound Rec Quality]: 384)
4ch microphone input ([4ch Mic Input]: 396)
Sound monitoring (Headphones: 397)
Sound monitoring channel ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 399)
EXT.GAIN
STD.
Mute
OFF
Audio Quality
96kHz/24bit
4ch MIC Input
ON
Monitor
REALTIME
Monitor CH
CH1/CH2
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
729
Playback Screen
(1)
Playback mode ([Playback Mode]: 516)
Recording date and time (Setting the Clock (When Turning On
for the First Time): 68)
Card slot (Switching the Card to Display: 482)/
External SSD (Using an External SSD (Commercially
Available): 472)
¿3 Rating ([Rating]: 520)
Video playback (Playing Back Videos: 483)
Protected picture ([Protect]: 520)
GPS Location logging ([Location Logging]: 663)
Obtaining information
2023.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/9991/999
8m30s8m30s
ISO
100
F
2.86060
±
0
33
GPS
L
FINE
GPSGPS
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
2023.12. 1 10:00
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
730
(2)
100-0001 Folder/file number ([Folder / File Settings]: 599)
1/999 Image number/Total number of images
Number of group images/
Number of files
8m30s Video recording time (Playing Back Videos: 483)
Slow & Quick video (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
LUT View Assist ([V-Log View Assist]: 441)
HLG View Assist ([HLG View Assist]: 445)
SLF
ILOHV
XX
s
XX
m
XX
s
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
731
(3)
(4)
(5)
Playback (video) (Playing Back Videos: 483)
Group images (Group Images: 498)
Time code (Time Code: 401)
Sound recording quality ([Sound Rec Quality]: 384)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 131)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 133)
59.94p
60/59.94p
Frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 133)/
Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
FULL Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 148)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 634)
Silent mode ([Silent Mode]: 257)
Recording information
Battery indication (Power Indications: 51)
Power supply (Using the Camera While Supplying It with
Power (Supplying Power/Charging): 49)
Battery Grip (Battery Grip (Optional): 707)
MOV
4K 420/10-L
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
732
Detailed information display
(1) Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 56)/External SSD (Using an External
SSD (Commercially Available): 472)
(2) Recording date and time (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First
Time): 68)
(3) Folder/file number ([Folder / File Settings]: 599)
(4) Recording information (basic)
(5) Recording information (advanced)
Histogram display
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F2.8
60
2023.12. 1 10:00
s
RGB
1/5
FINE
AFS
5500
0
STD.
L
4:3
1
(1) (5)(4)(3)(2)
2/5
R
Y
B
G
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F2.8
60
2023.12. 1 10:00
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
733
Photo Style display
White balance display
Lens information display
3/5
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F2.8
60
2023.12. 1 10:00
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F2.8
60
2023.12. 1 10:00
4/5
5500K
1
G
M
AB
5/5
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F2.8
60
2023.12. 1 10:00
Materials – Message Displays
734
Message Displays
Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and
response methods.
Card
[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]
•
It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.
Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting.
([Card Format]: 597)
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]
•
Use a card compatible with the camera. (Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 24)
[Insert memory card again.]/[Try another card]
•
Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.
•
Insert a different card.
[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]
•
Failure to read or write data.
Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.
•
The card may be broken.
•
Insert a different card.
Materials – Message Displays
735
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing
speed of the card]
•
The card does not meet the writing speed requirements for recording.
Use a card of a supported Speed Class. (SD Cards That Can Be Used with This
Camera: 25)
•
If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified
Speed Class rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow.
We recommend backing up data, and formatting. ([Card Format]: 597)
Materials – Message Displays
736
Lens
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button
while lens is attached.]
•
Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release
button. (Attaching a Lens: 60)
Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached
correctly.]
•
Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and
the camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the
dealer.
Battery
[This battery cannot be used]
•
Use a genuine Panasonic battery.
If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used, contact
the dealer.
•
If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from the terminal.
[The life span of this battery is starting to decline and should be
considered for replacement. To maintain reliability refrain from
using this battery.]
•
The battery has deteriorated. Try not to use that battery.
Materials – Message Displays
737
Others
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be
deleted]
•
Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. ([Card Format]: 597)
[A folder cannot be created]
•
The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot
be created.
After formatting the card, execute [File Number Reset] in the [Setup] ([Card/File])
menu. ([File Number Reset]: 601)
[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]
•
Turn off and on the camera.
If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.
Materials – Troubleshooting
738
Troubleshooting
≥ Power, Battery: 739
≥ Recording: 740
≥ Video: 745
≥ Playback: 746
≥ Monitor/Viewfinder: 747
≥ Flash: 748
≥ Wi-Fi Function: 749
≥ TV, PC: 752
≥ Others: 753
First, try out the following procedures.
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting
[Reset] ([Reset]: 99) on the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
Materials – Troubleshooting
739
Power, Battery
The camera turns off automatically.
•
[Power Save Mode] is enabled. ([Power Save Mode]: 53)
The battery becomes flat too quickly.
•
When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.
Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Power Save Mode] ([Power Save
Mode]: 53).
•
When [Continuous AF] is set to [MODE2], the battery drains faster. Battery
consumption can be reduced by setting to [MODE1] or [OFF]. ([Continuous AF]:
369)
•
When [USB-SSD] is set to [ON], power is supplied from the battery of this camera to
the connected device, so the battery will drain faster. When not using the external
SSD, turn [USB-SSD] [OFF].
•
The battery continues to be consumed and the temperature in the camera continues
to rise even during recording standby. Make a point of turning the camera off when
not recording.
Materials – Troubleshooting
740
Recording
Recording stops before finishing. Cannot record. Cannot use
some functions.
•
The temperature of the camera rises more readily in the following circumstances:
when the ambient temperature is high, during continuous use such as when
recording high-definition video or outputting via HDMI. When the temperature of the
camera rises, [ ] appears blinking on the screen. If you continue to use the
camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot be used is displayed on the
screen and some functions, such as recording and HDMI output, will be stopped.
Wait for the camera to cool down and for the message indicating that the camera
can be used again. When the message indicating that it can be used again is
displayed, turn the camera off then on again.
* When recording with the camera mounted on a tripod, etc., you can set the
temperature at which recording is stopped to a higher temperature. ([Thermal
Management]: 603)
Cannot record images. The shutter will not operate immediately
when the shutter button is pressed.
•
If [Focus/Shutter Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until
focus is achieved. ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 564)
The recorded image is whitish.
•
Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or
similar.
If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
For information about how to clean the image sensor (Dirt on the Image Sensor:
756)
Materials – Troubleshooting
741
The recorded image is too bright or dark.
•
Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (Locking Focus and
Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 300)
Multiple images are recorded at once.
•
When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst Shot 2), pressing
and holding the shutter button will take burst pictures. (Selecting the Drive Mode:
210)
•
When [Bracketing] is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images
while automatically changing the settings. (Bracket Recording: 245)
The subject is not focused properly.
•
Confirm the following details:
– Is the subject outside of the focus range?
– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? ([Shutter AF]: 567)
– Is [Focus/Shutter Priority] set to [RELEASE]? ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 564)
– Is AF Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 300) set where it is not
appropriate?
– Is [Focus Limiter] set to [ON]? ([Focus Limiter]: 163)
– Is [AF Micro Adjustment] set? ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 167)
Cannot focus or zoom with the lens.
•
Confirm the following details:
– Is [Focus Ring Lock] set to [ON]? ([Focus Ring Lock]: 566)
Materials – Troubleshooting
742
The recorded image is blurred. The image stabilizer is not
effective.
•
The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not
work properly when recording in dark places.
In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.
The recorded image looks rough. Noise appears on the picture.
•
Try the following:
– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust each
item other than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (Adjusting Image
Quality: 321)
– Set [Long Exposure NR] to [ON]. ([Long Exposure NR]: 263)
•
When the camera is used continuously, the temperature inside the camera may rise
and this may cause lower image quality. We recommend turning off the camera
whenever you are not actually recording.
The subject appears distorted on the image.
•
When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject
may appear distorted in the picture:
– [ELEC.]
– Video recording
This is a characteristic of the CMOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera,
and is not a malfunction.
Materials – Troubleshooting
743
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent
or LED lighting.
•
This is characteristic of CMOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
•
When using the electronic shutter ([Shutter Type]: 259), lowering the shutter
speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
•
If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when recording video, this can be
mitigated by fixing the shutter speed.
Either set [Flicker Decrease (Video)] ([Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 406), or fix the
shutter speed with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode (Recording Modes Specifically for
Video (Creative Video/S&Q): 361).
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.
•
Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 302)
Materials – Troubleshooting
744
The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from
the actual scene.
•
When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the
shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.
These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a
malfunction.
•
When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under lighting
such as fluorescent, LED, mercury, or sodium lighting, the coloring or screen
brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.
•
Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.
Perform [Pixel Refresh]. ([Pixel Refresh]: 615)
Materials – Troubleshooting
745
Video
Cannot record videos.
•
Try again after either returning the [System Frequency] to the original setting or
inserting another card.
•
When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after
turning on the camera.
In videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
The recorded audio is very quiet.
•
Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and
focus actions may be recorded in videos.
You can set the focus operation during video recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]
([Continuous AF]: 369).
•
Do not block the microphone hole during video recording.
An operation sound is recorded in a video.
•
We recommend setting the [ ]/[S&Q] mode and recording with touch operation if
you are bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (Operations
During Video Recording: 365)
Materials – Troubleshooting
746
Playback
Cannot play back. There are no recorded pictures.
•
Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.
•
Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal
Play]. ([Playback Mode]: 516)
•
Videos recorded with a different [System Frequency] setting cannot be played back.
Return the [System Frequency] setting to the one you used during the recording.
([System Frequency]: 129)
Materials – Troubleshooting
747
Monitor/Viewfinder
The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.
•
If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off]
([Auto LVF/Monitor Off]: 54) is activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.
•
When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the monitor display
may switch to the viewfinder display.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may
change significantly for an instant.
•
This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject
brightness changes, making the lens aperture change.
This is not a malfunction.
Unevenly bright parts or irregular colors appear on the viewfinder.
•
The viewfinder of the camera is built with OLED components. Screen burn-in may
occur on the screen/viewfinder when a same image is displayed for a long period of
time, but it does not affect the recorded images.
Materials – Troubleshooting
748
Updating of the information display on the screen is sometimes
slow.
•
When using functions that put a burden on processing in the camera, updating of the
information display on the screen may get slower, but this is not a malfunction. There
will be no change to the images recorded.
Functions that put a burden on processing in the camera:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
– HDMI output
– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone
– Tethered recording
Information displays that may get updated slower:
– [Time Code Display]
– [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
– [Luminance Spot Meter], etc.
Flash
The flash does not fire.
•
The flash does not fire when using the following functions:
– Video recording
– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]
– High Resolution mode
– [Filter Settings]
Materials – Troubleshooting
749
Wi-Fi Function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established. Radio waves get
disconnected. Wireless access point is not displayed.
General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
•
Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
•
Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens
and cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.
Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.
•
When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
•
If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely
affected. In such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.
Move the camera away from the metal surface.
Wireless access point
•
Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.
•
Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.
– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.
– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.
•
Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even
though it is present.
– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.
– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically,
manually set the channel supported by the camera.
– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.
Enter the SSID, and then connect. (Connecting by Manual Input: 677)
•
Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically
disconnected after specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.
Materials – Troubleshooting
750
Cannot connect with a wireless access point.
•
The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.
Check the authentication type and encryption key. (Connecting by Manual Input:
677)
•
Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access
point.
Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as
well as the status of other wireless devices.
Wi-Fi connection on an iOS device fails.
•
Follow the message displayed to allow connection to the camera.
If you still cannot connect, select the SSID of the camera on the Wi-Fi setup screen
of the smartphone to connect.
If the SSID is not displayed, turn off and on the camera, then perform the Bluetooth
connection settings again.
Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone is not possible.
•
Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the
camera.
When trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognize
the user name and password, and connection is not possible.
•
Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local
account/Microsoft account).
Ensure you use the local account user name and password.
Materials – Troubleshooting
751
The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The
camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.
•
At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of
“WORKGROUP”.
If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized.
In the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC
to which to connect. ([PC Connection]: 685)
•
Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.
•
When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably from
those of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending on the
OS.
Transmission of the image fails midway. Some images cannot be
transmitted.
•
Is the size of the image too large?
– Reduce the image size at [Size] ([Size]: 683), and then send.
– Transmit after dividing the video with [Video Divide] ([Video Divide]: 490).
•
File format of the video that can be sent differs depending on the destination.
(Images That Can be Sent: 672)
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
•
In the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu, [Reset], reset network settings. ([Reset]: 99)
However, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.
Materials – Troubleshooting
752
TV, PC
The TV images are displayed with gray bands.
•
Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of the images. You can change the band color in
[Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
([Background Color(Playback)]: 611)
Images cannot be imported even when connected to a PC.
•
Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. ([USB Mode]: 609)
•
Turn the camera off and on.
Materials – Troubleshooting
753
Others
When the camera is shaken, a rattling sound is heard from the
camera.
•
The sound is caused by the in-body stabilizer. This is not a malfunction.
There is rattling noise from the lens when the camera is turned on
or off, or when the camera is swung. There is a sound from the
lens when recording.
•
This is the sound of the internal lenses moving or the aperture operating. It is not a
malfunction.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
•
Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:
[] [] [] Select desired language ([Language]: 616)
The camera becomes warm.
•
The camera surface and back of the monitor may become warm during use, but this
does not indicate a problem with performance or quality.
Materials – Cautions for Use
754
Cautions for Use
The Camera
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic
equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
•
If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may
be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
•
Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely
affecting the pictures and/or sound.
•
Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic
fields created by speakers or large motors.
•
Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures
and/or sound.
•
If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning
properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then
reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
•
If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/
or sound may be adversely affected.
Always use the supplied cords and cables.
If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables
supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
•
If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be
damaged and the surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep products made of rubber, PVC or similar materials in
contact with the camera for a long period of time.
Materials – Cautions for Use
755
When Using in Cold Places or at Low Temperatures
•
Skin burns may result if you leave the metal parts of the camera in direct
contact with the skin for long periods of time at cold places (environments
with temperatures at or below 0 oC (32 oF), such as ski resorts or places at high
altitude).
Use gloves or similar when using it for long periods.
•
The performance of the battery (Number of pictures that can be taken/available
recording time) may decrease temporarily at temperatures between −10 °C and 0 °C
(14 oF and 32 oF).
Keep the battery warm as you are using by keeping it inside your cold weather gear
or clothes. Battery performance will recover when the internal temperature rises
again.
•
The battery cannot be charged at temperatures below 0 °C (32 oF).
When charging is not possible, the charging light on the camera body blinks red.
•
If using in cold locations, do not allow water droplets and snow to remain on the
camera.
If these are left on the camera, water may freeze in gaps in the camera on/off switch,
speaker, and microphone, making these parts difficult to move, and/or leading to
reduced volume. This is not a malfunction.
Materials – Cautions for Use
756
Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler,
and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe
the camera with a dry, soft cloth.
•
When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung
wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth.
•
Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to
clean the camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel
off.
•
When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
Dirt on the Image Sensor
If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the
recording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the
recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid
changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a
lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
Dust reduction function
The camera has a dust reduction function that will blow off the dirt and dust
that have affixed to the front of the image sensor.
If the dirt is particularly noticeable, from the [Setup] ([Others]) menu,
perform [Sensor Cleaning]. ([Sensor Cleaning]: 616)
Materials – Cautions for Use
757
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the
following when you do have to clean it yourself.
•
Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available blower.
Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.
•
Do not put the blower further inside than the lens mount.
The blower can scratch the image sensor if it touches.
•
Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
•
If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or
Panasonic.
Cleaning the Viewfinder
If the viewfinder becomes dirty, blow dirt off the surface of the viewfinder
using a commercially available blower, then lightly wipe with a soft dry
cloth.
•
The eye cup cannot be removed, so make sure it does not come loose when
cleaning the viewfinder.
•
If the eye cup accidentally gets removed, consult the dealer or Panasonic.
Monitor/Viewfinder
•
Do not push hard on the monitor.
This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.
•
Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor/viewfinder
screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light
constantly (red, blue, or green) on the screen.
This is not a malfunction.
Though the monitor/viewfinder screen parts are produced with highly controlled
precision technology, some pixels may be inactive or always lit.
The spots will not be recorded on images on a card.
Materials – Cautions for Use
758
Lens
•
When using this lens, take care not to drop, bump, or apply undue force to it.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to this lens and the digital
camera.
•
Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources.
The concentrated light may cause fire or damage.
•
Do not allow strong light beams, such as laser light, to be directly exposed to this
camera (lens). These can destroy the image sensor and cause the camera to
malfunction.
•
Images may be affected by dust, dirt, and soiling (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) on the
lens surface.
Before and after recording, use a blower to blow off dust and dirt from the surface of
the lens, then lightly wipe with a soft dry cloth to remove soiling.
•
When the camera is not being used, attach the lens cap and lens rear cap to prevent
dust and dirt from adhering to or entering the camera.
•
To protect the lens contact points (A), do not do the following.
These may cause a malfunction.
– Touch the lens contact points.
– Soil the lens contact points.
– Place the lens with its mount surface facing down.
•
To improve the dust and splash resistant performance of the interchangeable lens
(H-ES12060/H-FS12060), a lens mount rubber is used in the mount.
– The lens mount rubber will leave scuff marks on the digital camera mount, but this
does not impact performance.
– To replace the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.
(A)
Materials – Cautions for Use
759
Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.
It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on
performance increases as the temperature rises or drops.
Do not let the battery terminals (B) become soiled.
•
Wipe with a dry cloth if they become soiled.
Always remove the battery after use.
•
Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic objects
(clips, etc.) for storage or transport.
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the
battery and the contacts are deformed.
•
Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into
the camera.
Dispose of unusable battery.
•
The battery has a limited life.
•
Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects
(such as necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
•
This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if
you touch a battery.
(B)
Materials – Cautions for Use
760
AC Adaptor
•
The charging lights may blink under the influence of static electricity or
electromagnetic wave, depending on the charging environment. This phenomenon
has no effects on charging.
•
If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.
Keep the charger 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.
•
During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.
•
After use, be sure to disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet.
(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
Card
Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct sunlight,
or areas prone to electromagnetic waves and static.
Do not bend or drop the card.
Do not subject the card to strong vibration.
•
Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
•
Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or
carrying the card.
•
Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.
Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.
Materials – Cautions for Use
761
Personal Information
Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.
We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password and
Wi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. ([Wi-Fi Setup] Menu:
685)
•
Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as
recording dates and times, and location information.
Disclaimer
•
Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to
erroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other
handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or
indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal
information.
When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera
•
After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information, including
personal information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you have
registered or saved within the camera with [Reset] ([Reset]: 99).
•
Reset the settings to protect the personal information. ([Reset]: 99)
•
Remove the card from the camera.
•
Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
•
Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above
operations are not possible due to malfunction.
Materials – Cautions for Use
762
Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card
Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.
We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC
data deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/
transferring the card.
You are responsible for handling of data on cards.
When Not Using the Camera for a Long Period of Time
•
Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.
If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable
even after charging.
•
Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.
(Recommended temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF); recommended
humidity: 40 %RH to 60 %RH)
•
If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged
once per year, fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then
stored again.
•
We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a
closet or a cabinet.
•
Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long
period of time.
Image Data
•
Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to
inappropriate handling.
Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
Materials – Cautions for Use
763
Tripod
•
Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it.
•
When using a tripod, removal of the battery may not be possible.
•
Care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the camera,
or cause the rating label to come off.
•
Depending on the type of tripod you are using, the lens may interfere with the tripod
head if the lens you are using has a large diameter.
Attempting to tighten the tripod screws in this case may cause damage to the
camera or the lens.
We recommend using the Tripod Adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional).
•
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod.
Shoulder Strap
•
If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the
camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
Materials – Cautions for Use
764
Wi-Fi Function
Use the camera as a wireless LAN device.
When using devices or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety
designs and defects for the systems used.
Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using the
camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.
Use of the Wi-Fi function of the camera is presumed to be in
countries where it is sold.
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in
countries other than those where it is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for
any violations.
There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted.
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party.
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity
or interference.
•
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,
such as near microwave ovens.
These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
•
Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones
that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both
devices.
Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use.
When using Wi-Fi, wireless networks (SSID) that you are not allowed to use may be
displayed, but you should not connect to these as it may be viewed as unauthorized
access.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
765
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Available Recording Time with the Battery
Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time
lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used.
•
The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) standards.
•
Using a Panasonic SDXC memory card.
•
Using a Samsung external SSD.
•
The values listed are approximate.
Recording Pictures (When Using the Monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recording media Number of pictures that can be taken
SDXC memory card 370
External SSD 310
Recording media Number of pictures that can be taken
SDXC memory card 390
External SSD 320
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
766
Recording Pictures (When Using the Viewfinder)
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
•
The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time to Sleep] in
[Power Save LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting]
function works as intended.
(Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by
Panasonic)
Recording media Number of pictures that can be taken
SDXC memory card 370 (1300)
External SSD 310
Recording media Number of pictures that can be taken
SDXC memory card 390 (1350)
External SSD 320
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
767
Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)
•
[Image Area of Video]: [FULL]
(A) Using an SDXC memory card
(B) Using an external SSD
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
[Rec. File
Format]
[Rec Quality]
Recording
media
Continuous
available
recording time
(minutes)
Actual available
recording time
(minutes)
[MP4]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
(A) 90 45
(B) 80 40
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
(A) 100 50
(B) 90 45
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
(A) 100 50
(B) 90 45
[MOV]
[5.7K/60p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/50p/420/10-L]
(A) 50 25
(B) 50 25
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
(A) 90 45
(B) 80 40
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
(A) 100 50
(B) 80 40
[Apple
ProRes]
[5.7K/30p/422 HQ]
[5.7K/25p/422 HQ]
(A)
(B) 40 20
[C4K/30p/422 HQ]
[C4K/25p/422 HQ]
(A)
(B) 50 25
[FHD/60p/422]
[FHD/50p/422]
(A) 100 50
(B) 60 30
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
768
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
•
Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating
actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
[Rec. File
Format]
[Rec Quality]
Recording
media
Continuous
available
recording time
(minutes)
Actual available
recording time
(minutes)
[MP4]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
(A) 90 45
(B) 80 40
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
(A) 100 50
(B) 90 45
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
(A) 100 50
(B) 90 45
[MOV]
[5.7K/60p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/50p/420/10-L]
(A) 50 25
(B) 50 25
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
(A) 100 50
(B) 80 40
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
(A) 100 50
(B) 90 45
[Apple
ProRes]
[5.7K/30p/422 HQ]
[5.7K/25p/422 HQ]
(A)
(B) 40 20
[C4K/30p/422 HQ]
[C4K/25p/422 HQ]
(A)
(B) 60 30
[FHD/60p/422]
[FHD/50p/422]
(A) 100 50
(B) 70 35
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
769
Playback (When Using the Monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recording media Playback time (minutes)
SDXC memory card 240
External SSD 210
Recording media Playback time (minutes)
SDXC memory card 250
External SSD 210
•
The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time vary
depending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions.
For example, these will reduce in the following case:
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
•
If the usage duration drops significantly even when the battery is fully charged,
then the battery is at the end of its service life.
Replace with a new battery.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
770
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos
that can be recorded on recording media.
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
•
The listed values are a guide to the minimum number of pictures to be taken.
This may vary depending on the recorded subject.
•
[Aspect Ratio]: [4:3]; [Picture Quality]: [FINE]
•
[Aspect Ratio]: [4:3]; [Picture Quality]: [RAW+FINE]
[Picture
Size]
Card capacity External SSD capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[L] (25M) 4370 8650 16580 34320 63570 127160
[M] (12.5M) 8100 16040 30490 63100 112180 224390
[S] (6.5M) 14110 27950 52510 108680 190710 381450
[Picture
Size]
Card capacity External SSD capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[L] (25M) 870 1720 3310 6860 13240 26490
[M] (12.5M) 950 1900 3640 7550 14550 29120
[S] (6.5M) 1010 2000 3840 7950 15380 30760
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
771
Video Recording Time
•
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
•
Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.
•
The values listed are approximate.
•
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
1h55m 3h55m 7h35m 15h45m 30h45m 61h35m
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 4h55m 9h45m 19h30m 40h30m 78h00m 156h10m
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p] 6h30m 13h00m 26h00m 54h00m 104h00m 208h15m
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p] 5h40m 11h25m 22h45m 47h15m 91h00m 182h10m
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
[4K/10bit/72M/25p] 1h55m 3h55m 7h35m 15h45m 30h45m 61h35m
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] 4h55m 9h45m 19h30m 40h30m 78h00m 156h10m
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p] 6h30m 13h00m 26h00m 54h00m 104h00m 208h15m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
772
•
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
[4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
[FHD/240p/422/10-I]
2h45m 5h30m
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
[4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
14m00s 28m00s 54m00s 1h50m 3h40m 7h20m
[C4K/30p/422/10-I]
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]
[4K/30p/422/10-I]
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
[FHD/120p/422/10-I]
21m00s 42m00s 1h20m 2h50m 5h30m 11h05m
[5.7K/60p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/48p/420/10-L]
[4.4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4.4K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/120p/420/10-L]
[4K/120p/420/10-L]
28m00s 56m00s 1h45m 3h45m 7h20m 14h45m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
773
[5.8K/30p/420/10-L]
[5.8K/24p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/30p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/24p/420/10-L]
[C4K/60p/422/10-L]
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
[4K/60p/422/10-L]
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/240p/422/10-L]
[FHD/240p/420/10-L]
[FHD/60p/422/10-I]
[FHD/48p/422/10-I]
[FHD/30p/422/10-I]
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
42m00s 1h20m 2h40m 5h40m 11h05m 22h10m
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]
[C4K/30p/420/10-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]
56m00s 1h50m 3h35m 7h35m 14h45m 29h35m
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
774
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]
[4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]
[FHD/200p/422/10-I]
2h45m 5h30m
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]
[4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]
14m00s 28m00s 54m00s 1h50m 3h40m 7h20m
[C4K/25p/422/10-I]
[4K/25p/422/10-I]
[FHD/100p/422/10-I]
21m00s 42m00s 1h20m 2h50m 5h30m 11h05m
[5.7K/50p/420/10-L]
[4.4K/50p/420/10-L]
[C4K/100p/420/10-L]
[4K/100p/420/10-L]
28m00s 56m00s 1h45m 3h45m 7h20m 14h45m
[5.8K/25p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/25p/420/10-L]
[C4K/50p/422/10-L]
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]
[4K/50p/422/10-L]
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
[FHD/200p/422/10-L]
[FHD/200p/420/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-I]
[FHD/25p/422/10-I]
42m00s 1h20m 2h40m 5h40m 11h05m 22h10m
[C4K/25p/422/10-L]
[C4K/25p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
[FHD/100p/422/10-L]
[FHD/100p/420/10-L]
56m00s 1h50m 3h35m 7h35m 14h45m 29h35m
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
775
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
[FHD/120p/422/10-I]
21m00s 42m00s 1h20m 2h50m 5h30m 11h05m
[5.7K/48p/420/10-L]
[4.4K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/120p/420/10-L]
[4K/120p/420/10-L]
28m00s 56m00s 1h45m 3h45m 7h20m 14h45m
[5.8K/24p/420/10-L]
[5.7K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
42m00s 1h20m 2h40m 5h40m 11h05m 22h10m
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]
56m00s 1h50m 3h35m 7h35m 14h45m 29h35m
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
776
•
[Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[5.7K/30p/422 HQ] 1h05m 2h15m
[5.7K/30p/422] 1h40m 3h30m
[5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 1h25m 2h55m
[5.7K/24p/422] 2h10m 4h20m
[C4K/60p/422 HQ] 1h05m 2h15m
[C4K/60p/422] 1h40m 3h25m
[C4K/30p/422 HQ] 2h15m 4h30m
[C4K/30p/422] 3h25m 6h50m
[C4K/24p/422 HQ] 2h50m 5h40m
[C4K/24p/422] 4h15m 8h30m
[FHD/60p/422 HQ] 18m00s 37m00s 1h10m 2h30m 4h50m 9h45m
[FHD/60p/422] 28m00s 56m00s 1h45m 3h45m 7h20m 14h40m
[FHD/30p/422 HQ] 37m00s 1h10m 2h25m 5h00m 9h45m 19h30m
[FHD/30p/422] 56m00s 1h50m 3h35m 7h30m 14h40m 29h20m
[FHD/24p/422 HQ] 47m00s 1h30m 3h00m 6h15m 12h15m 24h30m
[FHD/24p/422] 1h10m 2h20m 4h30m 9h20m 18h20m 36h40m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
777
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[5.7K/25p/422 HQ] 1h20m 2h45m
[5.7K/25p/422] 2h05m 4h10m
[C4K/50p/422 HQ] 1h20m 2h40m
[C4K/50p/422] 2h00m 4h05m
[C4K/25p/422 HQ] 2h40m 5h25m
[C4K/25p/422] 4h05m 8h10m
[FHD/50p/422 HQ] 22m00s 44m00s 1h25m 3h00m 5h50m 11h40m
[FHD/50p/422] 33m00s 1h05m 2h10m 4h30m 8h45m 17h35m
[FHD/25p/422 HQ] 45m00s 1h25m 2h50m 6h00m 11h40m 23h30m
[FHD/25p/422] 1h05m 2h10m 4h20m 9h00m 17h35m 35h15m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
778
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[5.7K/24p/422 HQ] 1h25m 2h50m
[5.7K/24p/422] 2h10m 4h20m
[C4K/24p/422 HQ] 2h50m 5h40m
[C4K/24p/422] 4h15m 8h30m
[FHD/24p/422 HQ] 46m00s 1h30m 3h00m 6h15m 12h10m 24h20m
[FHD/24p/422] 1h10m 2h20m 4h30m 9h20m 18h20m 36h40m
•
The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time will be
shorter depending on the SD card used when recording with [Segmented File
Recording].
•
The number of pictures that can be taken and the available video recording time
depend on the recording conditions and the type of recording media.
•
[9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of pictures
that can be taken is 10000 or more.
•
[99h59m] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining video recording
time is 100 hours or more.
•
The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.
Materials – Continuous Recording Time for Video
779
Continuous Recording Time for Video
During video recording, recording will be stopped automatically to protect
the camera if the ambient temperature is high or recording is performed
over extended periods and the internal temperature gets too high.
Guide to Continuous Recording Times for Video from a
Cold Start
*1
•
When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic:
– Ambient temperature (temperature in the vicinity of the camera): 23 oC (73.4 oF)/
40 oC (104 oF)
– Camera settings at the time of purchase
– Using an SD card compatible with UHS-II
*1 With the camera turned off and the temperature inside and outside the camera at
23 oC (73.4 oF) (or 40 oC (104 oF)), the camera is turned on and video recording is
started immediately.
*2 Times may be shorter than shown in the table due to the environment and
conditions of use, the status of camera use, and the usage conditions prior to
video recording.
Video recording
settings
Available recording time
*2
23 oC (73.4 oF) 40 oC (104 oF)
C4K/4K 120p/100p Approx. 15 min Approx. 3 min
C4K/4K 60p/50p Approx. 30 min Approx. 7 min
C4K/4K 30p/25p Approx. 30 min Approx. 7 min
FHD 60p/50p Approx. 30 min Approx. 7 min
Materials – Continuous Recording Time for Video
780
Restarting Video Recording After Stopping Due to
Temperature Increase in the Camera
If video recording stops due to temperature increase in the camera, the
temperature in the camera needs to be lowered before video recording can
be started again.
•
We recommend turning the camera off to lower the temperature in the camera.
•
The continuous recording time for video after restarting depends on the standby time
(the amount of time the camera was off for).
Guide to the standby time after turning off and the continuous recording time for
video after restarting
C4K/4K 60p/50p: 10 minutes standby after turning off Approx. 10 minutes recording
available after restart
*3
*3 23 oC (73.4 oF) ambient, when recording under the test conditions specified by
Panasonic
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
781
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/
Settings Available for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[Aspect Ratio] [4:3]
[Picture Quality] [FINE]
[Picture Size] [L] (25M)
[High Resolution
Mode Setting]
[Handheld High-Res] [OFF]
[Picture Quality] [COMBINED]
[Picture Size] [XL]
[Simul Record Normal
Shot]
[ON]
[Shutter Delay] [2 SEC]
[Motion Blur Processing] [MODE1]
[Long Exposure NR] [ON]
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[100]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[AUTO]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
782
[Min. Shutter Speed] [AUTO]
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF]
[Vignetting Comp.] [OFF]
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [OFF]
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Focus]
[AF Detection Setting] [OFF]
[Detecting Subject]
[Type of Subject] [HUMAN]
[Target Parts] [ ]
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] [Set 1]
[Focus Limiter]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[AF Assist Light] [ON]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON] / [OFF] [ON]
[SET] —
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] [FAST]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
783
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Flash]
[Flash Mode] [ ]
[Firing Mode] [TTL]
[Flash Adjust.] [±0 EV]
[Flash Synchro] [1ST]
[Manual Flash Adjust.] [1/1]
[Auto Exposure Comp.] [OFF]
[Wireless] [OFF]
[Wireless Channel] [1CH]
[Wireless FP] [OFF]
[Communication Light] [HIGH]
[Wireless Setup] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
784
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type] [OFF]
[More Settings] —
[Silent Mode] [OFF]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] [ ]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF]
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Burst Shot Setting]
[Burst Shot 1 Setting] [H]
[Burst Shot 2 Setting] [SH75]
[SH Burst Pre-Recording
Time]
[0.5SEC]
[Shutter Type] [MECH.]
[Shutter Delay] [OFF]
[Ex. Tele Conv.] [OFF]
[Time Lapse/
Animation]
[Mode] [Time Lapse Shot]
[Shooting Interval Setting] [ON]
[Start Time] [Now]
[Image Count] [1]
[Shooting Interval] [1m00s]
[Exposure Leveling] [OFF]
[Create New Folder At
Rec]
—
[Live View
Composite]
[Start] —
[Shutter Delay] [OFF]
[Self Timer]
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] /
[ ] to [ ]
[]
[SET] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
785
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode] [P]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[100]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[AUTO]
[Synchro Scan] [OFF]
[Flicker Decrease (Video)] [OFF]
[Master Pedestal Level] [0]
[SS/Gain Operation] [SEC/ISO]
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF]
[Vignetting Comp.] [OFF]
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [OFF]
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[OFF]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
786
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Rec. File Format]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] or
[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [MP4]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
[MOV]
[Image Area of Video] [FULL]
[Rec Quality]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]:
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [4K/
8bit/100M/25p]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[Rec Quality (My List)] —
[Slow & Quick Setting] [30fps]
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display] [OFF]
[Count Up] [REC RUN]
[Time Code Value] —
[Time Code Mode] [DF]
[HDMI Time Code Output] [OFF]
[Luminance Level] [16-255]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
787
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Focus]
[AF Detection Setting] [OFF]
[Detecting Subject]
[Type of Subject] [HUMAN]
[Target Parts] [ ]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Focus Limiter]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Continuous AF] [MODE1]
[AF Assist Light] [ON]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON] / [OFF] [ON]
[SET] —
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] [FAST]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
788
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level
Disp.]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Mute Sound Input] [OFF]
[Sound Rec Gain Level] [STANDARD]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] [0dB]
[Sound Rec Quality] [48kHz/24bit]
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] [ON]
[Wind Noise Canceller] [STANDARD]
[Wind Cut] [OFF]
[Lens Noise Cut] [ON]
[Mic Socket] [ ]
[Special Mic.] [STEREO]
[4ch Mic Input] [OFF]
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] [ON]
[Sound Output] [REALTIME]
[Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3]
[Sound Monitoring Channel] [CH1/CH2]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
789
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode] [OFF]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] [ ]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF]
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Self Timer Setting]
[Self Timer] [ ]
[Self Timer For Video] [OFF]
[Focus Transition]
[Focus Position Setting] —
[Focus Transition Speed] [M]
[Focus Transition Rec] [OFF]
[Focus Transition Wait] [OFF]
[Segmented File Recording] [OFF]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
790
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style
Settings]
[Show/Hide Photo Style] —
[My Photo Style Settings] —
[Reset Photo Style] —
[LUT Library] [Vlog_709]
[ISO Increments] [1/3 EV]
[Extended ISO] [OFF]
[Exposure Offset
Adjust.]
[Multi Metering] [±0EV]
[Center Weighted] [±0EV]
[Spot] [±0EV]
[Highlight Weighted] [±0EV]
[Face Priority In Multi Metering] [ON]
[AWB Lock Setting]
[Operation Syncs With
Shutter]
[OFF]
[Lock Hold With Fn
Button]
[ON]
[Color Space] [sRGB]
[Exposure Comp. Reset] [OFF]
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] [ON]
[CreativeVideo
Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure
Comp.]
[]
[White Balance] [ ]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[AF Mode] [ ]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
791
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Focus/Shutter]
[Focus/Shutter
Priority]
[AFS] [FOCUS]
[AFC] [BALANCE]
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] [OFF]
[AF/AE Lock Hold] [OFF]
[AF+MF] [OFF]
[MF Assist]
[Focus Ring] [ON]
[AF Mode] [ON]
[Press Joystick] [OFF]
[MF Assist Display] [PIP]
[MF Guide] [ ] / [ ]
*1
[Focus Ring Lock] [OFF]
[Show/Hide AF
Mode]
[Tracking] [ON]
[Full Area AF] [ON]
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] [ON]
[Zone] [ON]
[1-Area+] [ON]
[Pinpoint] [ON]
[Pinpoint AF
Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [MID]
[Pinpoint AF Display] [PIP]
[AF-Point Scope
Setting]
[Keep Enlarged Display] [OFF]
[PIP Display] [PIP]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
792
*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
[Shutter AF] [ON]
[Human Eye Detection Display] [ON]
[Half-Press Shutter] [OFF]
[Assign REC to Shutter Button] [ON]
[Quick AF] [OFF]
[Eye Sensor AF] [OFF]
[Looped Focus Frame] [OFF]
[Enlarged Live
Display(Video)]
[Keep Enlarged Display] [ON]
[PIP Display] [PIP]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
793
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Operation]
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style] [MODE1]
[Front Dial Assignment] [Value]
[Item Customize (Photo)] —
[Item Customize (Video)] —
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen] [ON]
[Touch Tab] [OFF]
[Touch AF] [AF]
[Touch Pad AF] [OFF]
[Operation Lock
Setup]
[Cursor] [ ]
[Joystick] [ ]
[Touch Screen] [ ]
[Dial] [ ]
[DISP. Button] [ ]
[Fn Button Set]
[Setting in REC mode] —
[Setting in PLAY mode] —
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button] [AFTER PRESSING2]
[ISO Displayed
Setting]
[Front/Rear Dials] [ / ]
[Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/
Down)]
[OFF]
[Front/Rear Dials] [ / ]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
794
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET1]
[Rotation (F/SS)] [ ]
[Control Dial Assignment] [ ]
[Exposure Comp.] [OFF]
[Dial Operation Switch
Setup]
—
[Rotation (Menu
Operation)]
[]
[Joystick Setting] [D.FOCUS Movement]
[Video Rec. Button (Remote)] [Video Record]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
795
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time (photo)] [OFF]
[Playback Operation
Priority]
[OFF]
[Constant Preview]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Histogram] [OFF]
[Photo Grid Line] [OFF]
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1] / [MODE2] /
[OFF]
[OFF]
[SET] [M]
[Night Mode]
[Monitor] [OFF]
[LVF] [OFF]
[LVF/Monitor Disp.
Set]
[LVF Disp. Set] [ ]
[Monitor Disp. Set] [ ]
[Horizontal Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]
[Vertical Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]
[Expo.Meter] [OFF]
[Focal Length] [ON]
[Blinking Highlights] [OFF]
[Sheer Overlay]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[I.S. Status Scope] [OFF]
[Level Gauge] [ON]
[Luminance Spot Meter] [OFF]
[Framing Outline] [OFF]
[Show/Hide Monitor
Layout]
[Control Panel] [ON]
[Black Screen] [ON]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
796
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Video)]
[V-Log View Assist]
[LUT Select] [Vlog_709]
[LUT View Assist
(Monitor)]
[OFF]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist]
[Monitor] [MODE2]
[HDMI] [AUTO]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF]
[Monochrome Live View] [OFF]
[Center Marker] [OFF]
[Safety Zone Marker] [OFF]
[Frame Marker]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] /
[ZEBRA1+2] / [OFF]
[OFF]
[SET] —
[WFM/Vector Scope] [OFF]
[Color Bars] [SMPTE]
[Video-Priority Display] [OFF]
[Red REC Frame Indicator] [OFF]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
797
*1 The adjustment value for the focus point cannot be registered.
*2 The settings information cannot be loaded onto a camera different from the one
where the camera settings were saved.
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [IN/OUT]
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Info Display] [OFF]
[HDMI Recording Control] [OFF]
[Sound Output (HDMI)] [ON]
[Enlarged Live Display] [OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Lens / Others]
[Lens Focus Resume] [OFF]
[Power Zoom Lens]
[Step Zoom] [OFF]
[Zoom Speed] —
[Zoom Ring] [ON]
[Lens Fn Button Setting] [Focus Stop]
[Aperture Ring Increment] [1/3EV]
[Focus Ring
Control]
[NON-LINEAR] /
[LINEAR]
[NON-LINEAR]
[SET] [300°]
[AF Micro Adjustment] [OFF]
*1
*2
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Lens Info. Confirmation] [ON]
[Vertical Position Info (Video)] [ON]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
798
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Card/File]
[Card Format] —
[Double Card Slot
Function]
[Recording Method] [ ]
[Destination Card Slot] [ ]
[USB-SSD] [OFF]
[Folder / File
Settings]
[Select Folder] —
[Create a New Folder] —
[File Name Setting] [Folder Number Link]
[File Number Reset] —
[Copyright
Information]
[Artist] [OFF]
[Copyright Holder] [OFF]
[Display Copyright Info.] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
799
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Monitor / Display]
[Power Save Mode]
[Sleep Mode] [1MIN.]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON]
[Auto LVF/Monitor Off] [1MIN.]
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
—
[Thermal
Management]
[Recording Max
Temperature]
[STANDARD]
[Monitor Frame Rate] [60fps]
[LVF Frame Rate] [60fps]
[Monitor Settings] / [Viewfinder] —
[Monitor Backlight] / [LVF Luminance] [AUTO]
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity] [HIGH]
[LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/MON AUTO]
[Level Gauge
Adjust.]
[Adjust.] —
[Level Gauge Value
Reset]
—
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
800
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [IN/OUT]
[Beep]
[Beep Volume] [ ]
[AF Beep Volume] [ ]
[AF Beep Tone] [ ]
[E-Shutter Vol] [ ]
[E-Shutter Tone] [ ]
[Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3]
[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]
[COMBINED WITH
REC]
[Wi-Fi] —
[Bluetooth] —
[USB]
[USB Mode]
[ ] [Select on
connection]
[USB Power Supply] [ON]
[Battery Use Priority] [BG]
[HDMI Connection]
[Output
Resolution(Playback)]
[AUTO]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO]
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [OFF]
[Background
Color(Playback)]
[]
[Photo Luminance Level] [16-255]
[Network Connection Light] [ON]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
801
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Setting]
[Save to Custom Mode] —
[Load Custom Mode] —
[Custom Mode
Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom
Mode]
[3]
[Edit Title] —
[How to Reload Custom
Mode]
—
[Select Loading Details] —
[Save/Restore
Camera Setting]
[Save] —
[Load] —
[Delete] —
[Keep Settings While
Format]
[OFF]
[Reset] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
802
*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
*2 Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
displayed due to differences in specifications.
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Others]
[Clock Set] 0:00:00 1/1/2023
[Time Zone] *1
[System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] /
[50.00Hz (PAL)]
*1
[Pixel Refresh] —
[Sensor Cleaning] —
[Language] *1
[Firmware Version] —
[Approved Regulations]
*2
—
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
803
Menu Default setting
[My Menu]: [Edit My Menu]
[Add] —
[Sorting] —
[Delete] —
[Display from My Menu] [OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Playback Mode]
[Playback Mode] [Normal Play]
[Slide Show] —
[Rotate Disp.] [ON]
[Picture Sort] [DATE/TIME]
[Magnify from AF Point] [OFF]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] [MODE2]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF]
[Behavior After Video Playback] [End Playback]
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Process Image]
[RAW Processing] —
[Time Lapse Video] —
[Stop Motion Video] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
804
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Add/Delete Info.]
[Protect] —
[Rating] —
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Edit Image]
[Resize] —
[Rotate] —
[Video Divide] —
[Copy] —
[Video Repair] —
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Others]
[Delete Confirmation] ["No" first]
[Delete All Images] —
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
805
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each
Recording Mode
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style]
[Metering Mode]
[Aspect Ratio]
[Picture Quality]
[Picture Size]
[High Resolution
Mode Setting]
[Handheld High-Res]
[Picture Quality]
[Picture Size]
[Simul Record Normal
Shot]
[Shutter Delay]
[Motion Blur Processing]
[Long Exposure NR]
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[Min. Shutter Speed]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[Vignetting Comp.]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous Record w/
o Filter]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
806
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Focus]
[AF Detection Setting]
[Detecting Subject]
[Type of Subject]
[Target Parts]
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[Focus Limiter]
[AF Assist Light]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Focus Frame Moving Speed]
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Flash]
[Flash Mode]
[Firing Mode]
[Flash Adjust.]
[Flash Synchro]
[Manual Flash Adjust.]
[Auto Exposure Comp.]
[Wireless]
[Wireless Channel]
[Wireless FP]
[Communication Light]
[Wireless Setup]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
807
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type]
[More Settings]
[Silent Mode]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Anamorphic (Video)]
[Lens Information]
[Burst Shot
Setting]
[Burst Shot 1 Setting]
[Burst Shot 2 Setting]
[SH Burst Pre-Recording
Time]
[Shutter Type]
[Shutter Delay]
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
[Time Lapse/Animation]
[Live View
Composite]
[Start]
[Shutter Delay]
[Self Timer]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
808
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode]
[Photo Style]
[Metering Mode]
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[Synchro Scan]
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]
[Master Pedestal Level]
[SS/Gain Operation]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[Vignetting Comp.]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous Record w/
o Filter]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
809
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Rec. File Format]
[Image Area of Video]
[Rec Quality]
[Rec Quality (My List)]
[Slow & Quick Setting]
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display]
[Count Up]
[Time Code Value]
[Time Code Mode]
[HDMI Time Code
Output]
[Luminance Level]
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Focus]
[AF Detection Setting]
[Detecting Subject]
[Type of Subject]
[Target Parts]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Focus Limiter] [OFF]
[Continuous AF]
[AF Assist Light]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Focus Frame Moving Speed]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
810
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[Mute Sound Input]
[Sound Rec Gain Level]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
[Sound Rec Quality]
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
[Wind Noise Canceller]
[Wind Cut]
[Lens Noise Cut]
[Mic Socket]
[Special Mic.]
[4ch Mic Input]
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
[Sound Output]
[Headphone Volume]
[Sound Monitoring Channel]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
811
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Anamorphic (Video)]
[Lens Information]
[Self Timer Setting]
[Self Timer]
[Self Timer For Video]
[Focus Transition]
[Segmented File Recording]
Materials – Specifications
812
Specifications
The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.
Digital camera body (DC-G9M2):
Information for your safety
Type
≥ Type
Digital Single Lens Mirrorless camera
≥ Lens mount
Micro Four Thirds Mount
≥ Recording media
SD memory card / SDHC memory card
*1
/ SDXC memory card
*1
*1 Compliant with UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3, UHS-II Video Speed Class 90
Double slot recording function is available.
Power source:
9.0 V
Power consumption:
4.6 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.8 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060)]
4.5 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.6 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060)]
Materials – Specifications
813
Image sensor
≥ Image sensor
4/3″ Live MOS sensor, a total of 26,520,000 pixels, primary color filter
≥ Effective number of pixels of the camera
25,210,000 pixels
Latitude
13+ stops (sensor output 60 fps or lower), 12+ stops (sensor output 61 fps or higher)
([V-Log])
Recording format for still images
≥ File format for still images
JPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 2.31 compliant) / RAW
≥ Picture size (pixels)
When the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]
[L]: 5776×4336
[M]: 4096×3072
[S]: 2944×2208
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 11552×8672
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 8192×6144
When the aspect ratio setting is [3:2]
[L]: 5776×3848
[M]: 4096×2728
[S]: 2944×1960
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 11552×7696
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 8192×5464
Materials – Specifications
814
When the aspect ratio setting is [16:9]
[L]: 5776×3248
[M]: 4096×2304
[S]: 2944×1656
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 11552×6496
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 8192×4608
When the aspect ratio setting is [1:1]
[L]: 4336×4336
[M]: 3072×3072
[S]: 2208×2208
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 8672×8672
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 6144×6144
≥ Image quality for pictures
Fine / Standard / RAW+Fine / RAW+Standard / RAW
Materials – Specifications
815
Recording format for video
≥ Video format
MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)
MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC, Apple ProRes)
≥ Audio compression format
MP4: AAC (2ch, 48 kHz/16 bit)
MOV: LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit)
*2
*2 LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit and 4ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit)
is available for selection when an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1:
optional) is attached
≥ System frequency
59.94 Hz / 50.00 Hz / 24.00 Hz
≥ Image quality for video
Refer to the “[Rec Quality]” pages for information about resolution, recording frame
rate, and other elements of recording quality. ([Rec Quality]: 133)
≥ S&Q (Slow & Quick)
Refer to the “Slow & Quick Video” pages for information about recording quality and
frame rate settings. (Slow & Quick Video: 422)
Materials – Specifications
816
Viewfinder
≥ Type
Aspect ratio 4:3, 0.5 inches, approx. 3,680,000 dots, organic EL (OLED) live view
viewfinder
≥ Field of view ratio
Approx. 100 %
≥ Magnification
Approx. 1.6×, Approx. 0.8× (35 mm film camera equivalent), −1.0 m
−1
50 mm at
infinity, with aspect ratio set to [4:3]
≥ Eye point
Approx. 21 mm (at −1.0 m
−1
)
≥ Diopter adjustment range
−4.0 to +2.0 diopter
≥ Eye sensor
Yes
Monitor
≥ Type
Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches, approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch screen
≥ Field of view ratio
Approx. 100 %
Materials – Specifications
817
Focus
≥ AF type
TTL type based on image detection (image plane phase detection AF/contrast AF)
≥ Focus mode
AFS / AFC / MF
≥ AF mode
Tracking
*3
/ Full Area AF
*3
/ Zone (Horizontal/Vertical)
*3
/ Zone
*3
/
1-Area+Supplementary
*3
/ 1-Area
*3
/ Pinpoint
Focus area selection is possible by touching or with the joystick
*3 Automatic detection (Human, Animal, Car, Motorcycle) can be switched ON/OFF
≥ AF Micro Adjustment
Yes (All / Adjust By Lens)
Exposure control
≥ Light metering system, Light metering mode
1728-zone metering, multi-metering / center-weighted metering / spot metering /
highlight-weighted metering
≥ Metering range
EV 0 to EV 18 (F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)
≥ Exposure
Program AE (P) / Aperture-Priority AE (A) / Shutter-Priority AE (S) / Manual
Exposure (M)
≥ Exposure compensation
1/3 EV steps, ±5 EV
≥ ISO sensitivity for still images (standard output sensitivity)
Normal: AUTO / 50
*4
/ 100 to 25600
[V-Log]: AUTO / 125
*4
/ 200
*4
/ 400
*4
/ 500 to 12800
*4 When [Extended ISO] is set
•
Switchable between 1/3 EV and 1 EV steps
Materials – Specifications
818
≥ ISO sensitivity for video (standard output sensitivity)
Normal:
Sensor output 60 fps or lower: AUTO / 50
*5
/ 100 to 12800 (base sensitivity ISO100)
Sensor output 61 fps or higher: AUTO / 50
*5
/ 100 to 3200 / 6400
*5
/ 12800
*5
(base
sensitivity ISO100)
[V-Log]:
Sensor output 60 fps or lower: AUTO / 125
*5
/ 200
*5
/ 400
*5
/ 500 to 12800 (base
sensitivity ISO500)
Sensor output 61 fps or higher: AUTO / 125
*5
/ 200
*5
/ 250 to 3200 / 6400
*5
/ 12800
*5
(base sensitivity ISO250)
[Hybrid Log Gamma]:
Sensor output 60 fps or lower: AUTO / 250 to 12800 (base sensitivity ISO250)
Sensor output 61 fps or higher: AUTO / 250 to 3200 / 6400
*5
/ 12800
*5
(base
sensitivity ISO250)
*5 When [Extended ISO] is set
•
Switchable between 1/3 EV and 1 EV steps
Image stabilizer
≥ Image stabilizer type
Compliant with Image sensor shift type, 5-axis stabilizer, Dual I.S.2
≥ Image stabilizer effect
In-body image stabilizer: 8.0 stops
[Focal length f=60 mm (35 mm film camera equivalent f=120 mm), using an
interchangeable lens (H-ES12060)]
Dual I.S.2: 7.5 stops
[Focal length f=140 mm (35 mm film camera equivalent f=280 mm), using an
interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140)]
(Based on the CIPA standard, Yaw/Pitch direction)
Materials – Specifications
819
White balance
≥ White balance mode
AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent lights / Flash / Set
mode 1, 2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4
AWB lock supported
Shutter
≥ Type
Focal-plane shutter
≥ Shutter speed
Pictures:
Mechanical shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/8000 of a
second
Electronic front curtain: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/2000 of a
second
Electronic shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 seconds to 1/32000 of a
second
Videos:
1/25
*6
of a second to 1/25000 of a second
*6 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in Creative Video mode and focus mode is
set to [MF], this can be set up to 1/8 of a second
≥ Flash synchronization speed
Equal to or smaller than 1/250 of a second
Materials – Specifications
820
Burst recording
≥ Mechanical shutter
High speed: 14 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 10 frames/second ([AFC])
Medium speed: 6 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
Low speed: 2 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
≥ Electronic front curtain
High speed: 14 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 9 frames/second ([AFC])
Medium speed: 6 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
Low speed: 2 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
≥ Electronic shutter
[SH75]/[SH75 PRE]: 75 frames/second ([AFS], [MF])
[SH60]/[SH60 PRE]: 60 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
[SH20]/[SH20 PRE]: 20 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
High speed: 14 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 9 frames/second ([AFC])
Medium speed: 6 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
Low speed: 2 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
≥ Maximum number of frames recordable (SH burst recording)
[FINE] / [STD.] / [RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.] / [RAW]: 200 frames
≥ Maximum number of frames recordable (High speed, medium speed, low
speed)
[FINE] / [STD.]: 200 frames or more
[RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.]: 160 frames or more
[RAW]: 170 frames or more
•
Using an SDXC memory card compliant with UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3
(When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic)
Materials – Specifications
821
Zoom
≥ Extended Tele Conversion (Picture)
Max. 2.0× (when a picture size of [S] is selected.)
Microphone / Speaker
≥ Microphone
Stereo
≥ Speaker
Monaural
Interface
≥ USB
USB Type-C
®
, SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2 Gen 2)
Supports USB Power Delivery (9.0 V/3.0 A)
Output: DC 5 V, 900 mA
≥ HDMI
HDMI Type A
≥ [REMOTE]
‰2.5 mm jack
≥ [MIC]
‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Mic Input (Plug-in Power) / Mic Input / Line Input (Operate the menu to switch
between these inputs)
Standard input level: −55 dBV (Mic Input) / −10 dBV (Line Input)
≥ Headphones
‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Materials – Specifications
822
Splash Resistant
Yes
Recording to an external SSD
Yes
External dimensions / Mass (Weight)
≥ External dimensions
Approx. 134.3 mm (W)×102.3 mm (H)×90.1 mm (D)
(5.29″ (W)×4.03″ (H)×3.55″ (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 658
g
/1.45 lb (camera body, with battery and one card)
Approx. 575
g
/1.27 lb (only camera body)
Operating environment
≥ Recommended operating temperature
−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
•
Battery performance temporarily worsens at low temperatures (−10 oC to 0 oC
(14 oF to 32 oF)), reducing the number of pictures that can be taken and the
available recording time.
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
Materials – Specifications
823
Wi-Fi
≥ Compliance standard
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless LAN protocol)
≥ Frequency range used (central frequency)
Specifications vary depending on the country or area where the camera was
purchased.
Refer to the “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Quick Start Guide>”
(supplied) for details.
≥ Encryption method
Wi-Fi compliant WPA™ / WPA2™ / WPA3™
≥ Access method
Infrastructure mode
Bluetooth
≥ Compliance standard
Bluetooth v5.0, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE)
≥ Frequency range used (central frequency)
2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
The symbols on this product (including the accessories) represent the
following:
AC
DC
Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
Materials – Specifications
824
Interchangeable Lens:
H-ES12060 “LEICA DG VARIO-ELMARIT 12-60mm/F2.8-4.0 ASPH./
POWER O.I.S.”
≥ Mount
Micro Four Thirds Mount
≥ Focal length
f=12 mm to 60 mm
(35 mm film camera equivalent: 24 mm to 120 mm)
≥ Lens construction
14 elements in 12 groups (4 aspherical lenses, 2 ED lenses)
≥ Aperture type
9 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm
≥ Maximum aperture
F2.8 (Wide) to F4.0 (Tele)
≥ Minimum aperture value
F22
≥ Angle of view
84o (Wide) to 20o (Tele)
≥ In focus distance
0.20 m (0.66 feet) to ¶ (Wide)/0.24 m (0.79 feet) to ¶ (Tele) (from the focus distance
reference line)
≥ Maximum image magnification
0.3× (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.6×)
≥ Optical Image Stabilizer
Yes
Materials – Specifications
825
≥ Filter diameter
62 mm
≥ Maximum diameter
‰68.4 mm (2.7″)
≥ Overall length
Approx. 86 mm (3.4″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 320
g
(0.70 lb)
≥ Dust and splash resistant
Yes
≥ Recommended operating temperature
−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
Materials – Specifications
826
Interchangeable Lens:
H-FS12060 “LUMIX G VARIO 12-60mm/F3.5-5.6 ASPH./POWER O.I.S.”
≥ Mount
Micro Four Thirds Mount
≥ Focal length
f=12 mm to 60 mm
(35 mm film camera equivalent: 24 mm to 120 mm)
≥ Lens construction
11 elements in 9 groups (3 aspherical lenses, 1 ED lens)
≥ Aperture type
7 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm
≥ Maximum aperture
F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)
≥ Minimum aperture value
F22
≥ Angle of view
84o (Wide) to 20o (Tele)
≥ In focus distance
0.20 m (0.66 feet) to ¶ (Wide)/0.25 m (0.82 feet) to ¶ (Tele) (from the focus distance
reference line)
≥ Maximum image magnification
0.27× (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.54×)
≥ Optical Image Stabilizer
Yes
Materials – Specifications
827
≥ Filter diameter
58 mm
≥ Maximum diameter
‰66.0 mm (2.6″)
≥ Overall length
Approx. 71 mm (2.8″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
≥ Dust and splash resistant
Yes
≥ Recommended operating temperature
0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 210
g
(0.46 lb)
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
828
Trademarks and Licenses
•
Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered
trademarks of OM Digital Solutions Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the
European Union and other countries.
•
SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
•
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, HDMI Trade dress and
the HDMI Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
Administrator, Inc.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
829
•
USB Type-C
®
and USB-C
®
are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
•
The USB Type-C
®
Charging Trident Logos are trademarks of USB Implementers
Forum, Inc.
•
The SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps Trident Logo is a registered trademark of USB
Implementers Forum, Inc.
•
QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Apple Inc., used under license therefrom.
•
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Holdings Corporation.
•
Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
•
Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
•
Apple, Final Cut Pro, Mac, macOS, and ProRes are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
•
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
•
Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
830
•
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Holdings Corporation is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
•
“Wi-Fi
®
” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
•
“WPA™”, “WPA2™”, and “WPA3™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
•
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
•
Samsung is the registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
•
LEICA is a registered trademark of Leica Microsystems IR GmbH. ELMARIT is a
registered trademark of Leica Camera AG. The LEICA DG lenses are manufactured
using measurement instruments and quality assurance systems that have been
certified by Leica Camera AG based on the company’s quality standards.
•
Other names, company names, product names mentioned in this document are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
831
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL
V2.0),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version
2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or
(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/
or LGPL V2.1.
The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Please refer to
the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting [MENU/SET]
[Setup] [Others] [Firmware Version] [Software info].
At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic will give to any third
party who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more
than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL V2.0 or
LGPL V2.1, as well as the respective copyright notice thereof.
Contact Information: [email protected]
The source code and the copyright notice are also available for free in our website
below.
https://panasonic.net/cns/oss/index.html
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of
a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video
in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that
was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from
a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be
implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA,
L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
832
Ecodesign information
The following is Ecodesign information required by EU Commission Regulation.
•
For guidance on how to activate and deactivate the wireless network port, see:
– Wi-Fi / Bluetooth: 634
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying
documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and
batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used
batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in
accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health
and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact
your local authority.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in
accordance with national legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In
this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemical involved.
About an AC Adaptor and a USB Connection Cable
for European models
Model No. DC-G9M2E/DC-G9M2LE/DC-G9M2ME
For the purpose of compliance with amending Directive 2014/53/EU of 27 December
2022 and for ecological reasons, an AC adaptor and a USB connection cable are not
included in the package manufactured after September 2024.
Charge using an AC adaptor (optional/commercially available) and a USB connection
cable (commercially available).
•
Using the camera body and the optional AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11).
•
It is recommended to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11:
optional).
•
You can charge with the camera body using a commercially available AC adaptor
and a USB connection cable.
* Recommended specifications for the commercially available AC adaptor
– Supports PD (Power Delivery)
– Supports 9 V/3 A (27 W) DC output
– USB Type-C terminal
* Use a USB connection cable with 27 W output or better for charging.
•
You can also use an AC adaptor with 5 V/500 mA or better for charging.
However, charging time may be longer than with the recommended AC adaptor.
•
Operation is not guaranteed with all commercially available devices.
Charging time Approx. 170 min
USB PD fast charging
The power delivered by the charger must be between min. 2.5 Watts
required by this product, and max. 27 Watts in order to achieve the
maximum charging speed.
F-1
Firmware Update
≥ Firmware Ver. 2.0: F-3
≥ Firmware Ver. 2.2: F-13
≥ Firmware Ver. 2.3: F-50
≥ Firmware Ver. 2.5: F-87
The firmware has been updated to improve camera capabilities, add
functionality, and enhance security.
The following pages describe the details of the firmware update.
•
To check the firmware version of the camera, select [Firmware Version] in the
[Setup] ([Others]) menu.
•
For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware,
visit the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index.html
(English only)
Firmware Update
F-2
About Applications/Software
When you have updated the firmware for the camera, use the latest
version of the application for your smartphone or the software for your PC.
“LUMIX Lab ”
•
Install or update the application on your smartphone.
“LUMIX Sync”
•
Install or update the application on your smartphone.
“LUMIX Tether”
•
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
(English only)
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data
F-4
Support for Output of RAW Video Data
≥ Outputting RAW Video Data via HDMI: F-6
≥ Notes When Outputting RAW Video Data: F-11
12-bit RAW Video Data with a maximum resolution of 5.8K can now be
output via HDMI to a compatible external recorder.
(A) RAW Video
(B) External recorder
•
Recording of the RAW Video Data of this camera has been confirmed on the
following external recorders. (As of December 2023)
– ATOMOS: “NINJA V”/“NINJA V+”/“NINJA”/“NINJA ULTRA”/“SHOGUN”/“SHOGUN
ULTRA”/“SHOGUN CONNECT”
– Blackmagic Design: “Blackmagic Video Assist 5″ 12G HDR”/“Blackmagic Video
Assist 7″ 12G HDR”
HDMI
4.4K(4:3) / PIXEL/PIXEL
59.94p/50.00p
5.8K(4:3) / FULL
29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
5.7K(17:9) / FULL
59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
C4K(17:9) / PIXEL/PIXEL
119.88p/100.00p/59.94p/50.00p/
29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
(A)
(B)
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data
F-5
•
For external recorder firmware versions that support recording of RAW Video Data,
check the following site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
•
For details about external recorders, contact either ATOMOS or Blackmagic Design.
•
This does not guarantee all of the capabilities that the compatible external recorder
may have.
•
You will need compatible software to edit the RAW Video Data recorded with the
external recorder.
•
When editing RAW video data that was recorded with an ATOMOS recorder, in order
to match the coloring with the V-Log/V-Gamut, download the LUT (Look-Up Table)
file from the following support site and load it into the software.
•
Visit the following site to download LUT file or view the latest support information:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
•
Video cannot be recorded to cards while RAW Video Data is being output via
HDMI.
•
When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], RAW Video Data
cannot be output via HDMI.
•
When the [Rec Quality] is set to 5.7K/60p (50p) or C4K/120p (100p) and
recording to a Blackmagic Design recorder, it is recommended to set the codec
quality on the recorder to the following:
– When recording to an SSD: constant bitrate 5:1 or less
– When recording to an SD card: constant bitrate 8:1 or less
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data
F-6
Outputting RAW Video Data via HDMI
[HDMI RAW Data Output] has been added to the [Video] menu. The image
quality for the output images is set in [Rec Quality].
Getting started:
1 Turn off the camera and the external recorder.
2 Connect the camera and the external recorder with a commercially available
HDMI cable.
•
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m
(4.9 feet) long).
3 Turn on the camera and the external recorder.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [HDMI RAW Data Output].
≥
[]
[]
[HDMI RAW Data Output]
[ON]
•
[HDMI RAW] is displayed on the recording screen.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data
F-7
3
Select a recording quality.
≥
[]
[]
[Rec Quality]
4
Set the HDMI input on the external recorder.
•
When the connection is complete, images will be displayed on the screen of
the external recorder.
There are differences from normal HDMI output operation.
•
[HDMI Rec Output] in the [Custom] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
– [Info Display] is not available. You cannot output the camera information
display to an external recorder connected by HDMI.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data
F-8
[Rec Quality] (When [HDMI RAW Data Output] is selected)
* Recording on the “NINJA V”/“NINJA”/“SHOGUN” is not available.
[Rec Quality]
[System
Frequency]
[Image Area
of Video]
Resolution Frame rate
[5.8K/30p/4:3]
*
59.94Hz(NTSC)
[FULL] 5760×4320 29.97p
[5.8K/24p/4:3] [FULL] 5760×4320 23.98p
[5.7K/60p/17:9]
*
[FULL] 5728×3024 59.94p
[5.7K/30p/17:9] [FULL] 5728×3024 29.97p
[5.7K/24p/17:9] [FULL] 5728×3024 23.98p
[4.4K/60p/4:3]
*
[PIXEL/PIXEL] 4352×3264 59.94p
[C4K/120p/17:9]
*
[PIXEL/PIXEL] 4096×2160 119.88p
[C4K/60p/17:9] [PIXEL/PIXEL] 4096×2160 59.94p
[C4K/30p/17:9] [PIXEL/PIXEL] 4096×2160 29.97p
[C4K/24p/17:9] [PIXEL/PIXEL] 4096×2160 23.98p
[5.8K/25p/4:3]
50.00Hz(PAL)
[FULL] 5760×4320 25.00p
[5.7K/50p/17:9]
*
[FULL] 5728×3024 50.00p
[5.7K/25p/17:9] [FULL] 5728×3024 25.00p
[4.4K/50p/4:3]
*
[PIXEL/PIXEL] 4352×3264 50.00p
[C4K/100p/17:9]
*
[PIXEL/PIXEL] 4096×2160 100.00p
[C4K/50p/17:9] [PIXEL/PIXEL] 4096×2160 50.00p
[C4K/25p/17:9] [PIXEL/PIXEL] 4096×2160 25.00p
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data
F-9
•
Bit value: 12-bit
•
Audio format: LPCM (4ch)
– When the XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) is connected, if [4ch
Mic Input] is set to [ON], 4-channel audio can be recorded.
– Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks
of the video.
•
[Image Area of Video] is fixed to the image area according to the [Rec Quality]
setting.
•
[Sound Rec Quality] can be set to [96kHz/24bit] when you have connected an XLR
Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), Stereo Shotgun Microphone
(DMW-MS2: optional), or Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional).
Monitor/Viewfinder Display When Outputting RAW Video
Data
Images equivalent to those recorded when recording with V-Log are
displayed on the monitor/viewfinder of the camera for monitoring purposes.
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] with the [Vlog_709] preset applied can be used
for the [V-Log View Assist].
•
The LUT for the monitor display cannot be changed.
•
When you use [LUT View Assist (Monitor)], [709] is displayed on the screen and
[RAW] is displayed on the screen as a [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] item.
•
[Luminance Spot Meter], and [BASE/RANGE] of [Zebra Pattern] are set at “Stop”
units.
(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data
F-10
Notes on displayed images
•
The images displayed on the camera do not affect the RAW Video Data that is
output.
•
The images displayed on the external recorder are images that suit the external
recorder specifications. This means that there may be differences between the
images displayed on the camera and the images displayed on the external recorder.
•
The monitor/viewfinder of the camera shows images with the angle of view of the
RAW Video Data. There may be some difference with the angle of view of the data
recorded on the external recorder.
[HDMI Time Code Output]/[HDMI Recording Control]
The time code of the camera can be added and output via HDMI to the
external recorder.
In addition, recording can be started and stopped on the external recorder
by using the video rec. button and shutter button of the camera.
1 Set [HDMI Time Code Output] to [ON].
•
[]
[]
[Time Code]
[HDMI Time Code Output]
[ON]
2 Set [HDMI Recording Control] to [ON].
•
[]
[]
[HDMI Rec Output]
[HDMI Recording Control]
[ON]
•
[HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to
[ON] in [ ] mode.
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Support for Output of RAW Video Data
F-11
Notes When Outputting RAW Video Data
Operation is as follows when outputting RAW Video Data:
•
ISO sensitivity can be set in the range between [500] and [12800] (sensor output
60 fps or lower) or between [250] and [3200] (sensor output 61 fps or higher). You
can set between [125] and [12800] when [Extended ISO] is set.
•
The minimum shutter speed changes as follows when recording with MF and
[Exposure Mode] is set to [M].
– When [Rec Quality] is set to [C4K/120p/17:9]: can be set down to 1/125 of a
second
– When [Rec Quality] is set to [C4K/100p/17:9]: can be set down to 1/100 of a
second
•
[AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] and [ ] cannot be used for white balance.
•
[Photo Style] is fixed to [V-Log], and Image quality cannot be adjusted.
•
[ ]/[ ] of the AF mode is not available.
•
Enlarging the display with [MF Assist] and [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] is not
possible.
•
The following functions are not available:
– [Master Pedestal Level]
– [i.Dynamic Range]
– [Vignetting Comp.]
– [Diffraction Compensation]
– [Filter Settings]
– [Rec. File Format]
– [Filtering] and [add to list] in [Rec Quality]
– [Rec Quality (My List)]
– [Luminance Level]
– [E-Stabilization (Video)] ([Image Stabilizer])
– [Segmented File Recording]
– [Color Bars]
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Added Menus
F-12
Added Menus
Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available
for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording
Mode
•
“ATOMOS”, “ATOMOS NINJA”, “SHOGUN” and “ATOMOS SHOGUN” are
registered trademarks of Atomos Limited.
•
‘Blackmagic Design’ is a registered trademark of Blackmagic Design Pty. Ltd.
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Format]
[HDMI RAW Data Output] [OFF]
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Image Format]
[HDMI RAW Data Output]
F-13
Firmware Ver. 2.2
≥ Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style: F-14
≥ [REAL TIME LUT] Function Has Been Enhanced: F-21
≥ [LUT Library] Function Has Been Enhanced: F-22
≥ RAW Processing Functionality Has Been Enhanced: F-27
≥ Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”: F-30
≥ Using “LUMIX Lab”: F-36
≥ [Wi-Fi Frequency Bands] Has Been Added to [Wi-Fi Setup]: F-45
≥ Additions/Changes to Other Functions: F-46
≥ Added Menus: F-49
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style
F-14
Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style
≥ Changes to the Functionality of [REAL TIME LUT]: F-14
≥ My Photo Style Functionality Has Been Enhanced: F-17
Changes to the Functionality of [REAL TIME LUT]
It is now possible to select the LUT file while checking the status of what is
applied in the live view. Furthermore, support is now available to load the
base Photo Style information for LUT files.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Photo Style]
[REAL TIME LUT]
You can apply the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]
Function Has Been Enhanced: F-22)
•
The Photo Style acting as the base is set automatically by the applied LUT file. (If
there is no base Photo Style information in the LUT file, you can select [V-Log].)
Use My Photo Style when you want to change the Photo Style that will act as the
base.
•
The Photo Style can also be changed to [REAL TIME LUT] in the recording screen
by pressing the Fn button assigned with [REAL TIME LUT]. ([REAL TIME LUT]
Function Has Been Enhanced: F-21)
Selecting the LUT file to apply
1 Press 34 to select [LUT] and then press [ ].
2 Rotate , or to select the LUT file to apply, then press or .
3 Press the shutter button or video rec. button to start recording.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style
F-15
Adjusting Image Quality ([REAL TIME LUT])
Adjust image quality with the LUT file applied.
1 Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
•
Adjusted items are indicated with [¢].
2 Press or .
•
When the image quality is adjusted, the Photo Style icon on the recording
screen is indicated with [¢].
Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)
[LUT Opacity]
Adjusts the LUT file effect.
[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast in the image.
[Highlight]
Adjusts the brightness of bright areas.
[Shadow]
Adjusts the brightness of dark areas.
[Saturation]
Adjusts the vividness of colors.
[Grain Effect]
[Low]/[Standard]/[High]: Sets the grain effect level.
[Off]
[Color Noise]
[On]: Adds color to the grain effect.
[Off]
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style
F-16
[Sharpness]
Adjusts the outlines in the image.
[Noise Reduction]
Adjusts the noise reduction effect.
•
Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in picture resolution.
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT], the range of ISO sensitivity levels
you can use depends on the base Photo Style of the applied LUT file.
•
When [LUT] is set to [OFF] in the image quality adjustments of [REAL TIME
LUT], [Photo Style] will operate the same as the Photo Style that acts as the
base.
•
[Master Pedestal Level] is not available when the base Photo Style in [REAL
TIME LUT] is set to [V-Log].
•
When a LUT file has not been applied in [REAL TIME LUT] (base Photo Style is
[V-Log]), [Luminance Spot Meter] is measured with “Stop” units and [Zebra
Pattern] is set in Stop units.
•
[REAL TIME LUT] cannot be selected as a [Photo Style] in [RAW Processing].
The Photo Styles that can be selected for images recorded with [REAL TIME
LUT] depend on the base Photo Style.
•
[Color Space] is fixed to [sRGB] when the base Photo Style in [REAL TIME LUT]
is set to [V-Log].
•
ISO sensitivity is equivalent to the following when gain is 0 dB in [SS/Gain
Operation]:
– When set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] (base Photo Style is [V-Log]) in [Photo
Style]: 500 (sensor output 60 fps or lower)/250 (sensor output 61 fps or higher)
S
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style
F-17
My Photo Style Functionality Has Been Enhanced
It is now possible to apply up to 2 LUT files that have been registered in the
[LUT Library].
[]/[] [] [Photo Style] Select [MY PHOTO
STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10]
1 Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
•
Adjusted items are indicated with [¢].
2 Press or .
•
When the image quality is adjusted, the Photo Style icon on the recording
screen is indicated with [¢].
Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)
[LUT]
Applies the preset or the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]
Function Has Been Enhanced: F-22)
1 Select one of [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] in [Photo Style].
2 Press 34 to select [LUT] and then press [ ].
3 Press to select the LUT file to apply, then press or .
[LUT Opacity]
Adjusts the LUT file effect.
•
When applying 2 LUT files, the displays with [LUT1] applied have [LUT2] applied.
•
The Photo Style will be the base Photo Style of the applied LUT file ([LUT1] if 2
LUT files are applied).
•
[ ] switches to [ ] when [LUT1] or [LUT2] is applied in image quality
adjustments.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style
F-18
•
The items that you can adjust the image quality for depend on the Photo Style type.
*1
*1
*1
([Saturation])
([Color Tone])
*2
*2
*2
*2,3
*3
*2,3
*2,3
*1,3
/
/
/
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
S
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style
F-19
*1 Adjustment may not be possible depending on the base Photo Style.
*2 Can be set when a LUT file is applied with My Photo Style.
*3 Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
*4 You can set up to 2 LUT files when the [Photo Style] is My Photo Style.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Changes to the Functionality of Photo Style
F-20
Range Properties When Recording with a LUT File
Applied
The following table shows the range properties for videos recorded with
LUT files applied in Photo Style:
(A) MP4
(B) MOV
(C) Apple ProRes 422HQ/422
Base Photo Style of
[REAL TIME LUT]/
My Photo Style
LUT file
applied
[Rec. File
Format]
[Luminance Level]
Range
property
(A) (B) (C)
[V-Log]
[Vlog_709]
Fixed to [16-255]
([64-1023])
Video
range
Fixed to [64-940]
Video
range
Other than
[Vlog_709]
Fixed to [0-255]
([0-1023])
Full range
Fixed to [64-940]
Video
range
[Hybrid Log Gamma] All Fixed to [64-940]
Video
range
Other than the above All
[0-255]([0-1023]) Full range
[16-235]([64-940])/
[16-255]([64-1023])
Video
range
Fixed to [64-940]
Video
range
•
When generating LUT files from recorded video files using image editing
software, we recommend using video files recorded with [Luminance Level] set
to [0-255] ([0-1023]) or [16-235] ([64-940]).
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – [REAL TIME LUT] Function Has Been Enhanced
F-21
[REAL TIME LUT] Function Has Been
Enhanced
Set the Photo Style to [REAL TIME LUT] and apply a LUT file.
1
Register [REAL TIME LUT] to the Fn button. (Fn
Buttons: 527)
2
Display the LUT file selection screen.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
•
When setting up initially, etc., after purchase, the QR code that takes you to
the site for downloading “LUMIX Lab” may be displayed.
3
Select the LUT.
≥Press 21 to select, and then press or .
≥You can also select by rotating , or .
≥The LUT file list is displayed when you press [DISP.].
•
You can apply the LUT file that was registered in the [LUT Library]. ([LUT
Library] Function Has Been Enhanced: F-22)
•
[ ] is displayed on the recording screen when a LUT file has not been
applied.
•
To cancel Real Time LUT, press [Q].
Sample LUT1
Switch
Cancel Real Time LUT
ュリヴヱハ
Set
Q
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – [LUT Library] Function Has Been Enhanced
F-22
[LUT Library] Function Has Been Enhanced
≥ Base Photo Style of LUT files: F-25
Register LUT files to the camera to use with Photo Style and LUT View
Assist.
Using the “Panasonic LUMIX Lab” smartphone app, you can register LUT
files on the smartphone in the [LUT Library] on the camera. (LUT Library
Operations: F-36)
1
Insert a card on which a LUT file is saved into the
camera.
2
Select [LUT Library].
≥ [] [] [LUT Library]
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – [LUT Library] Function Has Been Enhanced
F-23
3
Select the registration destination.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press or .
≥If you select a registered item, the LUT file will be registered by
overwriting.
4
Select [Load].
≥Press or .
≥You can change the display order of LUT files by selecting
[Sorting].
≥You can change the registered name of LUT files by selecting [Edit
Title].
≥The registered LUT file is deleted when you select [Delete].
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – [LUT Library] Function Has Been Enhanced
F-24
5
Select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2].
6
Select the LUT file to load.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press or .
•
The firmware update registers 3 sample LUT files.
•
Up to 39 LUT files can be registered.
•
[Sorting], [Delete] and [Edit Title] are not possible with [Vlog_709].
•
[Sorting] and [Delete] are possible with the sample LUTs, but the default settings
are restored when [Reset] is performed.
•
With LUT files that have the Photo Style information (base Photo Style) set at the
time of creation (“.cube” format only), the base Photo Style icon is displayed.
•
The [LUT Library] is returned to the default settings when setup and custom
settings are reset. Registered LUTs are deleted.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – [LUT Library] Function Has Been Enhanced
F-25
Base Photo Style of LUT files
With Real Time LUT, the Photo Style information (base Photo Style) set in
the LUT file is recognized to determine the Photo Style.
You can add the base Photo Style information to the LUT files (“.cube”
format only) you create yourself. Open the LUT file with a text editor and
insert the Photo Style information under the title line.
• If there is a feature for selecting the character code in the text editor,
select UTF-8.
For example: LUT file (“.cube” format)
(A) Photo Style information
(B) Identifier tag
(C) Photo Style tag
•
A half-width space is required between the identifier tag and the Photo Style tag.
•
If the Photo Style information is absent or if it is not set correctly, [V-Log] is used as
the base Photo Style.
TITLE "Generated by Resolve"
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE STD
LUT_3D_SIZE 33
0.0170596 0.0150607 0.014023
0.0183261 0.0162356 0.0151827
・・・
(A)
(B)
(C)
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – [LUT Library] Function Has Been Enhanced
F-26
List of Photo Style Information
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE STD: [Standard]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE VIVD: [Vivid]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE NAT: [Natural]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LCLASN: [L.ClassicNeo]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE FLAT: [Flat]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LAND: [Landscape]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE PORT: [Portrait]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE MONO: [Monochrome]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LMONO: [L.Monochrome]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LMONOD: [L.Monochrome D]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LMONOS: [L.Monochrome S]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LEICAMONO: [LEICA Monochrome]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE CNED2: [Cinelike D2]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE CNEV2: [Cinelike V2]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE 709L: [Like709]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE HLG: [HLG]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE VLOG: [V-Log]
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – RAW Processing Functionality Has Been Enhanced
F-27
RAW Processing Functionality Has Been
Enhanced
When RAW processing is executed, it is now possible to apply up to 2 LUT
files that have been registered in the [LUT Library].
1
Select [RAW Processing].
≥ [] [] [RAW Processing]
2
Select the RAW image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and then press or .
3
Select a setting item.
≥Press 34 to select an item and then press or .
Setting Items ([RAW Processing])
[LUT]
Selects the LUT file registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library] Function Has Been
Enhanced: F-22)
[LUT Opacity]
Adjusts the LUT file effect.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – RAW Processing Functionality Has Been Enhanced
F-28
•
The items that can be adjusted depend on the selected [Photo Style].
([Saturation])
*1
([Color Tone])
*1
*1
*1
*1,2
*2
*1,2
*1,2
LUT1/
LUT2/
S
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – RAW Processing Functionality Has Been Enhanced
F-29
*1 Can be set when a LUT file is applied with [LUT1] or [LUT2].
*2 Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
F-30
Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
≥ Installing “LUMIX Lab”: F-31
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): F-32
Support is now available for “Panasonic LUMIX Lab” (“LUMIX Lab”
hereunder), the smartphone app. You can perform [LUT Library]
operations and transfer images by connecting to a smartphone on which
“LUMIX Lab” is installed.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
F-31
Installing “LUMIX Lab”
“LUMIX Lab” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
1
Connect the smartphone to a network.
2
(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3
Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix lab” into the search
box.
4
Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Lab” .
Supported OS
Android™: Android 10 or higher
iOS: iOS 15 or higher
•
This can also be downloaded via the QR code displayed with [REAL TIME LUT].
•
Use the latest version.
•
Supported OSs are current as of October 2024 and are subject to change.
•
Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Lab” menu for further details on how to operate.
•
The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Lab”, refer to the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
F-32
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection)
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a
smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
•
For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
When connecting the second and subsequent times, the connection is automatic
when you turn on the camera’s Bluetooth function.
Supported smartphones
Android™: Android 10 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding those that
do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 15 or higher
•
Turn on the Bluetooth function on the smartphone beforehand.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
F-33
1
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
2
View the content in the displayed guidance and start
using the app.
3
Switch to the [Camera] screen and select [Pair The
Camera].
(A) [Pair The Camera]
4
Set the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth Function] [ON]
•
The camera enters the pairing standby state.
•
When the camera is detected, it is displayed in “LUMIX Lab”.
5
Select the camera to be connected in “LUMIX Lab”.
•
Pairing is executed when you select [Pairing] in the confirmation screen.
(A)
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
F-34
End Bluetooth Connection
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of the
camera.
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth Function] Select [OFF]
•
The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.
•
Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect
to one smartphone at a time.
•
When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the
smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the
camera being detected correctly.
•
During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with
the smartphone, [ ] appears translucent.
•
Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information will
be deleted from the oldest first.
•
It is not possible to connect “LUMIX Lab” and “LUMIX Sync” to the camera at the
same time.
•
Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be
deleted.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
F-35
Canceling Pairing
1 Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
•
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Pairing] [Delete]
2 Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
•
Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.
•
When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-36
Using “LUMIX Lab”
≥ LUT Library Operations: F-36
≥ Import images: F-38
≥ [Auto Transfer]: F-40
≥ [Location Logging]: F-43
This explains the functions for operating the camera from “LUMIX Lab”.
LUT Library Operations
Operate “LUMIX Lab” to update the [LUT Library] in the camera.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): F-32)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
1
Select [LUT Transfer] in the [Camera] screen.
•
Connect to the camera with Wi-Fi. Select [Join] to start the connection.
(A) [LUT Transfer]
(A)
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-37
2
Select the LUT file in the [LUT Library] screen to edit.
•
You can transfer, rename, delete or reorder your LUT files.
•
A list of LUT files saved to “LUMIX Lab” is shown in [Device].
•
A list of LUT files saved to the camera is shown in [Camera].
3
Select from [Device] the LUT file to transfer.
4
Select [Transfer to Camera] and update the [LUT
Library] on the camera.
Vlog_709
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-38
Import images
Operate “LUMIX Lab” to transfer images from the camera to your
smartphone.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): F-32)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
1
Select [Transfer Photo / Video] in the [Camera] screen.
•
Connect to the camera with Wi-Fi. Select [Join] to start the connection.
2
Select the image to transfer.
≥Touch the checkbox to select.
3
Transfer the image.
≥Select [ ].
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-39
•
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
•
Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos and [Apple ProRes] videos
•
The transfer speed slows when the camera temperature rises.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-40
[Auto Transfer]
You can automatically transfer images from the camera to your
smartphone as they are taken.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): F-32)
1
Enable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] [ON]
≥The function can also be enabled in “LUMIX Lab”.
•
Connect to the smartphone with Wi-Fi.
2
Check the send settings on the camera and then press
or .
•
To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings: 683)
•
Automatic image transfer is possible when [ ] is displayed on the camera
recording screen.
3
Record with the camera.
•
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-41
To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] Select [OFF]
≥ A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
•
If the [Bluetooth Function] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON],
the camera automatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
when you turn on the camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Lab” on the smartphone to connect to the camera. Note that
if “LUMIX Sync ” is running on the smartphone, automatic image transfer may not
work properly.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-42
•
The following functions are not available when [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON]:
– [Wi-Fi Function]
– [Sheer Overlay]
•
Automatic image transfer is interrupted while recording or playing back videos.
The transfer starts at the start of the file where it was interrupted when the
transmission restarts.
•
If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is
interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no
longer be possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.
•
If automatic image transfer is performed in places where the ambient
temperature is high, communications may be interrupted.
The camera automatically reconnects when its temperature goes down and
automatic image transfer restarts.
If automatic image transfer does not restart, turn the camera off then on again to
reconnect.
•
Images recorded with the following function cannot be transferred automatically:
– [MP4]/[MOV]/[Apple ProRes] ([Rec. File Format])
•
The following functions are not available if there are images to transfer when
[Auto Transfer] is set to [ON]:
– [Time Lapse Video]
– [Stop Motion Video]
– Extracting a Picture
– [Video Divide]
– Deleting Images
– [Video Repair]
– [RAW Processing]
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-43
[Location Logging]
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth,
and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location
information.
Getting started:
•
Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): F-32)
1
Enable [Location Logging] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Location Logging] [ON]
≥The function can also be enabled in “LUMIX Lab”.
•
The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded
and [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera.
2
Record images with the camera.
•
Location information will be written to the recorded images.
GPS
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Using “LUMIX Lab”
F-44
•
When [ ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location information
cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.
Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within a
building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a wide
view of the sky to improve positioning performance.
In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
•
Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
•
Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the
subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
•
The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
GPS
GPS
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – [Wi-Fi Frequency Bands] Has Been Added to [Wi-Fi Setup]
F-45
[Wi-Fi Frequency Bands] Has Been Added
to [Wi-Fi Setup]
It is now possible to connect directly with your smartphone using the 5 GHz
frequency band.
Displaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu.
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Wi-Fi Frequency Bands]
This sets the frequency band used for direct connection with a smartphone.
[2.4GHz]: Connection uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
[5GHz]: Connection uses the 5 GHz frequency band.
•
Depending on the region, local regulations, etc. may prohibit you from using the
5 GHz frequency band outdoors. If this is the case, when outdoors, connect to the
smartphone using [2.4GHz] for the Wi-Fi connection.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-46
Additions/Changes to Other Functions
≥ Changing [Bluetooth]: F-46
≥ [REAL TIME LUT] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-48
≥ Changing the Luminance Level Settings: F-48
Changing [Bluetooth]
The structure of menus under [Bluetooth] has been changed to support
both “LUMIX Sync” and “LUMIX Lab”.
Pairing and Unpairing a Smartphone
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Pairing] [Add New
Device]/[Delete]
Connecting or Disconnecting a Paired Smartphone
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth Function]
[ON]/[OFF]
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-47
Notes on LUMIX Sync Settings
Settings for functions that are available when connected with “LUMIX
Sync” have been collected under [LUMIX Sync Settings].
[] [] [Bluetooth] Select
[LUMIX Sync
Settings]
[Send Image (Smartphone)]
Sends images on the camera to a smartphone.
[Remote Wakeup]
Enables or disables startup from a smartphone.
[Returning from Sleep Mode]
Sets the time taken to return from [Sleep Mode].
[Auto Clock Set]
Matches the time and time zone settings on the camera to the smartphone.
[Wi-Fi network settings]
Registers Wi-Fi wireless access points. Wireless access points used for Wi-Fi
connection will be registered automatically.
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-48
[REAL TIME LUT] Has Been Added to [Fn Button
Set]
[REAL TIME LUT] can be assigned to an Fn button.
[] [] [Fn Button Set] Select [Setting in
REC mode]
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
•
[REAL TIME LUT]
Changing the Luminance Level Settings
There are some changes to the luminance level setting values.
•
The range is fixed to [64-940] when [Rec. File Format] is set to [Apple ProRes].
•
When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MP4] or [MOV] and [Photo Style] is set to
[V-Log] or [REAL TIME LUT] (base Photo Style is [V-Log]), the range is fixed to
[0-255] ([0-1023]). However, even if [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT]
(base Photo Style is [V-Log]) or Photo Style is set to [V-Log] in My Photo Style, if
a [Vlog_709] LUT file has been applied, the range is fixed to [16-255] ([64-1023]).
Firmware Ver. 2.2 – Added Menus
F-49
Added Menus
Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available
for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Luminance Level] [16-235]
F-50
Firmware Ver. 2.3
≥ Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced: F-51
≥ Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced: F-55
≥ [XS] Has Been Added to [Picture Size]: F-58
≥ [MP4(Lite)] Has Been Added to [Rec. File Format]: F-60
≥ Zoom Functions Added: F-66
≥ Functional Changes to Enhance Security: F-75
≥ Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”: F-76
≥ Additions/Changes to Other Functions: F-83
≥ Added Menus: F-86
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced
F-51
Frame Marker Function Has Been
Enhanced
A maximum of 3 frames can be displayed.
You can set different aspect ratios, frame colors, and frame sizes/positions
for each of the frames.
≥ Composition of [SET] Menus Has Been Changed: F-52
≥ The Setting Method for [CUSTOM] in [Frame Aspect] Has Been
Changed: F-54
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced
F-52
Composition of [SET] Menus Has Been Changed
[] [] Select [Frame Marker]
[Frame 1]/[Frame 2]/[Frame 3] Settings
[ON] Displays the frame on the recording screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Frame 1]
Refer to “[Frame 1]/[Frame 2]/[Frame 3]
Settings”.
[Frame 2]
[Frame 3]
[Frame Mask]
Sets the opacity of the outside of the frame.
[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]
[Live View
Frame
Adjustment]
When set to [ON], the [Change Size/Position]
setting screen is displayed when you touch a
frame in the recording screen.
[ON]/[OFF]
[Frame Aspect]
Sets the aspect ratio of the frame.
[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[17:9]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/
[3:2]/[4:3]/[5:4]/[7:6]/[1:1]/[6:7]/[4:5]/[3:4]/
[2:3]/[9:16]/[9:17]/[CUSTOM]/[OFF]
[Frame Color] Sets the color of the frame.
[Change Size/Position] Sets the size and position of a frame.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced
F-53
When [Change Size/Position] Is Selected
You can change the size and position of the frame while maintaining the
aspect ratio of the frame.
•
You can change the height, width, and position of the frame if you select [CUSTOM]
in [Frame Aspect]. (The Setting Method for [CUSTOM] in [Frame Aspect] Has
Been Changed: F-54)
≥ Press
3421
to move the center position.
≥ Set the size with [ ] or [ ].
•
The position of the frame can be moved by dragging the center frame inside the
frame in the recording screen. The size of the frame can be changed by dragging the
frame at the top right of the frame.
≥ Press [Q] to switch the frame to be changed.
(A) Center coordinates (0 being the center of the screen)
(B) Frame size
•
Frame size can be set in the range between 20 % and 100 %.
•
The first press of [DISP.] returns the frame position to the center.
The second press returns the frame size to the default.
X,Y=(±0,±0)
100%
(A) (B)
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced
F-54
The Setting Method for [CUSTOM] in [Frame Aspect]
Has Been Changed
The [CUSTOM] setting in [Frame Aspect] is performed with [Change Size/
Position].
1
Select [SET] in the [Frame Marker] menu.
2
Select one of [Frame 1] to [Frame 3] and then select
[CUSTOM] in [Frame Aspect].
3
Select [Change Size/Position].
≥ Press
3421
to move the center position.
≥ Set the height of the frame with [ ], and the width with [ ].
•
The position of the frame can be moved by dragging the center frame inside the
frame in the recording screen. The height and width of the frame can be changed by
dragging the frame at the top or right edge of the frame.
≥ Press [Q] to switch the frame to be changed.
(A) Center coordinates (0 being the center of the screen)
(B) Height and width of the frame
•
Frame size can be set in the range between 20 % and 100 %.
•
The first press of [DISP.] returns the frame position to the center.
The second press returns the frame size to the default.
X,Y=(±0,±0)
100%
70%
(A) (B)
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced
F-55
Automatic Detection Function Has Been
Enhanced
It is now possible to set the subjects [TRAIN] and [AIRPLANE] for
automatic detection.
Furthermore, you can now select the [Target Parts] for [CAR] and
[MOTORCYCLE].
≥ How to Set Automatic Detection: F-55
How to Set Automatic Detection
When automatic detection is enabled, subjects for recording are
automatically detected and the camera focuses.
1
Set [AF Detection Setting] to [ON].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [AF Detection Setting] [ON]
•
You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic
detection [ON]/[OFF].
•
Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.
•
When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are
not animals may be detected as animals.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced
F-56
2
Select [Detecting Subject].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Detecting Subject]
•
Select [Type of Subject] and [Target Parts].
•
It is also possible to select by pressing [DISP.] in the AF mode selection
screen.
[Type of
Subject]
[HUMAN]
Detects humans.
Select either [Eye/Face/Body] or [Eye/Face] for the
[Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[ANIMAL]
Detects animals.
Select either [Body] or [Eye/Body] for the [Target
Parts].
•
Animals that can be detected are birds, canines
(including wolves, etc.), and felines (including
lions, etc.).
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[CAR]
Detects cars (mainly for motor sports).
Select either [Entire Subject] or [Main Part Priority]
for the [Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[MOTORCYCLE]
Detects motorcycles (mainly for motor sports).
Select either [Entire Subject] or [Helmet Priority] for
the [Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[TRAIN]
Detects railroad cars.
Select either [First Car] or [Main Part Priority] for
the [Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[AIRPLANE]
Detects aircraft and helicopters.
Select either [Airframe] or [Nose Priority] for the
[Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced
F-57
[Target
Parts]
Select the part to be brought into focus.
The parts you can select depend on the [Type of Subject] setting.
•
[AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [ ].
•
When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought
into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
•
Depending on [Detecting Subject], the number of subjects that can be detected
at once with [ ] of the AF mode will be different.
[HUMAN] ([Eye/Face/Body], [Eye/Face]): Maximum 15 (maximum 3 bodies
detected)
[ANIMAL] ([Body]), [CAR], [MOTORCYCLE], [TRAIN], [AIRPLANE]: Maximum 3
[ANIMAL] ([Eye/Body]): Maximum 1
•
Automatic detection may not be available due to the camera settings.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – [XS] Has Been Added to [Picture Size]
F-58
[XS] Has Been Added to [Picture Size]
[XS] has been added as a [Picture Size] for pictures.
≥ [Picture Size]: F-58
≥ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken According to Recording Media:
F-59
[Picture Size]
[]
[]
Select
[Picture Size]
•
[Resize] cannot be used on images recorded using the [XS] in [Picture Size].
[Aspect Ratio] [Picture Size]
[4:3] XS(3M) 1920×1440
[3:2] XS(2.5M) 1920×1280
[16:9] XS(2M) 1920×1080
[1:1] XS(2M) 1440×1440
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – [XS] Has Been Added to [Picture Size]
F-59
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken According to
Recording Media
Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be recorded on
recording media.
•
Using a Nextorage SDXC memory card.
•
Using a Samsung external SSD.
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
•
The listed values are a guide to the minimum number of pictures to be taken.
This may vary depending on the recorded subject.
•
[Aspect Ratio]: [4:3]; [Picture Quality]: [FINE]
•
[Aspect Ratio]: [4:3]; [Picture Quality]: [RAW+FINE]
[Picture
Size]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
XS(3M) 23610 47530 87500 171670 272440 544920
[Picture
Size]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
XS(3M) 990 2000 4020 7900 15760 31520
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – [MP4(Lite)] Has Been Added to [Rec. File Format]
F-60
[MP4(Lite)] Has Been Added to [Rec. File
Format]
[MP4(Lite)] has been added as a [Rec. File Format] for videos.
≥ [Rec. File Format]: F-60
≥ Recording Qualities Settings That Can Be Set for [MP4(Lite)]: F-62
≥ List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded:
F-63
≥ Available Recording Time with the Battery: F-64
≥ Video Recording Time with Recording Media: F-65
[Rec. File Format]
[] [] Select [Rec. File Format]
[MP4(Lite)]
This MP4 file format is suitable for editing with smartphone apps.
•
The limitations for recording with [MP4(Lite)] and with video recorded with
[MP4(Lite)] are the same as for [MP4].
•
The videos recorded with [MP4(Lite)] can be transferred to a smartphone using
[LUMIX Lab] with the following functions:
– [Auto Transfer]
–
[Send Image (Smartphone)]
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – [MP4(Lite)] Has Been Added to [Rec. File Format]
F-61
Size Interval for Dividing Files
A new file will be created to continue recording if the continuous recording
time or the file size exceeds the following conditions.
(A) Using an SDHC memory card
(B) Using an SDXC memory card
(C) Using an external SSD
[Rec. File
Format]
Resolution Bit rate
Recording
media
File division
Continuous
recording time
File size
[MP4(Lite)] All All
(A) 30 minutes 4 GB
(B)
3 hours
4 minutes
96 GB
(C)
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – [MP4(Lite)] Has Been Added to [Rec. File Format]
F-62
Recording Qualities Settings That Can Be Set for
[MP4(Lite)]
[] [] Select [Rec Quality]
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4(Lite)]
•
YUV, Bit value, Image compression: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP
•
Audio format: AAC (2ch)
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC)
•
In this document, videos are indicated as follows according to their resolution:
– 3.8K (3840×2880) video: 3.8K video
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
3840×2880
4:3 29.97p 50 HEVC
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p]
3840×2880
4:3 25.00p 50 HEVC
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – [MP4(Lite)] Has Been Added to [Rec. File Format]
F-63
List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special
Videos to be Recorded
: Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video
: Recording qualities for High Frame Rate video
: Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4(Lite)]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
[Rec Quality]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p]
S&Q
HFR
HLG
S&Q
HFR
HLG
S&Q
HFR
HLG
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – [MP4(Lite)] Has Been Added to [Rec. File Format]
F-64
Available Recording Time with the Battery
Listed below are the time lengths available for recording when the supplied
battery is being used.
•
Using a Nextorage SDXC memory card.
•
Using a Samsung external SSD.
•
The values listed are approximate.
Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)
•
[Image Area of Video]: [FULL]
(A) Using an SDXC memory card
(B) Using an external SSD
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
•
Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating
actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
[Rec. File
Format]
[Rec Quality]
Recording
media
Continuous
available
recording time
(minutes)
Actual available
recording time
(minutes)
[MP4(Lite)]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p]
(A) 100 50
(B) 90 45
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – [MP4(Lite)] Has Been Added to [Rec. File Format]
F-65
Video Recording Time with Recording Media
Listed below is the time lengths of videos that can be recorded on
recording media.
•
Using a Nextorage SDXC memory card.
•
Using a Samsung external SSD.
Video Recording Time
•
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
•
Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.
•
The values listed are approximate.
•
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4(Lite)]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p] 2h40m 5h30m 11h10m 21h55m 44h20m 88h45m
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
External SSD
capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1TB 2TB
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p] 2h40m 5h30m 11h10m 21h55m 44h20m 88h45m
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-66
Zoom Functions Added
[Crop Zoom(Photo)] and [Crop Zoom(Video)] have been added.
≥ [Crop Zoom(Photo)]: F-66
≥ [Crop Zoom(Video)]: F-70
≥ [Power Zoom Lens]: F-74
[Crop Zoom(Photo)]
Cut out the central section of the image to get an enhanced telescopic
effect without image quality deterioration.
It can even be used with a prime lens.
[] [] Select [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-67
[ON] Enables crop zoom.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Focal Length
Display
Setting]
Sets how focal length is displayed.
[Composite Focal Length]: Result of the
calculation “focal length of the optical zoom ×
crop zoom rate” (eg.: 180 mm)
[+ Crop Magnification]: The focal length of the
optical zoom and the crop zoom rate (eg.:
60 mm × 3.0)
[Minimum
Image Size]
A higher rate of zoom is possible the smaller the
[Picture Size] is.
[M]: maximum 1.4×
[S]: maximum 2.0×
[XS]: maximum approx. 3×
[Set
Recording
Image Size]
[ON]: Always records with the [Picture Size] set
in [Minimum Image Size].
[OFF]: [Picture Size] changes according to the
zoom position.
[Zoom
Speed(Photo)]
Sets the zoom speed during zoom operations.
Settings:
[H], [M], [L], [SL]
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-68
Using [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
1 Set [Crop Zoom(Photo)] to [ON].
•
[] [] [Crop Zoom(Photo)] [ON]
•
If the setting for 3421 is [No Setting] in [Setting in REC mode] in [Fn Button
Set], [Zoom Control] is assigned to 3421.
2 Perform the zoom operations.
Enlarge/Reduce
•
Press 34 or rotate / .
•
When [Touch Tab] is set to [ON], you can enlarge/reduce with Touch Zoom.
•
You can also enlarge/reduce by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Zoom
In(Tele)] or [Zoom Out(Wide)].
•
If you started the zoom operation with the assigned Fn button, you cannot
then enlarge/reduce with / .
•
When using a power zoom lens, crop zoom works after enlarging the optical
zoom to the maximum.
Step zoom
You can switch the crop zoom rate ([Minimum Image Size]).
1.0×[L] /1.4×[M] /2.0×[S] /approx. 3×[XS]
•
Press 21.
•
You can also switch by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Crop Zoom
Increment(Step)].
•
When using a power zoom lens, you can switch the crop zoom rate after
enlarging the optical zoom to the maximum.
14mm14mm14mm
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-69
3 Confirm your selection.
•
Press or .
•
Touch Zoom and the Fn buttons [Zoom In(Tele)], [Zoom Out(Wide)], and [Crop
Zoom Increment(Step)] can also be used in the recording screen.
•
With the addition of [Crop Zoom(Photo)], the [Ex. Tele Conv.] menu has been
removed.
•
RAW images are recorded without being cropped.
•
The [Focal Length Display Setting] settings work together across the following
menus:
– [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
– [Crop Zoom(Video)]
•
When the following functions are being used, [Crop Zoom(Photo)] is not
available:
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– High Resolution mode
•
When [Crop Zoom(Photo)] is set, [Cr] is displayed with the picture size.
•
While using [Crop Zoom(Photo)], a single AF area cannot be reduced to the
minimum.
•
When [Crop Zoom(Photo)] is [ON], the MF Assist magnification rate is between
about 3× to 6×. (This is fixed to 3× while recording videos, however.)
•
With RAW processing, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle
of view of [Crop Zoom(Photo)] from the time of recording.
•
For RAW images recorded using [Crop Zoom(Photo)], the [Picture Size] you can
select during processing may differ.
•
When [Crop Zoom(Photo)] is [ON], the AF-Point Scope magnification rate is
between about 3× to 6×.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-70
[Crop Zoom(Video)]
Cut out the central section of the image to get an enhanced telescopic
effect without image quality deterioration.
It can even be used with a prime lens.
[] [] Select [Crop Zoom(Video)]
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-71
[ON] Enables crop zoom.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Focal Length
Display
Setting]
Sets how focal length is displayed.
[Composite Focal Length]: Result of the
calculation “focal length of the optical zoom ×
crop zoom rate” (eg.: 180 mm)
[+ Crop Magnification]: The focal length of the
optical zoom and the crop zoom rate (eg.:
60 mm × 2.7)
[Zoom
Speed(Video)]
[During Recording Standby]: Sets the zoom
speed during recording standby.
[During Recording]: Sets the zoom speed
during recording.
Settings:
[H], [M], [L], [SL]
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-72
Using [Crop Zoom(Video)]
1 Set [Crop Zoom(Video)] to [ON].
•
[] [] [Crop Zoom(Video)] [ON]
•
If the setting for 3421 is [No Setting] in [Setting in REC mode] in [Fn Button
Set], [Zoom Control] is assigned to 3421.
2 Perform the zoom operations.
Enlarge/Reduce
•
Press 34 or rotate / .
•
When [Touch Tab] is set to [ON], you can enlarge/reduce with Touch Zoom.
•
You can also enlarge/reduce by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Zoom
In(Tele)] or [Zoom Out(Wide)].
•
If you started the zoom operation with the assigned Fn button, you cannot
then enlarge/reduce with / .
•
When using a power zoom lens, crop zoom works after enlarging the optical
zoom to the maximum.
Step zoom
You can switch the crop zoom rate ([Image Area of Video]).
FULL, PIXEL/PIXEL
•
Press 21.
•
You can also switch by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Crop Zoom
Increment(Step)].
•
When using a power zoom lens, you can switch the crop zoom rate after
enlarging the optical zoom to the maximum.
14mm
14mm
14mm
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-73
3 Confirm your selection.
•
Press or .
•
Touch Zoom and the Fn buttons [Zoom In(Tele)], [Zoom Out(Wide)], and [Crop
Zoom Increment(Step)] can also be used in the recording screen.
[Rec Quality] and Crop Zoom Rate
[Rec Quality] Maximum crop zoom rate
5.8K video, 5.7K video, 4.4K video —
3.8K video Approx. 1.5×
C4K video/4K video (120p/100p) —
C4K video (60p/50p/48p/30p/25p/24p) Approx. 1.3×
4K video (60p/50p/48p/30p/25p/24p) Approx. 1.4×
FHD video (240p/200p/120p/100p) —
FHD video (60p/50p/48p/30p/25p/24p) Approx. 2.7×
•
The [Focal Length Display Setting] settings work together across the following
menus:
– [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
– [Crop Zoom(Video)]
•
When the following functions are being used, [Crop Zoom(Video)] is not
available:
– [Rec Quality] for a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
– [S&Q] video with a frame rate exceeding 60 fps
•
When [Crop Zoom(Video)] is [ON], the MF Assist magnification rate is between
about 3× to 6×. (However, during video recording or in [ ]/[S&Q] mode, this is
fixed to 3×.)
•
The magnification for [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] is fixed to 3× when you use
[Crop Zoom(Video)].
•
When [Crop Zoom(Video)] is set to [ON], power consumption increases and the
battery is consumed faster. The temperature increase in the camera is also faster.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Zoom Functions Added
F-74
[Power Zoom Lens]
The zoom operation when using a lens that supports power zoom
(motorized zoom) has been changed.
•
This is available when using a supported interchangeable lens.
[] [] Select [Power Zoom Lens]
[Step Zoom]
When you operate the zoom with this setting [ON], the zoom will
stop at preset focal length positions.
•
This is not possible during video recording.
[Zoom
Speed(Photo)]
You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
[H], [M], [L], [SL]
•
If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not
change.
[Zoom
Speed(Video)]
[Zoom Ring]
This can be selected when a lens compatible with power zoom
that has a zoom lever and zoom ring is mounted on the camera.
The operations with the zoom ring are disabled when set to
[OFF] to prevent erroneous operation.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Functional Changes to Enhance Security
F-75
Functional Changes to Enhance Security
≥ Changes to Wi-Fi Functionality: F-75
Changes to Wi-Fi Functionality
In order to enhance security, password authentication will always be used
when establishing direct Wi-Fi connections between the camera and a
smartphone.
For this reason, the [Wi-Fi Password] menu item in [Wi-Fi Setup] has been
removed, and [Wi-Fi Password] will always be [ON].
When connecting to Wi-Fi via a wireless access point, the [TKIP] of
encryption method and [No Encryption] in [Security type] are no longer
supported.
For European models (DC-G9M2E/DC-G9M2LE/DC-G9M2ME)
The functionality to send images to a PC via Wi-Fi is no longer supported.
•
The [Send Images to PC While Recording]/[Send Images Stored in the Camera to
PC] menus in [Wi-Fi Function] can no longer be selected.
The composition of the menu to connect a smartphone with Wi-Fi has also been
changed to the following:
[]
[]
[Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[Control
With Smartphone]
•
The [PC Connection] menu item in
[Wi-Fi Setup]
has been removed.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-76
Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
The following functions have been added to “LUMIX Lab”:
≥ [Remote shooting]: F-76
≥ [Shutter Remote Control]: F-79
≥ Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations: F-81
[Remote shooting]
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while
viewing the live view images from the camera.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): F-32)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
1
Select [Remote shooting] in the [Camera] screen.
•
Connect to the camera with Wi-Fi. Select [Join] to start the connection.
(A) [Remote shooting]
(A)
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-77
2
Start recording.
•
The recorded image is saved on the camera.
(B) Takes a picture
(C) Starts/ends the video recording
•
When used in combination with [Auto Transfer], it is possible to automatically
transfer the remotely recorded images to a smartphone.
•
If [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON] using the setting menu for remote recording, it is
enabled when you return to the camera screen from the remote recording
screen.
•
Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.
(B) (C)
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-78
Operation Method During Remote Recording
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be
used during remote recording.
Touch [ ] in the “LUMIX Lab” remote recording screen.
•
The icon switches each time you touch it.
(Camera prioritized)
Operation is possible on both the camera and the smartphone.
•
The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.
(Smartphone prioritized)
Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
•
The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.
•
To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on the
screen, and select [End].
•
The default setting is [ ] (Camera prioritized).
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-79
[Shutter Remote Control]
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): F-32)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
1
Select [Shutter Remote Control] in the [Camera] screen.
(D) [Shutter Remote Control]
2
Start recording.
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
(D)
LOCK
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-80
Bulb Recording
The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is
useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.
Getting started:
•
Set the camera to [M] mode.
•
Set the camera shutter speed to [B] (Bulb).
1 Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger).
2 Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.
•
Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked
in a fully-pressed state.
(Slide [ ] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to
end recording)
•
During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry
out Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Shutter Remote Control] cannot be used.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-81
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by
pressing [Q] during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Send Image (Smartphone)].
Getting started:
•
Install “LUMIX Lab” on your smartphone.
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): F-32)
•
Press [ ] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image
1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press [Q].
3 Select [Single Select].
•
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.].
4 Select [OK] on the smartphone.
•
This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Send multiple images
1 Press [Q].
2 Select [Multi Select].
•
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.].
3 Select the images and then transfer.
21: Select images
: Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
4 Select [OK] on the smartphone.
•
This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-82
Using the menu to transfer easily
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
•
If [Single Select], press 21 to select the image and then press to execute.
•
If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”. (Send
multiple images: F-81)
•
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
•
Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos, [Apple ProRes] videos
•
When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
•
If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
•
You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Send Image (Smartphone)] cannot be used.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-83
Additions/Changes to Other Functions
≥ Menu Name of [Priority of Remote Device] Has Been Changed: F-83
≥ Composition of [Bluetooth] Menus Has Been Changed: F-84
≥ [Crop Zoom] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-84
≥ [Crop Zoom(Photo)]/[Crop Zoom(Video)] Has Been Added to [Q.MENU
Settings]: F-85
Menu Name of [Priority of Remote Device] Has Been
Changed
The name of the [Priority of Remote Device] menu has been changed.
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [Prio. Remote
Device(LUMIX Sync)]
You can set whether operations with the camera or the smartphone are prioritized
during remote recording using LUMIX Sync.
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-84
Composition of [Bluetooth] Menus Has Been
Changed
The composition of the [Bluetooth] menus in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu
has been changed.
[Bluetooth]
[Crop Zoom] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]
The function can be selected for an Fn button and assigned.
[] [] [Fn Button Set] Select [Setting in
REC mode]
[1] tab
[Others (Photo)]
•
[Crop Zoom]
– Can be set for [Crop Zoom(Photo)], [Zoom Control], [Zoom In(Tele)], [Zoom
Out(Wide)], [Crop Zoom Increment(Step)], and [Zoom Speed(Photo)].
[Bluetooth Function]
[Pairing]
[Add New Device]
[Delete]
[Send Image (Smartphone)]
[Auto Transfer]
[Location Logging]
[LUMIX Sync Settings]
[Remote Wakeup]
[Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Auto Clock Set]
[Wi-Fi network settings]
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-85
[2] tab
[Others (Video)]
•
[Crop Zoom]
– Can be set for [Crop Zoom(Video)], [Zoom Control], [Zoom In(Tele)], [Zoom
Out(Wide)], [Crop Zoom Increment(Step)], and [Zoom Speed(Video)].
[Crop Zoom(Photo)]/[Crop Zoom(Video)] Has Been
Added to [Q.MENU Settings]
The function can be selected for a Quick menu and assigned.
[] [] [Q.MENU Settings] [Item Customize
(Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]
[1] tab
[Others (Photo)]
•
[Crop Zoom(Photo)]
[Others (Video)]
•
[Crop Zoom(Video)]
Firmware Ver. 2.3 – Added Menus
F-86
Added Menus
Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available
for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording
Mode
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Crop
Zoom(Photo)]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Crop Zoom(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Crop Zoom(Photo)]
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Crop Zoom(Video)]
Firmware Ver. 2.5 – [Shutter Speed Limiter] Has Been Added
F-88
[Shutter Speed Limiter] Has Been Added
[Shutter Speed Limiter] has been added to the [Video] menu.
You can change the lower limit of the shutter speed according to the
recording frame rate of the video. When you set to [ON], you can limit the
shutter speed so that it does not go below the frame rate. If you want to
make the shutter speed longer than the frame rate, set to [OFF].
Set [Shutter Speed Limiter].
≥ [] [] [Shutter Speed Limiter]
[ON]
Limits the shutter speed so it does not go below the frame rate.
[OFF]
No limit is placed on the shutter speed so it does not go below the frame rate.
Firmware Ver. 2.5 – [Shutter Speed Limiter] Has Been Added
F-89
Minimum shutter speed
*1 The lower limit of the shutter speed has been changed when the video recording
frame rate is 47.95p.
*2 [ ] mode:
Can be set when [Exposure Mode] is [M]. (Setting the Exposure for Recording
Videos: 363)
[M] mode:
Can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is [OFF]. ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/
M]: 562)
Recording
frame rate
of the video
[Shutter Speed Limiter]
[ON] [OFF]
[AFS]/[AFC] [MF] [AFS]/[AFC] [MF]
23.98p/
24.00p/
25.00p
1/25 of a second
1/2 of a
second
*2
29.97p 1/30 of a second
47.95p
1/50 of a second
1/25 of a second ([iA]/[S]
*1
/
[M]
*1
)
1/50 of a second ([P]/[A])
48.00p
50.00p
59.94p 1/60 of a second
1/30 of a second ([iA]/[S]/[M])
1/60 of a second ([P]/[A])
100.00p 1/100 of a second
119.88p/
120.00p
1/125 of a second
200.00p 1/200 of a second
239.76p 1/250 of a second
Firmware Ver. 2.5 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-90
Additions/Changes to Other Functions
≥ Changes to the Functionality of My Menu: F-90
≥ Changes to the Functionality of [Constant Preview]: F-90
Changes to the Functionality of My Menu
When registering menu items shared by both the [Photo] menu and the
[Video] menu ([Photo Style], etc.) in My Menu, it is now possible to register
the items as single menu items.
Changes to the Functionality of [Constant Preview]
[Constant Preview] is now available for use when using the flash.
Firmware Ver. 2.5 – Added Menus
F-91
Added Menus
Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available
for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
:
Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Shutter Speed Limiter] [ON]
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Shutter Speed Limiter]
